Today's Hours: 12:00pm - 8:00pm

Books

  • Digital
    Alfred P. Kennedy Jr., Romeo C. Ignacio, Robert Ricca, editors.
    Summary: This book meets the need for a detailed resource that focuses on the unique challenges encountered in pediatric trauma and its clinical management. Short practically oriented chapters describe how to successfully treat a range of injuries across a variety of anatomical areas. Emphasis is placed on accounting for the injury mechanism providing recommendations on rapid assessment, initial stabilization and management strategies. Pediatric Trauma Care - A Practical Guide, comprehensively covers how to approach treating pediatric trauma patients suffering with a variety of injuries. Therefore, it is an ideal resource for all medical professionals who encounter these patients in their day-to-day practice.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction - (Unique Factors to Pediatric Trauma).-2 Injury Prevention
    3 Trauma Systems and Pedaitric Trauma Centers
    4 Rural Pediatric Trauma Surgery
    5 Disaster Management
    6 Pediatric Trauma in Humanitarian and Deployed Settings
    7 Initial Trauma Resuscitation
    8 Airway Management
    9 Management of Shock
    10 Blood Tranfusions in Trauma
    11 VTE Prophylaxis and Treatment
    12 Surgical Nutrition
    13 Thromboelastogram
    14 Traumatic Brain Injury
    15 Facial Injury
    16 Neck Injuries
    17 Spinal Injury
    18 Thoracic Injury (Lung and Chest Wall)
    19 Penetrating Abdominal Injury
    20 Liver Injury
    21 Pancreas, Gallbladder and Duodenum
    22 Splenic Injury
    23 Gastric Injury
    24 Small Bowel/Colon Injury
    25 Rectal Injury
    26 Perineal (saddle) injury
    27 Upper Tract Genitourinary Trauma
    28 Lower Tract Genitourinary Trauma
    29 Pelvic injury
    30 Extremity Orthopedic Injury
    31 Injuries to the Hand
    32 Vascular Injuries to the Heart and Great Thoracic Vessels
    33 Vascular injuries of the Abdominal Vessels
    34 Vascular Injuries of the Extremity
    35 Envenomation, bites and stings
    36 Child Abuse
    37 Hypothermia and Near-drowning
    38 Burns
    39 New Technologies in Pediatric Trauma.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Christine M. Houser.
    Summary: With hundreds of question and answer items and bite-sized chunks of information that can be read and processed easily, reviewing for the pediatric board exams - or just brushing up in your spare time - has never been easier. Pediatric Tricky Topics, Volume 1: A Practically Painless Review includes review items in pediatric orthopedics, trauma, environmental medicine, toxicology, rheumatology, and neurology topics, among others. The Q&A format allows for self-testing or study with a partner or a group and is practical and accessible enough to dip into during a few minutes of downtime at the hospital or office, and as such it is suitable for those studying for the pediatric board exam, practicing physicians brushing up their skills, and any busy clinician who wants to learn more about these topics while on the go.

    Contents:
    General Orthopedic Question and Answer Items
    General Trauma Question and Answer Items
    General Environmental Medicine Question and Answer Items
    General Toxicology Question and Answer Items
    General Prevention Question and Answer Items
    General Research and Statistics Question and Answer Items
    General Rheumatology Question and Answer Items
    Selected Neurology Topics
    General Neurology Question and Answer Items.-.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Springer
    Springer
  • Digital
    Harriet J. Paltiel, Edward Y. Lee, editors.
    Summary: This book is a unique, authoritative and clinically oriented text on pediatric ultrasound. It is your one-step, comprehensive reference for up-to-date information on pediatric ultrasound, addressing all aspect of congenital and acquired disorders encountered in clinical practice. The easy-to-navigate text is divided into 20 chapters. Each chapter is organized to cover the latest ultrasound techniques, normal development and anatomy, anatomic variants, key clinical presentations, characteristic ultrasound imaging findings, differential diagnosis and pitfalls where relevant. With more than 2000 images, examples of new technological developments such as contrast-enhanced ultrasound and elastography are included. Written by internationally known pediatric radiology experts and editorial team lead by acclaimed authors, Harriet J. Paltiel, MDCM and Edward Y. Lee, MD, MPH, this book is a practical and ideal guide for practicing radiologists, radiology trainees, ultrasound technologists as well as clinicians in other specialties who are interested in pediatric ultrasound.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Contributors and Editors
    Contributors
    About the Editors
    1: Ultrasound Imaging Techniques and Artifacts
    Introduction
    Acoustics
    Wavelength and Frequency
    Sound Propagation
    Acoustic Impedance
    Reflection
    Refraction
    Attenuation
    Distance Measurement
    Instrumentation
    Transmitter
    Transducer
    Receiver
    Image Display
    Image Storage
    Mechanical Transducer
    Array Transducer
    Transducer Selection
    Harmonic Imaging
    Spatial Compounding
    Three-Dimensional Ultrasound
    Doppler Ultrasound Continuous Wave Doppler
    Pulsed Wave Doppler
    Color Doppler
    Power Doppler
    B-Flow
    Elastography Imaging
    Quasi-Static Strain Elastography
    Dynamic Elastography
    Ultrasound Contrast Imaging
    Contrast Agents
    Pulse Inversion Imaging
    Ultrasound Artifacts
    Grayscale Artifacts
    Mirror Image: Multipath Reflection
    Refraction
    Reverberation, Comet-Tail, and Ring-Down Artifacts
    Side Lobe Artifact
    Enhancement and Shadowing Attenuation Artifacts
    Partial Volume Artifact
    Doppler Artifacts
    Technically Related Doppler Artifacts
    Inappropriate Doppler Settings Aliasing (Wraparound)
    Color Doppler Noise
    Flow Directional Abnormalities
    Anatomically Related Doppler Artifacts
    Spectral Mirror Image Artifact
    Tissue Vibration Artifact
    Twinkling Artifact
    Blooming Artifact
    Three-Dimensional Ultrasound Artifacts
    Ultrasound Contrast Agent Artifacts
    Blooming Artifact
    Systolic Peak Velocity Increase
    High-Intensity Transient Signals
    Ultrasound Safety
    Thermal Bioeffects
    Nonthermal Bioeffects
    Regulations and Policies
    References
    2: Brain
    Introduction
    Technique
    Patient Positioning Ultrasound Transducer Selection
    Imaging Approaches
    Normal Development and Anatomy
    Normal Development
    Normal Anatomy
    Cerebral Cortex
    Basal Ganglia and Thalami
    Ventricles
    Cisterna Magna
    Extra-Axial Fluid Spaces
    Congenital Brain Anomalies
    Dorsal Induction Disorders
    Chiari Malformations
    Anencephaly
    Hydranencephaly
    Ventral Induction Disorders
    Holoprosencephaly
    Septo-Optic (Pituitary) Dysplasia
    Anomalies of the Corpus Callosum
    Dandy-Walker Syndrome
    Neuronal Proliferation Disorders
    Hemimegalencephaly
    Neuronal Migration Disorders Lissencephaly
    Gray Matter Heterotopia
    Post-Migration Disorders
    Polymicrogyria
    Schizencephaly
    Intracranial Hemorrhage
    Preterm Infants
    Periventricular Hemorrhagic Infarction
    Cerebellar Hemorrhage
    Term Infants
    Epidural Hemorrhage
    Subdural Hemorrhage
    Subpial Hemorrhage
    Parenchymal Hemorrhage
    Choroid Plexus Hemorrhage
    Hypoxic-Ischemic Injury
    Global Hypoxic-Ischemic Injury
    Preterm Infants
    Term Infants
    Focal Hypoxic-Ischemic Injury
    Arterial Ischemic Stroke
    Venous Sinus Thrombosis
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Infectious Brain Disorders
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Michael Riccabona ; with contributions by Brian Coley, Andreas Gamillscheg, Bernd Heinzl, Gerolf Schweintzger.
    Summary: Ultrasound plays an important role in the diagnostic imaging of infants and children and has indeed become the workhorse for many conditions. This is attributable both to the avoidance of ionizing radiation and to the unique features displayed on ultrasound in children in almost all body areas. In the future the potential of ultrasound can be expected to increase further owing to new developments such as ultrasound contrast material, three- or four-dimensional ultrasound, and ultrasound elastography. This book systematically covers the use of ultrasound in all organ systems and throughout childhood. After discussion of the basics, including physics, artifacts, and procedural details, decision making regarding the use of ultrasound is elucidated by listing next imaging steps based on recommended imaging algorithms. The indications and prerequisites for a particular examination are documented, and practical tips and tricks are highlighted. The normal, age-dependent ultrasound findings and typical appearances in different pathologies are presented in detail and illustrated by numerous high-quality images. Particular emphasis is placed on those findings that differ from the adult sonographic appearances. In addition to the classic pediatric abdominal applications, detailed consideration is given to neurosonography, echocardiography, chest ultrasound, musculoskeletal and hip ultrasound, Doppler sonography, and interventional ultrasound. The potential role of the most modern techniques in various situations is explained. Pediatric Ultrasound will prove an invaluable source of information and an indispensable aid to decision making and diagnosis for radiology residents, experienced (pediatric) radiologists, sonographers, pediatricians, pediatric surgeons and urologists, and all other physicians who deal with children as a part of their daily practice.

    Contents:
    Basics: Physics of diagnostic ultrasound (US). US techniques. Artifacts. Biological effects of US. Practical US approach. Documentation and reporting. Future US methods. Basics of (Color) Doppler sonography
    Diagnostic flow charts, imaging algorithms, and graphs: Urinary tract diseases. Tumors and oncology. Abdomen. Systemic diseases. Graphs and illustrations for standardized measurements and volume calculations
    US investigations of various organs and systems: Pediatric cranial neurosonography. US of the neonatal spinal cord. Neck and facial/cervical glands. Chest US. Basics of pediatric and neonatal echocardiography. Abdominal US. Musculoskeletal and other small part US. US-guided interventions.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Michael Riccabona, editor.
    Summary: This book, now in a revised and updated second edition, systematically covers the use of ultrasound in all organ systems throughout childhood. After discussing the basics, including physics, ultrasound methods, and artifacts, it elucidates decision-making regarding the use of ultrasound by discussing diagnostic flow charts based on recommended imaging algorithms. The main part of the book addresses ultrasound investigations of the various organs. It documents the indications and prerequisites for specific examinations and offers practical tips and tricks. The normal, age-dependent ultrasound findings and typical appearances in different pathologies are presented in detail and illustrated by numerous high-quality images, with a particular emphasis on those findings that differ from the adult sonographic appearances. And finally, dedicated chapters explore point-of-care and emergency ultrasound, interventional ultrasound, and present orienting tables. This state-of-the-art book covers modern techniques and applications, like contrast-enhanced ultrasound, ultrasound elastography, and automated-image optimization, as well as all pediatric ultrasound applications from point-of-care ultrasound and orienting assessment also at the intensive care unit/emergency room to more detailed and advanced applications, e.g., in dedicated tertiary referral centers. Pediatric Ultrasound is an invaluable source of information and an indispensable aid to decision-making and diagnosis for radiology residents, (pediatric) radiologists, sonographers, pediatricians, (pediatric) surgeons, urologists, and all other physicians who deal with children as a part of their daily practice.

    Contents:
    PART I Basics / Theory / Methods: US Physics
    US Methods, artifacts, biologic effects and practice
    (Color) Doppler US: theory and artifacts, typical applications in childhood
    Contrast-enhanced US, and Ultrasound elastography in childhood
    Paediatric limited field of view US/point of care US (POCUS) and emergency US - when, how and for what
    Part II Diagnostic flow charts, imaging algorithms, and graphs: Imaging and imaging algorithms for common queries in childhood
    Measurements and volume calculations: basic considerations, graphs and illustrations for standardisation
    PART III US investigations of the various organs: Neurosonography in Neonates, Infants and Children
    US of the neonatal spinal canal and cord
    US of the neck in childhood
    Basics of pediatric echocardiography
    Ultrasound of the Chest
    Upper abdominal US in neonates, infants and children
    including novel applications
    US of the paediatric gastrointestinal tract
    Ultrasound of the urogenital tract in neonates, infants and children
    Neonatal and pediatric hip US
    Musculo-skeletal- & other small part US in childhood
    US of peripheral nerves in childhood
    PART IV Miscellaneous: US-guided interventions and invasive US procedures, and respective follow-up in childhood
    Normal values as relevant for paediatric US.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Melvin A. Shiffman, editor.
    Summary: The book starts with a short introduction to the topic, followed by a detailed description of the anatomical differences between exstrophy and gastroschisis. In the following chapters, the authors describe the surgical umbilicoplasty for congenital defects in children. Outcomes and complications will be discussed in the last chapter. Written by respected authors, this book will offer residents and fellows as well as practicing and highly experienced plastic surgeons essential guidance on treatment and decision-making concerning umbilical reconstruction. Its numerous illustrations and clearly structured content make the book a must-read.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anatomical Differences
    History
    Pediatric Umbilicoplasty
    Exstrophy
    Gastroschisis
    Urachal Pathology
    Complications and Outcomes.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Joshua M. Abzug, Scott H. Kozin, Dan A. Zlotolow, editors.
    Summary: Sub-specialization within pediatric orthopedics is growing, in part due to the development of free-standing children's hospitals and the desire by patients and their parents to have "experts" care for them. We are at the forefront of a trend in physicians classifying themselves as pediatric upper extremity surgeons. Numerous pediatric hospitals now have or are recruiting physicians to focus their practice in this area. Historically, these issues were treated by general orthopedic surgeons, adult hand surgeons, pediatric orthopedic surgeons, or plastic surgeons. However, none of these professionals treat the entirety of pediatric upper extremity pathology, and no single reference has focused on the treatment of the pediatric upper extremity as a whole. For example, fractures have typically been written about in pediatric textbooks, while tendon and nerve injuries are covered in adult hand textbooks. This textbook is a comprehensive, illustrated reference that discusses all aspects of the pediatric upper extremity, from embryology and functional development to nerve injuries, trauma, tumors, burns, sports injuries and more.

    Contents:
    I: DEVELOPMENT
    Embryology
    Functional development
    II: PHYSICAL EXAMINATION
    Physical examination
    Outcome measures
    III: IMAGING
    IV: ANESTHESIA
    V: OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY
    Splinting and casting
    Occupational therapy evaluation and treatment
    VI: CONGENITAL DIFFERENCES
    Introduction to congenital differences and genetics
    Failure of formation
    Failure of differentiation
    Duplication
    Overgrowth
    Undergrowth
    Constriction band syndromes
    Metabolic and endocrine abnormalities
    Genetic syndromes
    Skeletal dysplasias
    VII: NERVE
    Nerve anatomy and diagnostic evaluation
    Ulnar nerve injury
    Median nerve injury
    Radial nerve injury
    VIII: BRACHIAL PLEXUS PALSY
    Obstetrical brachial plexus palsy
    Microsurgery for obstetrical brachial plexus birth palsy
    Glenohumeral joint secondary procedures
    Elbow flexion secondary procedures
    Traumatic brachial plexus injuries
    IX: TETRAPLEGIA
    Introduction to tetraplegia
    Treatment
    X: NEUROMUSCULAR: Cerebral palsy
    Arthrogryposis
    XI: TRAUMA
    Multiply injured child
    Non-accidental trauma
    Nail bed injuries
    Flexor tendon injuries
    Extensor tendon injuries
    Amputations/replantation
    Phalangeal fractures
    Metacarpal fractures
    Hand dislocations
    Carpal fractures
    Distal radius fractures
    Forearm fractures
    Monteggia fracture dislocations
    Galeazzi and Essex Lopresti injuries
    Pediatric elbow and supracondylar fractures
    Distal articular humerus fractures
    Medial epicondyle fractures, elbow dislocations, and transphyseal separations
    Radial head, neck and olecranon fractures
    Proximal humerus and humeral shaft fractures
    Clavicle fractures, AC dislocations, SC dislocations and scapula fractures
    XII: INFECTIONS
    Hand infections
    Cellulitis and necrotizing fasciitis
    Osteomyelitis and septic arthritis
    XIII: TUMORS
    Benign soft tissue lesions
    Benign bony lesions
    Malignant lesions
    XIV: COMPARTMENT SYNDROME
    XV: SKIN LESIONS
    Congenital lesions
    Acquired lesions
    XVI: BURNS
    XVII: VASCULAR DISORDERS
    XVIII: RHEUMATOLOGIC DISORDERS
    XIX: FACTITIOUS DISORDERS
    XX: SPORTS INJURIES
    Caring for the athlete
    The throwing athlete
    The gymnast
    XXI: ARTHROSCOPY
    Wrist
    Elbow
    Shoulder
    XXII: OTHER TOPICS
    Trigger digits
    Kienbock's disease
    Madelung's deformity
    Torticollis and Sprengel's deformity
    Multi-ligamentous laxity
    Thoracic outlet syndrome
    Prostheses.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Mario Lima, Gianantonio Manzoni, editors ; foreword by Göran Läckgren.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Saul P. Greenfield, Christopher S. Cooper.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Ronald Rabinowitz, William C. Hulbert, Robert A. Mevorach, editors.
    Summary: While there are Pediatric Urology texts for pediatric urologists and for general urologists, there are none for primary care physicians. This book is written specifically for the primary care physician, the initial contact for the many children with urologic conditions. The text will assist the primary care physician in the recognition of and participation in the care of children with these common problems including both congenital and acquired conditions. Specific chapters are also dedicated to the management of cases that may include medical and/or surgical intervention. The contributing authors of this text were selected for their internationally recognized expertise and straight forward educational styles in the field of Pediatric Urology. Pediatric Urology for the Primary Care Physician will significantly help our primary care colleagues in the evaluation and management of children with genito-urinary problems.

    Contents:
    Fetal Hydronephrosis
    Multicystic Dysplastic Kindney
    Renal Agenesis and Associated Anomalies
    Renal Duplication Anomalies
    Ureteropelvic Junction Obstruction in the Pediatric Population
    Pediatric Renal Trauma
    Renal Stones
    Rediatric Renal Tumors
    Ureteroceles
    Megaureter
    Ectopic Ureter
    Cystitis
    Vesicoureteral Reflux
    Posterior Urethral Valves
    Bladder Exstrophy for the Primary Care Provider
    Daytime Wetting
    Tumors of the Lower Genitourinary Tract in Children and Adolescents
    Pediatric Hernias and Hydroceles
    Retractile Testes
    Undescended Tests
    Testicular Torsion
    Testis Tumor
    Adolescent Varicocele
    Phimosis
    Paraphimosis
    Meatal Stenosis
    Balanitis
    Urethrorrhagia
    Urethral Stricture
    Hypospadias
    Chordee
    Epispadias
    Female External Genitalia for Primary Care Providers
    Ambiguous Genitalia
    Myelodysplasia: From Birth to Adulthood
    Continent Urinary Diversion
    Managing Pediatric Lower Urinary Tract Dysfunction and Associated Constipation in the Primary Care Setting
    Pyelonephritis
    Nephrologic Aspects of Urologic Disease
    Pediatric Primary Nocturnal Enuresis (Bedwetting).
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Summary: "This handy visual aid guides clinicians in discussions with patients and parents about the importance of vaccines, the diseases they help prevent and the various vaccines recommended. The chart includes infographics and clinical images to help illustrate why vaccines remain important in preventing diseases. Vaccines covered include influenza, varicella (chickenpox), human papillomavirus, polio, meningitis, and much more. The chart also includes information for health care professionals about the origin and nature of the diseases and current recommendations for vaccine schedules. In addition, it provides steps to take when a child or community is exposed to a potential infection, including prophylaxis and reporting to local health departments"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    DTaP, Tdap, Td
    Haemophilus influenzae type B (HIB)
    Hepatitis A and B
    Human papillomavirus (HPV)
    Influenza (“flu”)
    Measles-mumps-rubella (MMR)
    Meningococcal infections
    Pneumococcal infections
    Polio
    Rotavirus
    Varicella (chickenpox).
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2021
  • Digital
    Abhishek Agrawal, Gavin Britz, editors.
    Summary: This book is a detailed resource on the technical aspects of pediatric neurosurgery that relate to vascular malformations of the brain and spinal cord. It introduces concepts relevant to cerebrovascular system development and the classification of vascular malformations. Information on a range of disorders is then provided with an emphasis placed on answering frequently asked questions in relation to a particular condition. Therefore, enabling the reader to systematically improve their understanding of how approach treating patients utilizing techniques such as ultrasound and spinal angiography. The chapters, authored by experts in their respective field, provide a standard of care based on current diagnostic and management guidelines for pediatric neurosurgical diseases. Pediatric Vascular Neurosurgery: Technical Nuances in Contemporary Pediatric Neurosurgery (Part 2) is a comprehensive overview of how to approach diagnosing and treating a range of vascular malformations encountered in pediatric patients. The problem-solving approach of this work makes it a valuable addition to the literature and suitable for use by residents, fellows and consultants within pediatrics and allied specialities, including Neurosurgery, Neurology, Neuro-anesthesia, Neuro-critical care and advanced health care providers amongst others.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    editors, Leonard G. Feld, John D. Mahan.
    Digital Access AAP ebooks 2019
  • Digital
    Christina A. Di Bartolo, Maureen K. Braun.
    Summary: With the proliferation of research studies posted online, media outlets scrambling to pick up stories, and individuals posting unverified information via social media, the landscape for parents trying to understand the latest science as it pertains to their children has never been more challenging to navigate. This book is intended to assist pediatricians when discussing research findings with parents. It provides an overview of research practices and terminology, clarifies misconceptions about studies and findings, and explains the limitations of research when applied to medical decision making. Through this framework, physicians can explain their reasoning behind specific clinical recommendations. In addition to examining the broad concepts comprising research literacy, this book reviews the current findings in topics that pediatricians report discussing most often with parents, such as vaccines, diet, medications, and sleep. Pediatrician's Guide to Discussing Research with Patients is a unique resource for pediatricians in encouraging the development of research literacy in their patients.

    Contents:
    1 Introduction
    2 Funding and Bias
    3 Study Design and Related Considerations
    4 Significance: Statistical versus Clinical
    5 Incorporating Research into Health Care Decisions
    6 Vaccines
    7 Diet
    8 Food Allergies
    9 Discipline Techniques
    10 Medications
    11 Sleep
    12 Screen Time
    13 School Refusal
    14 Infectious Diseases.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Parisa M. Garrett, Kahyun Yoon-Flannery, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive review of what comes after the completion of a pediatrics residency. Chapters review several areas of fellowships and how to navigate through the application process, provide a guide for finding a job and negotiating through your first position, and also discuss other difficult topics such as how to deal with malpractice lawsuits. The book is comprised of six parts. Part 1 explains pediatric fellowships, including how to apply, prepare, and choose your ideal fellowship. Part 2 describes what to expect on your first job search and what to consider when choosing a career path. Part 3 and Part 4 aim to prepare readers for what happens after finding and starting a job in pediatrics, such as moving, setting up an office, supervising residents, and how to deal with difficult patients. Part 5 discusses long term goals and planning, which helps prepare readers for the long road ahead. This includes pursuing partnerships, additional degrees, and training. It also shares knowledge on how to manage medical school debt, retirement planning, switching jobs, and much more. Finally, Part 6 aims to help readers maintain their personal health and family life by setting boundaries, managing stress, and discussing ways to avoid burnout. Written by experts in the field, A Pediatrician's Path: What to Expect After a Pediatrics Residency is a valuable resource for pediatricians, residents and medical students interested in a career in pediatrics.

    Contents:
    Applying for Fellowship
    Adolescent Medicine
    Pediatric Critical Care
    Pediatric Emergency Medicine
    Pediatric Endocrinology
    Pediatric Gastroenterology
    Pediatric Infectious Diseases
    Neonatal-Perinatal Medicine
    Pediatric Palliative Care
    Post Pediatric Portal Program Fellowship
    Completion of Multiple Fellowships: finding a Job
    Your First Job: Where to Look
    Applications and Interviews
    Contract Considerations: Preparation
    Contract Considerations: Understanding the Contract
    Choosing a Career in Academic Medicine
    Choosing a Career as a Pediatric Hospitalist
    Choosing a Career in Private Practice
    Choosing a Career in Public Health
    Choosing a Career in Pediatric Urgent Care
    Choosing a Career in Direct Primary Care
    Non-clinical Roles
    Moving
    Licenses, Credentials, and Privileges
    Setting Up Your Office
    Risk Management and Patient Safety
    Mentorship
    Patient Experience
    Preparing for Your First Day
    Daily Considerations
    Electronic Health Records
    Asking for Help
    Impostor Syndrome
    Supervising Residents
    Balancing Resident Autonomy and Patient Safety
    Working with Advanced Practice Providers
    Research
    Staff Considerations
    Billing and Insurances
    Pediatric Boards, Continuing Medical Education, and Maintenance of Certification
    How to Deal with a Difficult Patient
    Keeping up to Date is more than UpToDate
    Pursuing Partnership in a Private Practice
    Pursuing Additional Degrees and Training
    Your 5 and 10 Year Plan
    Disability Insurance 101
    Life Insurance 101
    Managing Your Medical School Debt
    Retirement Planning
    Switching Jobs
    Your Side Hustle
    Your Online Presence
    Personal Health and Family Life
    Setting Boundaries
    Stress Management
    Developing Interests Outside of Medicine and Avoiding Burnout.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] David L. Skaggs, MD, MMM, Chief of Orthopedic Surgery, Children's Hospital Los Angeles, Endowed Chair of Pediatric Spinal Disorders, Professor of Orthopaedic Surgery, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, California, Mininder S. Kocher, MD, MPH, Professor of Orthopaedic Surgery, Harvard Medical School, Associate Director, Division of Sports Medicine, Boston Children's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts.
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Lloyd J. Brown, Ryan J. Coller, Lee Todd Miller.
    Summary: "BRS Pediatrics is a comprehensive review of general and subspecialty pediatrics aimed for medical students on their core clerkship in pediatrics. Written in the popular Board Review Series outline format, this text presents the essentials of pediatrics through concise descriptions, clinical correlations, numerous figures and nearly 100 tables. This revision will include over 500 board-style questions with complete answers and explanations, with exams at the end of each chapter and an end-of-book Comprehensive Examination"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Pediatric health supervision
    Behavioral and developmental pediatrics
    Adolescent medicine
    Neonatology
    Genetic disorders and inborn errors of metabolism
    Endocrinology
    Infectious diseases
    Cardiology
    Pulmonology
    Gastroenterology
    Nephrology and urology
    Neurology
    Hematology
    Oncology
    Allergy and immunology
    Rheumatology
    Orthopedics
    Ophthalmology
    Dermatology
    Emergency medicine.
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Robert J. Yetman, Mark D. Hormann.
    Contents:
    General pediatrics
    The newborn infant
    The cardiovascular system
    The respiratory system
    The gastrointestinal tract
    The urinary tract
    The neuromuscular system
    Infectious diseases and immunology
    Hematologic and neoplastic diseases
    The adolescent.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2016
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RJ48.2 .P42 2016
    2
  • Digital/Print
    [edited by] Robert J. Yetman, Mark D. Hormann.
    Summary: "The PreTest Clinical Science Series prepares medical students for the USMLE Step 2 CK, which assesses students' medical knowledge of core clinical topics with USMLE style review questions. Useful as reviews for clerkship exams following core clinical rotations, each PreTest book contains 500 questions with comprehensive, targeted answers and rationale. Discussions review correct and incorrect answer options to reinforce learning. The 15th edition of Pediatrics: PreTest simulates the USMLE Step 2 CK test-taking experience by including vignette-style questions and updates on the latest treatments and therapies for infants, children and adolescents. To ensure that questions are representative of the style and level of difficulty of the exam, each PreTest book is reviewed by students who either recently passed Step 2CK or completed their Pediatrics rotation"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access AccessPediatrics 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RJ48.2 .P42 2020
    2
  • Digital
    edited by Andrew R. Peterson, MD, MSPH, Clinical Associate Professor, Stead Family Department of Pediatrics, Carver College of Medicine, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa, Kelly E. Wood, MD, Clinical Assistant Professor, Stead Family Department of Pediatrics, Carver College of Medicine, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa.
    Contents:
    Adolescent medicine and gynecology / Gayathri Chelvakumar and Paula Cody
    Allergic and immunologic disorders / Amy O. Thomas and Alex Thomas
    Behavioral and mental health issues / Linda J. Cooper-Brown and Jennifer McWilliams
    Blood and neoplastic disorders / Adam D. Wolfe
    Cardiology / Benton Ng
    Cognition, language, and learning disabilities / Amy L. Conrad, Todd Kopelman, and Tammy L. Wilgenbusch
    Collagen vascular and other multisystem disorders / Sandy Hong and Kelly E. Wood
    Critical care / Ashley Loomis and Niyati Patel
    Ear, nose and throat disorders / Derek Zhorne
    Emergency care / Sarah L. Miller
    Endocrine disorders / Vanessa Curtis
    Ethics / Becky Benson
    Eye disorders / Melanie Schmitt
    Fetus and newborn / Erin Osterholm
    Fluids and electrolyte metabolism / Jeff Van Blarcom
    Pediatric gastroenterology / Dina Al-Zubeidi
    Genetics and dysmorphology / Greg Rice
    Genital system disorders / Kathleen Kieran
    Growth and development / Erin Howe
    Infectious disease / Nathan Price
    Metabolic disorders / Eric T. Rush
    Musculoskeletal disorders / Natalie Stork and Blaise Nemeth
    Neurologic disorders / Satsuki Matsumoto and Leah Zhorne
    Nutrition / Kelly E. Wood
    Patient safety and quality improvement / Elizabeth H. Mack
    Pharmacology. Part I, Pharmacology and pain management / Susan S. Vos, Gary Milavetz, Jeff Van Blarcom, and Laura Steinauer
    Pharmacology, Part II, Sedation / Jeff Van Blarcom
    Poisoning and environmental exposure to hazardous substances / Christopher Hogrefe
    Preventative pediatrics / Ashley Miller and Rebecca Lozman-Oxman
    Psychosocial issues & child abuse. Part 1, Psychosocial issues / Cassandra Collins, James Burkhalter, and Kelly E. Wood
    Psychosocial issues & child abuse. Part 2, Child abuse / Cassandra Collins, James Burkhalter, and Kelly E. Wood
    Research and statistics / Andrew R. Peterson
    Renal and urologic disorders / Jen Jetton and Kathy Lee-Son
    Respiratory disorders / Anthony Fischer
    Skin disorders / Will Aughenbaugh and Lisa Muchard
    Sports medicine and physical fitness / Andrew R. Peterson
    Substance abuse / LaTisha L. Bader and Ross Mathiasen.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Cases
    Cases
  • Digital
    edited by Klaus M. Beier.
    Summary: This book provides extensive information on pedophilia (sexual interest in the prepubescent body age), hebephilia (sexual interest in the early-pubescent body age) and sexual offenses against children, i.e., the various forms of child sexual abuse, including the use of child sexual abuse images, along with the current state of knowledge concerning offender groups. The book makes it clear that pedophilia or hebephilia do not inevitably lead to offenses against children - that there are those who keep their desires in their fantasies and do not act them out on the behavioral level. The World Health Organization classifies pedophilia as a mental disorder. It can be safely assumed that many pedophile men in a given community live their lives, unrecognized and adamant about hiding their sexual drives from society and from themselves, and who are genuinely motivated not to act upon their sexual fantasies. The numbers of exactly this particular group of pedophilically inclined non-offenders can be increased by preventive therapeutic measures. For this purpose, two treatment programs have been developed at the Institute of Sexology and Sexual Medicine at the Charité-Universitätsmedizin Berlin (University Clinic) since the initiation of the Prevention Project Dunkelfeld in 2005 - First, the project involving adult participants (Berlin Dissexuality Therapy: BEDIT) and later, another for adolescents (BEDIT-A), who find themselves attracted to children. Both program manuals are completely integrated into this work, which reflects 15 years of assessment and treatment experience.

    Contents:
    1. Pedophilia and Hebephilia
    2. Child Sexual Abuse and the Use of Child Sexual Abuse Images
    3. Therapeutic Options
    4. The Berlin Prevention Project Dunkelfeld
    5. BEDIT-Manual for Adults
    6. Modules for Adults
    7. BEDIT-A Manual for Adolescents
    8. Modules for Adolescents
    9. Worksheets BEDIT
    10. Worksheets BEDIT-A.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jonathan D. Avery, editor.
    Summary: The book serves as a guide for all clinicians seeking to improve healthcare outcomes by implementing peer support in the treatment and management of medical and mental health conditions. The book begins with a chapter that describes the importance of peers and how peers are increasingly being utilized to improve medical outcomes. Each chapter opens with an introductory section, include tables and figures, and ends with a summary section for quick reference. Written by experts in the field, this resource covers the clinical implications for peer support in substance misuse, chronic medical conditions, in special populations, and mental illness generally. Each chapter is designed specifically to be accessible for a broad clinical audience of experts and non-experts across medical specialties. Peer Support in Medicine is an excellent resource for all clinicians seeking to improve healthcare outcomes using the gains made by the peer support model, including psychiatrists, psychologists, healthcare researchers, and medical students across specialties, nurses, social workers, and all others.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Peer Support for Substance Use Disorders
    Peer Support for Mental Illness
    Peer Support for Chronic Medical Conditions
    Peer Support for Bereavement
    Peer Support for Adolescents
    Peer Support for Elderly
    Peer Support for Families
    Peer Support for the Medical Community.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    H.R. Patel ... [and others].
    Summary: The fully comprehensive book brings together the three main pelvic specialties (Urology, Gynecological Oncology and Colorectal Surgery) into one volume. Patients have been shown to benefit from a multidisciplinary approach since it allows surgeons of different specialties to learn from one another therefore enhancing the treatment for the patient. Pelvic cancer outcomes are poor in low volume centres. These centres account for 80% of the global centres dealing with these cancers. Pelvic Cancer Surgery: Modern Breakthroughs and Future Advances is a much needed book that can focus training and assist health professionals in their care of patients with pelvic dysfunction. Pelvic Cancer Surgery: Modern Breakthroughs and Future Advances is complete with full color illustrations and schematic diagrams and makes use of key points and stepwise figures for an enhanced learning experience.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Giulio A. Santoro, Andrzej P. Wieczorek, Abdul H. Sultan.
    Summary: This excellent textbook provides up-to-date information on all aspects of pelvic floor disorders. After an opening section on anatomy and physiology, it explains the methodology, role and application of the integrated imaging approach in detail, including the most advanced 3D, 4D, and dynamic ultrasound techniques, illustrated with hundreds of images. It then discusses in depth the epidemiology, etiology, assessment, and management of the full range of pelvic floor disorders from multidisciplinary and practical perspectives. The book also provides information on the various forms of obstetric perineal trauma, urinary incontinence and voiding dysfunction, anal incontinence, pelvic organ prolapse, constipation and obstructed defecation, pelvic pain and sexual dysfunction, and fistulas, and includes treatment algorithms as well as helpful guidance on what to do when surgical treatment goes wrong. The authors are leading experts in the field from around the globe. Since the first edition from 2010 (more than 200,000 chapter downloads), the book has been extensively rewritten and features numerous additional topics. The result is a comprehensive textbook that is invaluable for gynecologists, colorectal surgeons, urologists, radiologists, and gastroenterologists, beginners and veterans alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Achille Lucio Gaspari, Pierpaolo Sileri, editors ; foreword by Giorgio De Toma.
    Summary: During recent decades, more than 100 surgical procedures have been proposed to treat pelvic organ prolapse, and surgeons are still searching for the ideal approach. Although generally accepted guidelines and algorithms are still lacking, careful preoperative work-up and patient selection can serve as a sound basis for tailored surgery. In this comprehensive book, leading experts from around the world provide a detailed, up-to-date overview of the diagnostic and surgical approaches employed in patients with prolapse of the middle or posterior pelvic floor compartment. Each surgical technique is explained step by step with the aid of instructive figures. Guidance is also included on the management of surgical complications and of recurrent disease aspects that are too frequently overlooked in the scientific literature. This book will prove essential reading for all who are interested in functional colorectal disorders of the pelvic floor and will represent a unique and invaluable source of knowledge for general surgeons, colorectal surgeons, and urogynecologists, whether in training or practice.

    Contents:
    The Multidisciplinary View of a Pelvic Floor Unit
    Epidemiology and Prevalence of Pelvic Floor Disorders
    Pelvic Floor Anatomy
    Imaging of Pelvic Floor Disorders
    Anorectal Physiology
    Pelvic Floor Ultrasonography
    Pelvic Floor Ultrasonography
    Fecal Incontinence
    Obstructed Defecation Syndrome
    Solitary Rectal Ulcer Syndrome and Obstructed Defecation: Common Pathology
    Chronic Anorectal Pain: Pathophysiological Aspects, Diagnosis, and Treatment
    Biofeedback and Pelvic Floor Disorders
    Biofeedback Training and Physiokinetic Therapy
    STARR and TRANSTARR Procedures
    Delorme's Procedure
    The Altemeier's Procedure for External Rectal Prolapse
    The Express Procedure for Internal Rectal Prolapse
    Transperineal Rectocele Correction
    Mesh Rectopexy (Ripstein, Orr-Loygue, Wells, and Frykman-Goldberg)
    Rectopexy without Mesh
    Laparoscopic Ventral Rectocolpopexy for Rectal Prolapse Syndromes: Restoration of Anatomy and Improvement of Function
    Pelvic Organ Prolapse Suspension.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    David A. Gordon, Mark R. Katlin, editors.
    Summary: This text provides a comprehensive, state of the art review of this field and will serve as a resource for urologists, colorectal surgeons, geriatricians, and gynecologists as well as researchers interested in neuromuscular phenomena in the pelvis. The book also reviews new data regarding risk factors for pelvic floor muscle dysfunction and profiles new minimally invasive surgical strategies for well known pelvic disease processes. Each chapter is chock full of data from landmark trials which have been published over the past few years and placed in context with respect to current management techniques for pelvic floor disorders. Written by experts in their field, Pelvic Floor Dysfunction and Pelvic Surgery in the Elderly: An Integrated Approachprovides a concise yet comprehensive summary to help guide patient management.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Lewis Chan, Vincent Tse, Stephanie The, Peter Stewart, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Principles of Ultrasound and Instrumentation
    2. Functional Anatomy and Approaches to Imaging of the Pelvic Floor
    3. Essentials for Setting Up Practice in Clinician Performed Ultrasound
    4. Ultrasound Imaging in Assessment of the Male Patient with Voiding Dysfunction
    5. The Female Patient 1- Assessment of Female Voiding Dysfunction
    6. The Female Patient 2- Pelvic Organ Prolapse
    7. Imaging of Gynaecologic Organs
    8. Ultrasound Assessment of the Patient with Fecal Incontinence
    9. 3D Ultrasound Imaging of the Pelvis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Peter A. Philip.
    Summary: “Pelvic Pain and Dysfunction: A Differential Diagnosis Manual is a comprehensive guide on the management of patients suffering from pelvic pain as well as dysfunction of the bowel and bladder systems. It integrates differential diagnosis concepts of orthopaedic medicine to the urogynecological patient. Using the concepts described, clinicians will have the opportunity to readily determine the underlying cause of their patients? suffering, and a means to ameliorate their pain and dysfunction. Regardless of chronicity, the strategies outlined have proven effective in restoration of function and comfort.” - Provided by publisher

    Contents:
    Introduction to pelvic pain
    General concepts
    Evaluation
    Interpretation
    Management.
    Digital Access Thieme-Connect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Assia T. Valovska.
    Contents:
    Pelvic pain management : an introduction / Louis Saddick, Richard D. Urman, and Assia T. Valovska
    Anatomy of the abdomen and pelvis / Mona Patel and Assia T. Valovska
    Pain mechanisms in chronic pelvic pain / Juan Diego Villegas-Echeverri, J.D. López-Jaramillo, A.L. Herrera-Betancourt, J.D. López-Isanoa, and M.P. Pardo-Bustamante
    Multidisciplinary approaches to pelvic pain treatment : a physical therapist's perspective / Stephanie Prendergast
    Pharmacologic management of pelvic pain / Michelle L. Matthews and Vesela Kovacheva
    Dyspareunia and vulvodynia / Adeoti Oshinowo, Alin Ionescu, Tanya Anim, and Georgine Lamvu
    Endometriosis : treatment and pain management / Karina Gritsenko
    Painful bladder syndrome and interstitial cystitis in women / Sybil Dessie and Eman Elkadry
    Functional abdominal pain syndrome / Karina Gritsenko
    Pudendal neuralgia / Michael Hibner and Mario Castellanos
    Incapacitating pelvic congestion syndrome / Neeraj Rastogi, Nii-Kabu Kabutey, Gillian Lieberman, and Ducksoo Kim
    Male pelvic pain / Michel A. Pontari and Emmanuel A. Ghormoz
    Musculoskeletal causes of pelvic pain / Chris R. Abrecht, Lesley E. Bobb, and Assia T. Valovska
    Pelvic cancer pain / Karina Gritsenko
    Surgical treatment of pelvic pain / Adam Duke, Elmira Manoucheri, and Karen Wang
    Chronic pelvic pain and psychological disorders / Mohammed Issa and Raheel Bengali
    The physical therapy approach to pelvic pain : evaluation
    / Lila Bartkowski-Abbate and Amy Stein
    The physical therapy approach to pelvic pain : treatment / Amy Stein
    Implantable devices for the treatment of pelvic pain / Chris R. Abrecht, Alison M. Weisheipl, and Assia T. Valovska
    Sample clinical cases / Sawsan (Suzie) As-Sanie, Nichole Mahnert, and Beth Skinner.
    Digital Access Oxford 2016
  • Digital
    Axel Gänsslen, Jan Lindahl, Stephan Grechenig, Bernd Füchtmeier, editors.
    Summary: This book provides in-depth coverage of all aspects of pelvic ring fractures and their management. The opening chapters supply essential information on surgical anatomy, biomechanics, classification, clinical evaluation, radiological diagnostics, and emergency and acute management. The various operative techniques, including navigation techniques, that have been established and standardized over the past two decades are then presented in a step-by-step approach. Readers will find guidance on surgical indications, choice of approaches, reduction and fixation strategies, complication management, and optimization of long-term results. Specific treatment concepts are described for age-specific fractures, including pediatric and geriatric injuries, and secondary reconstructions. Pelvic ring fractures represent challenging injuries, especially when they present with concomitant hemodynamic instability. This book will help trauma and orthopaedic surgeons at all levels of experience to achieve the primary treatment aim of anatomic restoration of the bony pelvis to preserve biomechanical stability and avoid malunion with resulting clinical impairments.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 The History of Pelvic Fracture Treatment
    Chapter 2 Surgical Anatomy of the Pelvis
    Chapter 3 Biomechanics of the Pelvis
    Chapter 4 Classification of Pelvic Ring Injuries
    Chapter 5 Prehospital Treatment of Suspected Pelvic Injuries
    Chapter 6 Inhospital Clinical Examination
    Chapter 7 Radiological Diagnostics
    Chapter 8 Introduction
    Emergency Management
    Chapter 9 Emergency Stabilization
    Pelvic Binder
    Chapter 10 Emergency Management
    Pelvic C-Clamp
    Chapter 11 Mechanical Stabilization: DC-Osteosynthesis
    Chapter 12 Pelvic Packing
    Chapter 13 Direct Hemorrhage Control: Vascular DC-Treatment
    Chapter 14 Emergency Management
    Resuscitative Endovascular Balloon Occlusion of the Aorta (REBOA)
    Chapter 15 Indirect Hemorrhage Control: Angiography/Embolization (AE)
    Chapter 16 Coagulation Management
    Chapter 17 Open Pelvic Fractures
    Chapter 18 Morel-Levallee Lesions
    Chapter 19 Pelvic Compartment Syndrome
    Chapter 20 Traumatic Hemipelvectomy
    Chapter 21 Urological Trauma
    Chapter 22 Principles of Treatment of Pelvic Ring Injuries
    Chapter 23 Symphyseal Disruption
    Chapter 24 Retrograde Pubic Rami Screw
    Chapter 25 External Fixation
    Chapter 26 Subcutaneous Anterior Pelvic Fixation
    Chapter 27 Ilium Fractures
    Chapter 28 Anterior Plating SI-joint
    Chapter 29 SI-joint
    Posterior Reduction and Stabilization
    Chapter 30 Fracture Dislocations of the SI-joint
    Chapter 31 Iliosacral Screw Fixation
    Chapter 32 Local Sacral Plating
    Chapter 33 Lower Transverse Sacral Fractures
    Chapter 34 Ilio-iliacal Osteosynthesis
    Chapter 35 Lumbopelvic Fixation
    Chapter 36 Pediatric Pelvic Ring Injuries
    Chapter 37 Avulsion Injuries
    Chapter 38 Fragility Fractures
    Chapter 39 Intraoperative 3D Imaging of the Pelvic Ring
    Chapter 40 Implant Removal
    Chapter 41 Infectious Complications After Pelvic Ring Surgery
    Chapter 42 Pelvic Malunion and Non-Union
    Chapter 43 Outcome After Pelvic Ring Injuries.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Nam Cheol Park, Sae Woong Kim, Du Geon Moon, editors.
    Contents:
    I. Introduction
    II. Historical & cultural perspective
    III. Penis anatomy
    IV. Patient selection and counselling
    V. Psychologic perspective
    VI. Preoperative preparation and postoperative care
    VII. Girth Enhancement
    Dermal, dermofat graft
    Fat graft
    Penile disassembly & Glans detachment
    Glans augmentation
    Injectable Filler
    Allograft and synthetic injectables
    Silicon
    Paraffin injection
    Tissue Engineering
    Stem Cell.- VIII. Penile Lengthening
    VY plasty
    Z-plasty.- Double-Z plasty
    Suspensory ligament release/division/ligamentolysis
    Penile lengthening device.
    IX. Pediatric perspective
    micropenis, concealed penis, webbed penis, penoscrotal transposition
    Correction of webbed penis
    Correction of concealed penis
    Correction of penoscrotal transposition
    X. Penile reconstruction of amputated penis
    forearm cutaneous fascial graft.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Philippe E. Spiess, editor.
    Summary: This fully updated and revised second edition address specifically some of the significant advances made in our understanding of the pathophysiology of penile cancer including discussion of the suspected role of the human papilloma virus in penile carcinogenesis. Similarly, the molecular pathways implicated in precancerous and penile cancer will be discussed as these are the present targets of novel therapeutic approaches to this disease. The text details the recent national and international diagnostic and treatment guidelines that have been developed by both the National Comprehensive Cancer Network© and the European Urological Association establishing evidence based standards upon which the care of penile cancer should be based. The text also covers significant advances made in the diagnostic and therapeutic approach to both primary tumors and inguinal nodal metastases resulting from penile cancer such as penile sparing surgery and minimally invasive inguinal lymph node surgery. The text will similarly highlights the improvement in cancer specific outcome in the management of loco-regionally advanced (N2/3) penile cancer managed by upfront systemic chemotherapy followed by consolidative surgery in appropriately selected patients based on recent prospective phase II data. It also covers the role of radiotherapy in the management of penile cancer for both primary tumors and/or at sites of regional or distant metastases. Finally, some of the novel systemic approaches being devised in the management of advanced penile cancer along with some upcoming international trials soon to be opened which likely will re-define the present therapeutic approaches to penile cancer are discussed. The Second Edition of Penile Cancer: Diagnosis and Treatment will constitute a comprehensive review of the above mentioned subjects in addition to a few select topics of high clinical relevance, with the readership predominantly consisting of urologists, medical and surgical oncologists, and other healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    Understanding the Pathophysiology of Penile Cancer and Its Preneoplastic Lesions
    Diagnostic Tools in the Evaluation and Management of Penile Cancer
    Penile-Sparing Surgical Approaches in the Management of Primary Penile Tumours
    Dynamic Sentinel Node Biopsy and FDG-PET/CT for Lymph Node Staging in Penile Cancer
    Surgical Decision Making, Technical Considerations and Clinical Pearls in Therapeutic Inguinal Node Dissection Surgery for Penile Cancer
    Minimally Invasive Surgical Approaches to Inguinal Nodes in the Absence of Palpable Adenopathy
    Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection for Penile Cancer: Answering the Conundrum of When and How It Should Be Conducted
    Multmodal Approach to Locally Advanced and Metastatic Penile Cancer
    The Role of Radiotherapy in the Management of Penile Cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Philippe E. Spiess, Andrea Necchi, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive and state-of the-art approach to caring for penile carcinoma patients and provides foundational information related to the molecular pathways implicated in penile carcinogenesis and progression. Penile carcinoma remains one of the most debilitating and life-altering malignancies to affect men, with significant impacts on quality of life, erectile function/sexual activity, and length of life. This book illuminates recent advances in penile cancer sparing treatment approaches and oncologically appropriate therapeutic options that help to maintain quality of life, sexual function, and intimacy for patients. It also elucidates recent understandings of human papilloma virus (HPV) and non-HPV driven pathways, which are suspected to have distinct treatment responses and prognoses. The book explores the management of inguinal lymph nodes in the setting of penile cancer, which can now be managed with the integration of key surgical principles/techniques including the adoption of minimally invasive surgery. Considering a multidisciplinary treatment approach for patients exhibiting either locally advanced or more widespread metastatic disease, the book introduces novel systemic therapies currently in development. Further, this book raises clinician awareness of the significant psychosocial impact of penile carcinoma on patients and their families. Penile Carcinoma: Therapeutic Principles and Advances provides readers with the necessary knowledge and insight to care for penile cancer patients with the use of truly state-of-the-art diagnostic and therapeutic approaches. Cancer patients and their families will greatly benefit from adoption of these principles and the accessibility of such advances to their personalized care.

    Contents:
    Mechanism of Carcinogenesis and Progression
    Pathologic Features of Invasive Penile Carcinomas and Precursor Lesions
    Characterization of Penile Cancers with Comprehensive Genomic Profiling
    Functional and Psychosocial Impact of Penile Cancer Treatments
    Penile Sparing Surgical and Non-Surgical Approaches
    Management of Primary Penile Tumors - Partial and Total Penectomy
    In the Clinical Setting of Non-Palpable/Non-Bulky Inguinal Nodes
    Management of Bulky Inguinal/Pelvic Metastases in Squamous Penile Cancer
    Neoadjuvant and Adjuvant Multimodality Treatments for Patients with Lymph Node Involvement
    Management of Locally Recurrent Penile Cancer
    Management of Metastatic Penile Cancer
    Overview of Insightful Systemic Approaches
    Clinical Trials Corner.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Eduardo P. Miranda, John P. Mulhall, editors.
    Summary: Penile implants have been an effective treatment for erectile dysfunction (ED) for more than 40 years. However, there is now a growing interest in this treatment option, as the number of procedures is expected to increase in the future. This book offers a reference guide for all those practitioners interested in understanding and/or performing this procedure. It will also benefit those in medical education who want to obtain specialized and high-quality knowledge regarding the complexities involved in penile implant surgery. Although the basic description of penile implant surgery is well documented in the literature, a detailed and comprehensive guide with a special focus on the most challenging and controversial aspects is lacking. The few books available on the topic provide a broad overview of prosthetic surgery in general, mainly discuss basic principles, and fail to provide a more detailed perspective. This comprehensive book discusses various aspects of penile implant surgery, ranging from indications to long-term complications. It addresses the most common and serious challenges regarding penile implants, which are rarely discussed elsewhere. The respective chapters were written by internationally respected experts on the controversies of penile prosthetic surgery. The book is intended for all those who plan to specialize in penile implant surgery, which include, but are not limited to, residents and fully trained urologists, as well as fellows and practitioners in sexual medicine and reconstructive urology.

    Contents:
    Patient and Device Selection
    Critical Analysis of Maneuvers to Reduce Infection in Penile Implant Surgery
    Strategies for Optimal Pain Control in the Penile Implant Patient
    Implant Surgery in the Anticoagulated Patient
    Management of Residual Curvature in the Patient with Peyronie's Disease Undergoing Penile Implant Surgery
    Considerations in Reservoir Placement
    The Hostile Penis: Managing the Patient with Penile Fibrosis
    The Role of Penile Lengthening Procedures at the Time of Penile Implant Surgery
    Considerations in the Management of Visceral Perforation During Penile Implant Surgery
    Implant Surgery in the Patient with Neophallus
    Approach to Managing the Patient with Impending Erosion
    Management of Long-term Complications of Penile Implant Surgery
    Medicolegal Aspects of Penile Implant Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Thomas J. Guzzo, Robert C. Kovell, Justin B. Ziemba, Dana A. Weiss, Alan J. Wein.
    Summary: Brief, well-illustrated chapters, an easy-to-read format, and a convenient, portable size make Penn Clinical Manual of Urology, 3rd Edition, your go-to resource for fast reference on the effective diagnosis and treatment of urologic disorders. Concise and practical, this manual is indispensable for both residents and practitioners as a daily clinical guide as well as an outstanding review tool for board exam preparation.

    Contents:
    Signs and symptoms: The initial examination
    Diagnostic and interventional uroradiology
    Lower urinary tract infections in women and pyelonephritis
    Lower urinary tract infection in males
    Specific infections of the genitourinary tract
    Sexually transmitted infections
    Interstitial cystitis/bladder pain syndrome
    Urolithiasis in the adult
    Penn clinical manual chapter on urologic emergencies
    Urinary and genital trauma
    Urethral stricture and lower urinary tract reconstruction
    Urinary fistula
    Nocturia
    Lower urinary tract function and dysfunction; urinary incontinence
    Benign prostatic hyperplasia and related entities
    Adult genitourinary cancer: Prostate and bladder
    Adult genitourinary cancer: Renal and testicular
    Adult genitourinary cancer: Urethral and penile
    Radiation therapy
    Laparoscopic surgical anatomy, laparoscopy, and robotic-assisted laparoscopic surgery
    Male sexual dysfunction
    Male fertility and sterility
    Disorders of the adrenal gland
    Retroperitoneal tumors and retroperitoneal fibrosis
    Embryology and differences of sex development
    Congenital anomalies
    Pediatric oncology
    Pediatric urolithiasis
    Pediatric voiding function and dysfunction
    Transitional urology
    Geriatric urology
    Quality and safety considerations in urology
    Clinical research design and statistics.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2024
  • Digital
    Mary Lynne Knighten, DNP, RN, NEA-BC, KT Waxman, DNP, MBA, RN, CNL, CENP, CHSE, FSSH, FAONL, FAAN.
    Summary: "The original textbook by Dr. Susan Penner was written 20 years ago as the Introduction to Health Care Economics and Financial Management: Fundamental Concepts with Practical Application. It has helped nurses, nurse leaders, students, and faculty to understand, develop knowledge, and gain competency in the often complex world of finance and economics. It has been a very thorough and practical book for both the classroom and practice environments. We want to thank Dr. Penner for her vision and the execution of a resource that has stood the test of time and changing healthcare and reimbursement environments. Furthermore, we are humbled and grateful that Dr. Penner would entrust her life's work to us in revising the fourth edition of Economics and Financial Management for Nurses and Nurse Leaders, so many more generations of nurses may benefit from her wisdom. To honor Dr. Penner, it is with these sentiments in mind that we've renamed the book Penner's Economics and Financial Management for Nurses and Nurse Leaders, Fourth Edition"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Economics of health care
    Chapter 2. Healthcare reimbursement and insurance
    Chapter 3. Quantifying nursing care, staffing, and productivity
    Chapter 4. Budget planning
    Chapter 5. Reporting and managing budgets
    Chpater 6. Special purpose, capital, and other budgets
    Chapter 7. Cost-benefit analysis
    Chapter 8. Assessing financial health
    Chapter 9. Building a business case
    Chapter 10. Entrepreneurship, contract negotiation, and practice management
    Chapter 11. Grant writing for helathcare programs
    Chater 12. Ethical issues and financial issues in international healthcare systems
    Chapter 13. Health policy and future trends.
    Digital Access R2Library [2024], ©2024
  • Digital
    edited by David Tuckett and Nadine A. Levinson.
    Summary: "Compilation of terms, definitions, and discussion from major published psychoanalytic glossaries. In addition to the Language of Psychoanalysis (Laplanche and Pontalis), PEP has integrated three additional glossaries: the Edinburgh International Encyclopaedia of Psychoanalysis (Skelton), Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts (Moore and Fine), and the Dictionary of Kleinian Thought (Hinshelwood). PEP has also integrated the EPF Glossary of Psychoanalysis in Europe (Junkers), which provides a mapping of each psychoanalytic term across several languages."
  • Digital
    edited by Vincent L. Pecoraro.
    Contents:
    Chapter One. Chemical posttranslational modification with designed rhodium(II) catalysts
    Chapter Two. Cell-binding assays for determining the affinity of protein-protein interactions: technologies and considerations
    Chapter Three. Protein and antibody engineering by phage display
    Chapter Four. Incorporation of unnatural amino acids into proteins expressed in mammalian cells
    Chapter Five. Method for enzyme design with genetically encoded unnatural amino acids
    Chapter Six. Methods for solving highly symmetric de novo designed metalloproteins: crystallographic examination of a novel three-stranded coiled-coil structure containing D-amino acids
    Chapter Seven. SpyRings declassified: a blueprint for using isopeptide-mediated cyclization to enhance enzyme thermal resilience
    Chapter Eight. Engineering and application of LOV2-based photoswitches
    Chapter Nine. Minimalist design of allosterically regulated protein catalysts
    Chapter Ten. Combining design and selection to create novel protein-peptide interactions
    Chapter Eleven. Metal-directed design of supramolecular protein assemblies
    Chapter Twelve. Designing fluorinated proteins
    Chapter Thirteen. Solid phase synthesis of helically folded aromatic oligoamides
    Chapter Fourteen. Conformational restriction of peptides using dithiol bis-alkylation
    Chapter Fifteen. Engineering short preorganized peptide sequences for metal ion coordination: copper(II) a case study
    Chapter Sixteen. De Novo construction of redox active proteins
    Chapter Seventeen. Design strategies for redox active metalloenzymes: applications in hydrogen production
    Chapter Eighteen. Equilibrium studies of designed metalloproteins
    Chapter Nineteen. Reconstitution of heme enzymes with artificial metalloporphyrinoids
    Chapter Twenty. Creation of a thermally tolerant peroxidase
    Chapter Twenty-One. Designing covalently linked heterodimeric four-helix bundles
    Chapter Twenty-Two. Design of heteronuclear metalloenzymes
    Chapter Twenty-Three. Periplasmic screening for artifical metalloenzymes
    Chapter Twenty-Four. De Novo designed imaging agents based on lanthanide peptides complexes
    Chapter Twenty-Five. Peptide binding for bio-based nanomaterials
    Author Index
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Gunnar Houen.
    Contents:
    Peptide Antibodies: Past, Present, and Future / Gunnar Houen
    Structure of natural and recombinant antibodies / Hui Ma and Richard O'Kennedy
    Prediction of antigenic B and T cell epitopes via energy decomposition analysis : description of the web-based prediction tool BEPPE / Claudio Peri ... [et al.]
    Prediction of antibody epitopes / Morten Nielsen and Paolo Marcatili
    Fmoc solid-phase peptide synthesis / Paul R. Hansen and Alberto Oddo
    Peptide-carrier conjugation / Paul R. Hansen
    Solid-phase peptide-carrier conjugation / Gunnar Houen and Dorthe T. Olsen
    Analysis of peptides and conjugates by amino acid analysis / Peter Højrup
    Characterization of synthetic peptides by mass spectrometry / Bala K. Prabhala ... [et al.]
    Interpretation of tandem mass spectrometry (MSMS) spectra for peptide analysis / Karin Hjernø and Peter Højrup
    Polyclonal Peptide Antisera / Tina H. Pihl, Kristin E. Illigen, and Gunnar Houen
    Production and screening of monoclonal peptide antibodies / Nicole Hartwig Trier ... [et al.]
    Production of epitope-specific antibodies by immunization with synthetic epitope peptide formulated with CpG-DNA- liposome complex without carriers / Dongbum Kim, Younghee Lee, and Hyung-Joo Kwon
    Thioredoxin-displayed multipeptide immunogens / Angelo Bolchi ... [et al.]
    Purification of natural and recombinant peptide antibodies by affinity chromatographic strategies / Hui Ma and Richard O'Kennedy
    Isolation of camelid single-domain antibodies against native proteins using recombinant multivalent peptide ligands / Norah A. Alturki ... [et al.]
    Generation of TCR-Like antibodies using phage display / Brian H. Santich ... [et al.]
    Structural characterization of peptide antibodies/ Anna Chailyan and Paolo Marcatili
    Automated high-throughput mapping of linear B-cell epitopes using a statistical analysis of high-density peptide microarray data / Thomas Østerbye and Søren Buus
    Characterization of peptide antibodies by epitope mapping using resin-bound and soluble peptides / Nicole Hartwig Trier
    Screening and characterization of linear B-cell epitopes by biotinylated peptide libraries / Ida Rosenkrands and Anja Olsen
    Bead-based peptide arrays for profiling the specificity of modification state-specific antibodies / Angela Filomena ... [et al.]
    Surface plasmon resonance method to evaluate anti-citrullinated protein/peptide antibody affinity to citrullinated peptides / Feliciana Real-Fernández ... [et al.]
    Specificity analysis of histone modification-specific antibodies or reading domains on histone peptide arrays / Goran Kungulovski ... [et al.]
    Prion-specific antibodies produced in wild-type mice / Peter M. H. Heegaard ... [et al.]
    Immunoblotting with peptide antibodies : differential immunoreactivities caused by certain amino acid substitutions in a short peptide and possible effects of differential refolding of the peptide on a nitrocellulose or PVDF membrane / Takenori Yamamoto ... [et al.]
    Immunocytochemical and immunohistochemical staining with peptide antibodies / Tina Friis ... [et al.]
    Designing B-cell epitopes for immunotherapy and subunit vaccines / Harinder Singh ... [et al.]
    Enterovirus-specific anti-peptide antibodies / Chit Laa Poh ... [et al.]
    Therapeutic HIV peptide vaccine / Anders Fomsgaard.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ben M. Dunn.
    Contents:
    Peptide therapeutics
    Methods for the peptide synthesis and analysis
    Peptide design strategies for g-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs)
    Peptide-based inhibitors of enzymes
    Discovery of peptide drugs as enzyme inhibitors and activators
    Discovery of peptide drugs from natural sources
    Modification of peptides to limit metabolism
    Delivery of peptide drugs.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Ratmir Derda.
    Contents:
    Design, synthesis, and application of OB2c combinatorial peptide and peptidomimetic libraries
    Synthesis of macrocyclic organo-peptide hybrids from ribosomal polypeptide precursors via cuAAC-/hydrazide-mediated cyclization
    Synthesis and screening of one-bead-one-compound cyclic peptide libraries
    Creating site-specific isopeptide linkages between proteins with the traceless staudinger ligation
    Macrocyclic templates for library synthesis of peptido-conjugates
    Synthesis and alkylation of aza-gly-pro building blocks of peptidomimetic libraries for developing prostaglandin f2alpha receptor modulators as therapeutics to inhibit preterm labor
    A fragment-based selection approach for the discovery of peptide macrocycles targeting protein kinases
    Peptide and peptide library cyclization via bromomethylbenzene derivatives
    Phage selection of bicyclic peptides based on two disulfide bridges
    De novo discovery of bioactive cyclic peptides using bacterial display and flow cytometry
    Chemical posttranslational modification of phage-displayed peptides
    Mapping protein-protein interactions with phage-displayed combinatorial peptide libraries and alanine scanning
    Identifying reactive peptides from phage-displayed libraries
    The best and the brightest: Exploiting tryptophan-sensitized tb(3+) luminescence to engineer lanthanide-binding tags
    Synthesis and cell-based screening of one-bead-one-compound peptide libraries
    Screening peptide array library for the identification of cancer cell-binding peptides
    Next-generation sequencing of phage-displayed peptide libraries
    Maleimide-based method for elaboration of cysteine-containing peptide phage libraries.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors Marina Cretich, Marcella Chiari.
    Contents:
    Peptide arrays on planar supports / Víctor Tapia Mancilla and Rudolf Volkmer
    High-throughput microarray incubations using multi-well chambers / Johannes Zerweck ... [et al.]
    Analysis of protein tyrosine kinase specificity using positional scanning peptide microarrays / Yang Deng and Benjamin E. Turk
    Secondary structure determination of peptides and proteins after immobilization / Stella H. North and Chris R. Taitt
    Peptides and anti-peptide antibodies for small and medium scale peptide and anti-peptide affinity microarrays : antigenic peptide selection, immobilization, and processing / Fan Zhang, Andrea Briones, and Mikhail Soloviev
    Low-cost peptide microarrays for mapping continuous antibody epitopes / Ryan McBride ... [et al.]
    Peptide microarray-based resonance light scattering assay for sensitively detecting intracellular kinase activity / Tao Li ... [et al.]
    Anomalous reflection of gold : a novel platform for biochips / Amir Syahir ... [et al.]
    High-throughput peptide screening on a bimodal imprinting chip through MS-SPRi integration / Weizhi Wang, Qiaojun Fang, and Zhiyuan Hu
    Analyzing peptide microarray data with the R pepStat package / Gregory Imholte, Renan Sauteraud, and Raphael Gottardo
    Chemoselective strategies to peptide and protein bioprobes immobilization on microarray surfaces / Alessandro Gori and Renato Longhi
    Manufacturing of peptide microarrays based on catalyst- free click chemistry / Denis Prim and Marc E. Pfeifer
    Clickable polymeric coating for oriented peptide immobilization / Laura Sola ... [et al.]
    Oriented peptide immobilization on microspheres / Lisa C. Shriver-Lake, George P. Anderson, and Chris R. Taitt
    Cell microarray format : a peptide release system using a photo-cleavable linker for cell toxicity and cell Uptake Analysis / Kenji Usui, Kin-ya Tomizaki, and Hisakazu Mihara
    Peptide microarrays for medical applications in autoimmunity, infection, and cancer / Carsten Grötzinger
    Synthetic peptide-based ELISA and ELISpot assay for identifying autoantibody epitopes / Judit Pozsgay ... [et al.]
    IgE and IgG4 epitope mapping of food allergens with a peptide microarray immunoassay / Javier Martínez-Botas and Belén de la Hoz
    IgE epitope mapping using peptide microarray immunoassay / Gustavo Gimenez, Sara Benedé, and Jing Lin
    Spot synthesis : an optimized microarray to detect IgE epitopes / Salvatore G. De-Simone, Paloma Napoleão-Pêgo, and Thatiane S. De-Simone
    Mapping of epitopes occurring in bovine αs1-casein variants by peptide microarray immunoassay / Maria Lisson and Georg Erhardt.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    edited by Peter E. Nielsen, Daniel H. Appella.
    Summary: Exemplifying and illustrating recent exciting advances in PNA chemistry, the second edition of Peptide Nucleic Acids: Methods and Protocols serves as a vital complement to the first edition of the book. Since the discovery of peptide nucleic acids, many interesting new derivatives and analogues in terms of nucleic acid recognition specificity and affinity have emerged. Also, as this detailed volume presents, great ingenuity in exploiting the unique properties of PNAs for a wide variety of applications within drug discovery, medical diagnostics, chemical biology and nanotechnology has unfolded. Written in the highly successful Methods in Molecular Biology series format, chapters include introductions to their respective topics, lists of the necessary materials and reagents, step-by-step, readily reproducible laboratory protocols, and key tips on troubleshooting and avoiding known pitfalls. Peptide Nucleic Acids: Methods and Protocols, Second Editionserves as a source of useful specific methods and protocols as well as a source of inspiration for future developments.

    Contents:
    MiniPEG-PNA / Arunava Manna [and others]
    Cyclopentane peptide nucleic acids / Ethan A. Englund, Ning Zhang, and Daniel H. Appella
    Chiral PNAs with constrained open-chain backbones / Roberto Corradini [and others]
    Synthesis, characterization, and evaluation of radiometal-containing peptide nucleic acids / Holger Stephan, Christian Foerster, and Gilles Gasser
    Preparation of metal-containing peptide nucleic acid bioconjugates on the solid phase / Gilles Gasser
    Formation and characterization of PNA-containing heteroquadruplexes / Bruce A. Armitage
    Sequence selective recognition of double-stranded RNA using triple helix-forming peptide nucleic acids / Thomas Zengeya, Pankaj Gupta, and Eriks Rozners
    Assembly of PNA-tagged small molecules, peptides, and carbohydrates onto DNA templates : programming the combinatorial pairing and inter-ligand distance / Nicolas Winssinger [and others]
    Site-selective scission of human genome using PNA-based artificial restriction DNA cutter / Kenichiro Ito and Makoto Komiyama
    PNA openers and their applications for bacterial DNA diagnostics / Irina V. Smolina and Maxim D. Frank-Kamenetskii
    DNA-Templated Native chemical ligation of functionalized peptide nucleic acids : a versatile tool for single base-specific detection of nucleic acids / Alexander Roloff [and others]
    Use of peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) for genotyping by solution and surface methods / Stefano Sforza [and others]
    Analysis of PNA Hybridization by surface plasmon resonance / Bruce A. Armitage
    PNA fluorescent in situ hybridization (FISH) for rapid microbiology and cytogenetic analysis / Henrik Stender, Brett Williams, and James Coull
    Rapid miRNA imaging in cells using fluorogenic templated staudinger reaction between PNA-based probes / Katarzyna Gorska and Nicolas Winssinger
    Cellular delivery of peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) / Takehiko Shiraishi and Peter E. Nielsen
    Peptide nucleic acid-mediated recombination for targeted genomic repair and modification / Erica B. Schleifman and Peter M. Glazer
    Antisense effects of PNAs in bacteria / Shan Goh, Jem Stach, and Liam Good.
    Digital Access Springer 2013
  • Digital
    Anwar Sunna, Andrew Care, Peter L. Bergquist, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Programmable bio-surfaces for biomedical applications
    2. Solid-binding peptides in biomedicine
    3. Molecular modelling of peptide-based materials for biomedical applications
    4. Design principles of peptide based self-assembled nanomaterials
    5. Bioprinting and biofabrication with peptide and protein biomaterials
    6. Peptides as bio-inspired molecular electronic materials
    7. Peptide-based materials for cartilage tissue regeneration
    8. Peptides and drug delivery
    9. Peptide lipidation-- a synthetic strategy to afford peptide based therapeutics
    10. Molecular engineering of Conus peptides as therapeutic leads
    11. Uptake mechanism of cell-penetrating peptides
    12. Empowering the potential of cell-penetrating peptides for targeted intracellular delivery via molecular self-assembly
    13. The current role of cell-penetrating peptides in cancer therapy
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Kevin M. Reavis, editor ; introduction by Haruhiro Inoue.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    by Xiangbin Pan, Ziyad M. Hijazi, Horst Sievert.
    Summary: This book provides an extensive discussion of echocardiography-guided percutaneous interventional techniques for clinical practitioners, including cardiologists, interventional physicians, surgeons and specialist training candidates. It allows readers to gain a thorough understanding of interpreting echocardiography-guided procedures, which not only protect patients from pain and other complications associated with conventional surgery, but also obviate the use of fluoroscopy or contrast agents and so avoid radiation damage and the risks of allergy or renal function impairment. Further, these procedures could help to save patients in areas lacking medical resources. The book first demonstrates the substitution of transesophageal for transthoracic echocardiography to avoid intubation under general anesthesia, and then presents key technical and practical aspects of echo-guided percutaneous interventions for structural heart diseases, such as ASD, VSD, PDA, PS, MS, AS and CoA. Lastly, it explores the lessons learned in echocardiography, anesthesia and postprocedural management of echo-guided percutaneous interventions.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Anesthesia Management in Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventions for Structural Heart Disease
    Use of Echocardiography in Percutaneous Interventions for Structural Heart Disease
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Atrial Septal Defect Closure
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional for Pulmonary Stenosis
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Patent Ductus Arteriosus Closure
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Closure of Perimembranous Ventricular Septal Defect
    Echocardiography-guided Interventional Left Atrial Appendage Closure
    Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventional for Mitral Valve Stenosis
    Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventional for Aortic Valve Stenosis
    Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventional for Coarctation of Aorta
    Post-procedural Management of Echocardiography-guided Percutaneous Interventions.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Emerson Lima, Mariana Lima.
    Summary: Percutaneous Collagen Induction with Microneedling is a minimally invasive technique widely used to treat numerous dermatologic conditions such as facial and body scars, melasma, wrinkles, skin laxity, stretch marks, alopecies, vitiligo and scleroderma. Microneedling can also be used to optimize transdermal drug delivery for many substances. This technique uses modern microneedling devices containing multiple fine needles, typically 0.5 to 2.5 mm in length, which are mounted on a barrel and rolled onto the skin to create numerous perforations into the stratum corneum and the papillary dermis. These micro-wounds initiate the release of growth factors, triggering collagen and elastin formation, which results in dermal remodeling and skin resurfacing. This book provides a step-by-step approach to microneedling, based on the authors' more than ten years of experience with the technique, during which they have treated more than 3,000 patients in Brazil for numerous dermatologic conditions. Richly illustrated throughout, it includes over 400 illustrations.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Presentation
    Acknowledgments
    Contents
    About the Authors
    Chapter 1: Fundamentals of Percutaneous Collagen Induction (PCI) with Needles
    1.1 Percutaneous Needle Collagen Induction (PCI) Versus Ablative Procedures
    1.2 Principles of the PCI Technique
    1.3 Characteristics of the PCI Technique
    1.4 PCI Advantages
    1.5 Disadvantages of PCI
    Sources
    Chapter 2: Classification and Characteristics of the Injury Provoked by PCI
    2.1 Level of the Injury and Its Relationship to the Length of the Needle
    2.2 Classification of Injury Level
    2.3 Final Considerations 4.2.10 Peripheral Nerve Blocks
    4.2.11 Blocking the Supraorbital and Supratrochlear Nerves
    4.2.12 Infraorbital Nerve Block
    4.2.13 Nasociliary Nerve Block
    4.2.14 Lacrimal Nerve Block
    4.2.15 Zygomatic Nerve Block
    4.2.16 Mental Nerve Block
    4.3 Local Anesthetic Intoxication
    4.3.1 Special Features of Anesthesia for PCI
    Sources
    Chapter 5: Preparing the Skin for PCI and Postoperative Management
    5.1 Skin Care That Favors Treatment
    5.2 Detailing the Guidelines for Moderate Injury
    5.3 Detail of the Guidelines for Deep Lesion
    5.4 Biocellulose in Post-procedure 5.5 Closing Considerations
    Sources
    Chapter 6: Histopathological Evidences of the Percutaneous Collagen Induction with Microneedling
    6.1 Introduction
    6.2 Photoaging and Melasma
    6.3 Acne and Stretch Mark Scars
    Sources
    Chapter 7: Managing Complications in PCI
    7.1 PCI Versus Ablative Interventions
    7.2 Expected Reactions and Adverse Effects
    7.2.1 Edema
    7.2.2 Erythema
    7.2.3 Hematoma, Petechiae, and Purple
    7.2.4 Crusts
    7.2.5 Post-inflammatory Hyperpigmentation
    7.2.6 Desquamation
    7.2.7 Burning and Awareness
    7.2.8 Infections
    7.2.9 Pain 7.2.10 Depressed or Elevated Scars
    Sources
    Chapter 8: PCI in Aging Skin
    8.1 PCI Fundamentals in Skin Aging
    8.2 Applicability of PCI to Skin Aging
    8.3 Thickness of Skin
    8.4 Wrinkle Depth
    8.5 Flaccidity
    8.6 Step-by-Step
    8.6.1 Deep Injury
    8.7 Methodological Sequence for Deep Injury
    8.7.1 Moderate Injury
    8.8 Final Considerations
    Sources
    Chapter 9: PCI in the Treatment of Melasma
    9.1 Lima Protocol
    9.2 Mechanism of Action
    9.2.1 Proposed Methodological Sequence
    9.3 Final Considerations
    Sources
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Stéphane Rinfret, editor.
    Summary: The second edition of this essential text provides readers with a detailed guide to performing various percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI) techniques for treating coronary chronic total occlusion (CTO). PCI continues to be an effective procedure to help patients with this pathology, with high success and low complications rates. Chapters feature a step-by-step approach to relevant techniques and describe their potential pitfalls, enabling the reader to develop a thorough understanding of how to perform those procedures successfully. Details of the latest methods for angiography analysis and the management of ostial CTOs, plus heavily revised chapters on topics such as contemporary device-based antegrade dissection and the retrograde approach through septal and non-septal collateral channels ensure that this Work remains the most up-to-date reference on the subject. Percutaneous Intervention for Coronary Chronic Total Occlusion: The Hybrid Approach represents a vital reference to assist practicing and trainee interventional cardiologist in learning these techniques. Various examples are provided, with a vast selection of still images and angiographic video loops to enable the reader become confident in applying these methodologies into their day-to day clinical practice.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface of the First edition
    Preface of the Second edition
    Contents
    About the Editor
    1: What Is What: Important Definitions in Chronic Total Occlusion Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Introduction
    Anatomical and Procedural Definitions
    Efficacy and Safety Endpoints
    Conclusion
    References
    2: The Histopathophysiology of Chronic Total Occlusion and Its Impact on Mode of Treatment
    Introduction
    Mechanisms of Lesion Progression and Histologic Studies of CTO
    Characteristics of the Arterial Wall
    The Lesion Characteristics of CTO With or Without Prior CABG
    Clinical Translation from a Pathological Point of View
    Conclusions
    References
    3: Who Are Best Candidates for Chronic Total Occlusion Revascularization
    Introduction
    Prior Evidence
    EXPLORE Trial
    REVASC Trial
    EUROCTO Trial
    DECISION-CTO Trial
    Conclusions from Trials
    Which Patients Are Best Candidates?
    Final Remarks
    Conclusions
    References
    4: Why, When and How to Assess Ischemia and Viability in Patients with Chronic Total Occlusions
    Introduction
    Ischemia, Hibernation, and Viability
    Why to Assess Ischemia and Viability?
    Ischemia
    Ischemia and Collaterals, and After Opening the CTO
    Ischemia and Prognosis
    Ischemia and Symptoms
    Viability
    When to Assess Ischemia and Viability?
    Guideline Recommendations
    STEMI Patients with a CTO
    Stable Patients with a CTO
    Case Examples
    How to Assess Ischemia and Viability?
    Ischemia
    Nuclear Myocardial Perfusion Imaging
    Stress Echocardiography
    Stress Cardiac Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    Viability
    Stress Echocardiography
    Cardiac Magnetic Resonance Imaging
    Nuclear Imaging
    Conclusion
    References
    5: How to Set Up a Chronic Total Occlusion Angioplasty Program
    Introduction
    Developing CTO Skills. Operator Selection
    Operator Training
    CTO Program Built Around Two Operators
    Infrastructure
    Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory Volume
    Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory
    Cardiac Surgery Program/Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenation (ECMO)
    Nonmedical Staff
    Administrative Support
    Quality Control
    Pre-procedure: CTO Clinic
    Pre-PCI Explanation of the Plan
    Post Procedure: CTO Rounds
    Getting Started, the Practicalities
    References
    6: Equipment Requirement for Chronic Total Occlusion Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Sheaths
    Guide Catheters
    Microcatheters
    Finecross
    Corsair Series
    Turnpike Series
    Mamba Series
    Guidewires
    Dissection/Reentry Equipment
    Guide Catheter Extensions
    Snares
    Equipment for "Uncrossable-Undilatable" Lesions
    Intravascular Ultrasound (IVUS)
    Complication Management Equipment
    References
    7: The Hybrid Approach and Its Variations for Chronic Total Occlusion Percutaneous Coronary Intervention
    Introduction and Historical Perspective
    Simplifying the Complex
    The Algorithms.... Combined
    Who Should Do the Procedure?
    Pre-procedure Coronary CT Angiography
    Choosing the Initial Strategy
    Antegrade Wiring
    Secondary and Bailout Strategies with Primary AW Approach
    Antegrade Dissection and Reentry (ADR)
    The Retrograde Approach
    In-Stent Chronic Total Occlusion
    Switching Strategies
    Ending the Procedure
    Conclusions
    References
    8: When, Why, and How to Perform Good Angiographic Analysis Before CTO PCI
    Introduction
    When and Why
    How
    CTO Angiography
    CTO Angiographic Analysis
    Target Vessel
    CTO Characteristics
    Donor Vessels
    Collateral Circulation
    Collateral Pathways
    Interventional Collaterals
    Conclusion
    References
    9: Specific Basic Techniques to Master in CTO PCI
    Approaching the CTO Segment. Wire Manipulation Techniques in CTO
    Trapping Balloon Technique
    References
    10: When, Why and How to Perform an Antegrade Approach Using a Wiring Technique
    Introduction
    Anatomical Subsets That Favor Antegrade Wiring
    Lesion Length
    Proximal Cap Anatomy
    In-CTO Tortuosity (&gt
    45°)
    Presence of Intra-CTO Calcium
    Previous Procedural Failure
    Other Factors
    Degree of Disease in the "Distal Landing Zone"
    Presence of "Interventional Collaterals"
    Basic Principles of CTO PCI
    Planning
    Visibility
    Backup Support
    Use of "Over-the-Wire" Equipment
    Wire Selection
    Tapered Polymer-Coated Wires
    Medium Weight Wires
    High Gram Weight Wires
    The Proximal Cap and How to Assess It
    Wire Selection: Principles and Rationale
    Polymer-Coated Wires
    Penetration Force
    Tactile Feel
    Torque Transmission
    Wire Selection
    Wire Shaping
    Confirming Progress and Ensuring Safety
    Confirming True Lumen Entry
    Angiographically
    Wire Feel
    Intravascular Ultrasound (IVUS)
    Advancing Equipment
    Anchor Balloon
    Guide Extension
    Higher Support Microcatheter
    Laser Atherectomy
    Rotational Atherectomy
    Indications and Use of Adjunctive Imaging Strategies
    CTA
    IVUS
    When to Switch Strategy
    References
    11: When, Why, and How to Perform Wire-Based Antegrade Dissection and Reentry Technique
    References
    12: When and How to Perform Contemporary Device-Based Antegrade Dissection and Re-entry Technique
    Introduction
    Evolution of Strategies for ADR
    Primary ADR: A Step-by-Step Approach
    Troubleshooting ADR Procedures and Bailout Manoeuvres
    Outcomes with ADR in Contemporary Practice
    Conclusions
    References
    13: How to Deal with Difficult Antegrade Issues
    Difficult Antegrade Issues That Apply to Both AW and ADR
    Ambiguous Proximal Cap
    Impenetrable Cap. Uncrossable Lesion
    Difficult Antegrade Issues That Are Unique to Antegrade Dissection Reentry
    Crossboss Challenges
    Reentry Challenges
    References
    14: Intra-occlusion Microinjection of Contrast: When, Why, and How
    References
    15: When, Why, and How to Perform the Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry Technique
    Introduction
    Pathophysiological Bases and Development of Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Procedural Description of Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Real-Life Experience with Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Role of Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR) in the Hybrid Algorithm
    Further Developments in Antegrade Fenestration and Reentry (AFR)
    Conclusions
    References
    16: When, Why, and How to Perform the Retrograde Approach Through Septal Collateral Channels
    When to Select the Retrograde Approach: How to Analyze the Coronary Angiography
    How to Set Up the Procedure
    Pathways to the Distal Cap (Table 16.1)
    Collateral Channels
    Step-by-Step Approach
    Selecting the Microcatheter, Crossing the Collateral Channel with a Wire, and the Microcatheter
    Selecting the Microcatheter
    Crossing a Septal CC with the Wire
    Surfing from PDA to LAD: A More Difficult Task
    Advancing the Microcatheter to the Distal Cap Through the Septal CC
    Special Situations and Considerations
    Using an Internal Mammary Artery as a Donor Artery to Septal CCs
    LAD or LCX CTOs in a Dominant Left System
    References
    17: When, Why, and How to Perform the Retrograde Approach Through Epicardial and Non-septal Collateral Channels
    When to Perform Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal Connections? Anatomic Evaluation
    Algorithms for Performing Retrograde Approach
    Collateral Channel Scores
    Why Performing Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal CCs? Clinical Evaluation. Indication and Timing of Using Non-septal Collateral CCs
    Risk-Benefit Assessment of Selecting Non-septal CCs
    How to Perform Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal Connections: Practical Considerations
    Arterial Access
    Non-septal Collateral Channel Crossing
    Crossing the CTO
    Externalization
    Complications Related to Retrograde CTO PCI Via Non-septal Connections
    Perforation of the CC When the CTO Is Crossed
    Perforation of the CC When the CTO Remains Uncrossed
    References
    18: When, Why, and How to Perform the Retrograde Approach Through Patent or Occluded SVGs
    Introduction
    CTO PCI in Post-CABG Patients
    Retrograde Approach Through an SVG
    Retrograde Via Diseased But Patent SVGs
    Retrograde Via Occluded SVGs
    Guide Extensions in SVGs
    Specific Situations
    Stumpless SVG Use
    Retrograde Access Via Acutely or Recently Thrombosed SVG in ACS Patients
    How to Deal with Acute Angle of Distal Anastomosis
    Distal Anastomosis Ambiguity
    Stenting Coronary Across Distal SVG Anastomosis After CTO PCI
    Dealing with Anastomotic Stents in SVGs
    Protecting the Graft
    What To Do with the SVG Once the Native Artery CTO is Open?
    Potential Complications When Using SVGs as Retrograde Conduits
    Distal Embolization
    SVG Perforation
    Aortic Dissection
    Mediastinal Bleeding/Haematoma
    References
    19: How to Cross the Occlusion Using a Retrograde Approach, How to Externalize, and How to Snare Long Wires
    Introduction
    Retrograde Wiring
    Wire Choice
    Confirming Wire Position
    Note on Safety in RW
    Retrograde Dissection and Re-entry
    Creating an Antegrade Dissection
    Use of Guide Catheter Extension
    Creating a Retrograde Dissection
    Joining the Spaces
    Externalization
    Use of Snare for Externalization
    Principles of Snaring
    How to Snare.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Kamran Ahrar, Sanjay Gupta, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive source for all aspects of percutaneous image-guided biopsy. A synthesis of rationale, technique and evidence-based medicine, it offers a clear approach to imaging, devices, procedures and patient care.

    Contents:
    Biopsy devices and techniques
    CT-guided biopsy
    Radiation protection during CT-guided interventions
    Ultrasound-guided biopsy
    MRI-guided biopsy
    Fluoroscopy-guided biopsy
    Advanced tools and devices: navigation technologies, automation, and robotics in percutaneous interventions
    Pathologic evalution of tissues obtained by interventional radiology techniques
    Biopsy of head and neck lesions
    Biopsy of mediastinal lesions
    Percutaneous transthoracic lung biopsy
    Pleural biopsy
    Liver biopsy
    Percutaneous biopsy of the pancreas
    Spleen biopsy
    Adrenal gland biopsy
    Renal mass biopsy
    Percutaneous and transjugular kidney biopsy
    Nodes and soft tissue masses involving the retroperitoneum, mesentery, omentum and peritoneal ligaments
    Biopsy of pelvic lesions
    MRI-guided prostate biopsy
    Biopsy of the spine
    Anatomic guidelines and approaches for biopsy of the long bones
    Musculoskeletal biopsies: extremities.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Stéphane Rinfret, editor.
    Contents:
    1. How to justify CTO revascularization
    2. How to set up a chronic total occlusion angioplasty program
    3. What equipment should be available?
    4. Specific basic techniques to master in CTO PCI
    5. When and how to perform an antegrade approach using a wire escalation technique
    6. When and how to perform an antegrade dissection/re-entry approach using the CrossBoss and Singray Catheters
    7. How to deal with difficult antegrade issues
    8. Intra-occlusion microinjectin of contrast: when, why and how
    9. How and when to perform the retrograde approach
    10. How to recanalize in-stent chronic total occlusion
    11. How to fix common problems encountered in CTO PCI: the expanded hybrid approach
    12. How to improve catheter support during CTO PCI
    13. When and how to perform a transradial appraoch for CTO PCI
    14. How to manage radiation and contrast during chronic total occlusion percutaneous coronary intervention
    15. Complications of chronic total occlusion percutaneous coronary intervention
    16. How to prevent perforation during CTO PCI
    17. How to prevent and manage ischemic complications during CTO PCI
    18. Managing entrapped gear during chronic total occlusion interventions
    19. How to start and build your CTO practice and maintain referrals in a competitive environment
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Guohua Zeng, Kemal Sarica, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Nina Dragicevic, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Contents:
    NANOCARRIERS IN PENETRATION ENHANCEMENT
    Role Of Nanotechnology In Skin Delivery Of Drugs
    LIPID-BASED VESICLES
    Liposomes As Drug Delivery Systems In Dermal/Transdermal Drug Delivery (From The Beginning)
    Transfersomes For Enhanced Skin Permeation Of Drugs
    Mechanism Of Penetration Enhancement Of Ultra deformable Vesicles
    Enhanced Skin Permeation Using Ethosomes
    Invasomes-Vesicles For Enhanced Skin Delivery Of Drugs
    Penetration-Enhancer-Containing Vesicles For Cutaneous Drug Delivery
    Stratum Corneum Lipid Liposomes
    Vesosomes
    Surface-Charged Vesicles For Penetration Enhancement
    SURFACTANT-BASED VESICLES
    Niosomes And Pro-Niosomes For Enhanced Skin Delivery
    Novasomes For Enhanced Skin Delivery
    LIPID-BASED ICULATE CARRIERS (OR ICLES)
    Solid Lipid Nanoicles, Nano structured Lipid Carriers And Lipid Nano capsules For Topical Delivery
    POLYMER-BASED NANOCARRIERS (ICULATE CARRIERS) IN PENETRATION ENHANCEMENT
    Polymeric Nano (And Micro-) Particles As Carriers For Enhanced Skin Penetration (General)
    Polymeric Nanocapsules For Cutaneous Application
    Polymeric Micelles In Dermal/Transdermal Drug Delivery
    Dendrimers In Enhancing Skin Penetration
    Dendritic Core-Multishell (CMS) Nanotransporters For Skin Delivery
    NANOCRYSTALS IN PENETRATION ENHANCEMENT
    Nanocrystals For Enhanced Skin Delivery Of Drugs.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Nina Dragicevic, Howard I. Maibach, editors.
    Summary: Percutaneous Penetration Enhancers in a mini-series format comprising five volumes, represents the most comprehensive reference on enhancement methods - both well established and recently introduced - in the field of dermal/transdermal drug delivery. In detail the broad range of both chemical and physical methods used to enhance the skin delivery of drugs is described. All aspects of drug delivery and measurement of penetration are covered, and the latest findings are provided on skin structure and function, mathematics in skin permeation, and modern analytical techniques adapted to assess and measure penetration. In offering a detailed description of the methods currently in use for penetration enhancement, this book will be of value for researchers, pharmaceutical scientists, practitioners, and also students.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Manoj Monga, Abhay Rane.
    Contents:
    Section 1. Introduction
    section 2. Percutaneous management of large renal calculi (Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy)
    section 3. Percutaneous management of transitional cell cancer (Percutaneous resection of tumor)
    section 4. Percutaneous ablation of renal cell cancer (Thermal and nonthermal).
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    David R Webb.
    Contents:
    Foreword
    Anatomy
    Equipment, Instruments, and Personnel
    Indications for PCNL-Patient Selection and Evaluation
    Percutaneous Nephrostomy
    Routine Percutaneous Nephrolithotomy and Pyeloplasty
    Complex Punctures
    Complications of PCNL and their Management
    Critical Pathways, Theatre Equipment Lists and Setups
    PCNL Workshop.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Giuseppe Servillo, Paolo Pelosi, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Tracheostomy: from surgical to percutaneous techniques
    2. Anatomiical and sonographic landmark
    3. Indication and timing
    4. Surgical tracheostomy
    5. Percutaneous tracheostomy: the ciaglia techniques
    6. Balloon dilation tracheostomy
    7. Percutaneous tracheostomy: the guide wire dilating forceps technique
    8. Frova's rotational technique and Fantoni's translaryngeal tracheostomy
    9. Choice of the appropriate tracheostomy technique
    10. Complications of percutaneous and surgical tracheostomy in critically ill patients
    11. Emergency percutaneous tracheotomy
    12. Tracheostomy tube types and criteria of choice
    13. Airway managment during tracheostomy: conventional device, laryngeal mask airway, double lumen endotracheal tube
    14. Medical and nursing management of tracheostomy
    15 .Quality of life and complications after percutaneous tracheostomy
    16. Clinical practice of informed consent for percutaneous tracheostomy
    17. Tracheostomy in intensive care unit: the need of European guidelines.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Patrizia Presbitero, Julinda Mehilli, Anna Sonia Petronio, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Women and invasive diagnostic procedures
    2. Intracoronary imaging and intracoronary functional tests
    3. Interventional treatment of stable coronary artery disease in women
    4. Interventional treatment of Acute Coronary Syndrome (ACS): non-ST-elevation ACS (NSTE-ACS)
    5. Interventional treatment of acute coronary syndrome: ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction
    6. Peri- and Post-procedural Antithrombotic Therapy in Women
    7. Aortic valve valvuloplasty
    8. Transcatheter aortic valve implantation
    9. Mitral valvuloplasty for mitral stenosis
    10. Treatment of mitral regurgitation
    11. Surgical and percutaneous treatment of tricuspid valve
    12. Left atrial appendage closure
    13. Closure of atrial septal defect and patent foramen ovale
    14. Ablation of atrial fibrillation in women
    15. Biventricular pacing in women for heart failure
    16. Thoracic and abdominal aorta percutaneous treatment
    17. Treatment of peripheral arteriopathy in women
    18. Gender Differences in Carotid Artery Stenting
    19. Percutaneous treatment during pregnancy
    20. Left ventricular assist devices.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Edward C. Halperin, David E. Wazer, Carlos A. Perez, Luther W. Brady.
    Summary: For more than 30 years, Perez and Brady's Principles and Practice of Radiation Oncology has been a reference for radiation oncologists and radiation oncology residents who need a comprehensive text covering both the biological and physical science aspects of this complex field as well as disease site-specific information on the integrated, multidisciplinary management of patients with cancer. The book has established itself as the discipline's "text-of-record," belonging on the shelf of all of those working in the field. The Seventh Edition continues this tradition of excellence with extensive updates throughout, many new chapters, and more than 1,400 full-color illustrations that highlight key concepts in tumor pathogenesis, diagnosis, and targeted radiation therapy.

    Contents:
    Sect. I: Overview and basic science of radiation oncology
    Pt. A: Cancer biology
    Pt. B: Medical radiation physics
    Sect. II: Techniques, modalities, and modifiers in radiation oncology
    Sect. III: Clinical radiation oncology Pt. A: Skin
    Pt. B: Central nervous system
    Pt. C: Head and neck
    Pt. D: Thorax
    Pt. E: Breast
    Pt. F: Gastrointestinal
    Pt. G: Urinary tract
    Pt. H: Male genitourinary
    Pt. I: Gynecologic
    Pt. J: Adrenal and retroperitoneal tumors
    Pt. K: Lymphoma and hematologic tumors
    Pt. L: Bone and soft tissue
    Pt. M: Pediatric
    Pt. N: Benign diseases
    Sect. IV: Palliative and supportive care
    Sect. V: Economics, education, ethics, and technology assessment.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Ovid
    LWW Health Library
  • Digital
    Michel Gagner, Almino Ramos Cardoso, Mariano Palermo, Patrick Noel, David Nocca, editors.
    Summary: Sleeve gastrectomy (SG) is the most common bariatric procedure, accounting for more than 55% of all such surgeries performed worldwide. Obesity has become a major global problem that continues to spread in both developed and developing countries. While prevention of obesity is the best approach for the future, the current challenge is managing those who are already obese or morbidly obese, who constitute close to two thirds of the population in many countries, such as the US. Today, bariatric surgery is the only evidence-based treatment for morbid obesity with a low complication rate and acceptable results in the long-term for both weight loss and resolution of comorbidities. This book details all the approaches used in sleeve gastrectomy (SG), offering readers the tools needed to perform the perfect SG. Each chapter focuses on the clinical problems and the indications for the sleeve, and describes the technique step-by-step (including videos), the staplers, the different sizes of bougies, reinforcement of the sutures after the sleeve and the metabolic effects of surgery. The book also presents nontraditional SG techniques, such as the endoscopic approach, stapled sleeve and robotic technologies, discussing how to immediately identify complications and their treatment using endoscopy, laparoscopy and percutaneous image guided surgery. Further, it includes a chapter on revision surgery and revision procedures, not only from sleeve to other procedures, but also from other procedures to SG. The last section offers an overview of what the authors imagine the future holds for this bariatric procedure. The Perfect Sleeve Gastrectomy - A Clinical Guide to Evaluation, Treatment, and Techniques is an ideal reference resource for general surgeons, bariatric surgeons, endoscopists and gastroenterologists as well as researchers with an interest in obesity and its management. It also appeals to residents and fellows, dietitians, diabetes specialist, psychotherapists and hospital administrators and quality officers.

    Contents:
    Part 1: Operative preparation and background
    Part 2: Technical aspects
    Part 3: Sleeve gastrectomy GERD and hiatal hernia
    Part 4: Nontraditional sleeve gastrectomy
    Part 5: Treatment of complications
    Part 6: Revisional Surgery
    Part 7: Education and future. .
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Phillip N. Blondeel, Steven F. Morris, Geoffrey G. Hallock, Peter C. Neligan; with illustrations by Jennifer C. Darcy.
    Summary: Nearly two decades ago, the first edition of Perforator Flaps: Anatomy, Technique, & Clinical Applications was published, thereby filling a gap in the literature, and providing invaluable clinical pearls on the use of soft tissue flaps for reconstructive surgery. Since the publication of the second edition, technological advances including MRI angiography, standard color duplex ultrasound, ultra-high frequency ultrasound, and indocyanine green enabled better understanding of select pertinent physiology and delineation of perforators anywhere in the body. Greater anatomical knowledge and the ability to map the course of individual perforators is reflected in the updated third edition by renowned global experts and editors of the prior editions, Phillip N. Blondeel, Steven F. Morris, Geoffrey G. Hallock, and Peter C. Neligan. The primary goal of the third edition is to discuss evidenced-based perforator concepts and techniques that have been incorporated into global practice worldwide. Although condensed into a single volume, the new edition follows a similar format as prior editions, with chapters divided into four sections. The first section provides a solid foundation of knowledge with discussion of rudimentary fundamentals. The second section illustrates the use of basic types of local perforator flaps; introduces the vascularized dermal graft; describes routine suprafascial flap dissections with perforators themselves as recipient and donor vessels; lymphatics reconstituted in concert with perforator flaps; and how to minimize donor site morbidity with "kiss" flaps. The third section outlines basic anatomy and techniques for common perforator flaps, while the fourth section provides a brief overview of suggested preferences for clinical applications, with both sections organized by body region.-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Joshua L. Levine, Julie Vasile, Constance M. Chen, Robert J. Allen, Sr.
    Contents:
    The history of the use of perforator flaps for microsurgical breast reconstruction / Sarah E. Appleton and Steven F. Morris
    Starting a perforator flap breast program / Christina R. Vargas and Bernard T. Lee
    Essential equipment needed for perforator flap breast reconstruction and
    Operating room setup / David Greenspun
    Deep inferior epigastric perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Robert J. Allen, Sr., Constance M. Chen, and Maria M. Lotempio
    Superficial inferior epigastric artery flap for breast reconstruction / Aldona J. Spiegel
    Gluteal artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Richard Mahlon Kline, Jr., and James Ernest Craigie
    Profunda artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Robert J. Allen, Sr., Maria M. Lotempio, and Constance M. Chen
    Free lumbar artery perforator flap for autologous breast reconstruction / Koen Van Landuyt and Steven F. Morris
    Pedicled lateral thoracic flap for breast reconstruction / Moustapha Hamdi and Assaf Zeltzer
    Bipedicled (double or stacked) abdominal perforator flap in unilateral breast
    Reconstruction / Julie V. Vasile and Joshua L. Levine
    Venus salvage procedures in the deep inferior epigastric perforator flap for
    Breast reconstruction / Thomas Constantinescu and Ming-Huei Cheng
    Imaging for perforator flap breast reconstruction / Julie V. Vasile
    Lateral thigh perforator flap (septocutaneous tensor fasciae latae flap) / Stephania Tuinder, Arno Lataster, and Rene Remmelt Willie Johan van der Hulst
    Stacked diep/pap flap breast reconstruction / James L. Mayo and Robert J. Allen, Sr
    Deep circumflex iliac artery perforator flap for breast reconstruction / Edward Buchel
    Indocyanine green/spy imaging in perforator flap breast reconstruction / Michael R. Zenn.
  • Print
    National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.5 P47 2019
    1
  • Print
    National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.7.T62 P47 2018
    1
  • Digital
    Howard A. Bird.
    Contents:
    1. Expert Care of the Performing Artist
    2. Musical Instruments and their Demands on the Body
    3. Styles of Dance and Their Demands on the Body
    4. The Voice and the Musculoskeletal System
    5. Principles of Management
    6. Illustrative Musical Case Studies
    7. Illustrative Dance Case Studies
    8. Overuse Syndromes
    9. Hypermobility in Dance; Asset not Liability
    10. Scoliosis in Musicians and Dancers
    11. Drugs and Therapeutics
    12. The Disabled Performer
    13. The Multi-Talented Performer
    14. Future Trends.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Massimo Morbidelli, Moritz Wolf, Jean-Marc Bielser.
    Summary: This book is a monography about perfusion cell cultures for the production of biopharmaceuticals, such as therapeutic proteins (i.e. biomolecules like monoclonal antibodies), and describes the fundamentals, design and operation of these processes. Context is given in the first chapters to understand the state-of-the-art of the technology. We then give an overview of the challenges and objectives in operating mammalian cell perfusion cultures and provide guidelines for the design and setup of lab-scale bioreactor systems, and the required control structure to achieve stable operation. Scale-down devices and PAT tools are described in the context of continuous manufacturing and guidelines for process optimization are given using a variety of case studies to illustrate different approaches. Scale-up is also adressed with a strong focus on bioreactor aeration and mixing, shear stress and cell retention device. Finally, a general introduction for the application of mechanistic and statistic models in bioreactor process development and optimization is given in the last chapter. Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Perfusion mammalian cell culture for recombinant protein manufacturing
    Perfusion bioreactors : the set up and process characterization
    Scale-down models and sensors for process development
    Design and optimization of mammalian cell perfusion cultures
    Clinical and commercial scale reactors
    Mechanistic and statistical modeling of bioprocesses.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Gregory S. Matte.
    Contents:
    Equipment for bypass
    Priming the bypass circuit
    The bypass plan
    Typical phases of cardiopulmonary bypass
    Additional notes based on bypass tasks
    Bypass considerations based on diagnosis
    Notes on select issues during bypass
    Notes on select emergency procedures during bypass
    Brief overview of named procedures and terms
    Abbreviations for congenital heart surgery.
    Digital Access Wiley 2015
  • Digital
    Anastasia Kelekis-Cholakis, Reem Atout, Nader Hamdan, Ioannis Tsourounakis.
    Summary: This book is an up-to-date reference that provides detailed guidance on how to diagnose and manage the soft and hard tissue complications that may be associated with a functioning dental implant placement, such as peri-implant mucositis, soft tissue loss, and peri-implantitis. Treatment options for each complication are described and illustrated step by step and carefully selected cases are presented to further explain the individual stages in management and to highlight key learning points. Practical advice is offered on all aspects of diagnosis, and information is also presented on the definition and etiology of the various complications. The book is in an easy-to-read format and includes a review of the latest literature on the topic.

    Contents:
    An introduction to understanding the basics of teeth vs. dental implants : similarities and differences
    Peri-implant soft tissue deficiencies
    Peri-implant mucositis
    Hard tissue complications/peri-implantitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Vijay Vohra, Nikunj Gupta, Annu Sarin Jolly, Seema Bhalotra, editors.
    Summary: The book covers all aspects of peri-operative anesthetic management of liver transplant patients. It provides a comprehensive coverage of the relevant history, surgeons, hepatologists, intensivists and pediatricians perspective of the disease, its pathogenesis, clinical presentation and indication for transplant. It discusses the practical aspects like fluid management and use of vasopressors. The book is divided into sections for a better and comprehensive delivery of information. Individual sections provide up to date information on the pre-operative issues and optimisation, intra-operative care and management and post-operative critical care issues and management of all transplant patients with special emphasis on recent advances. Separate sections cover ICU care of these patients in great detail and anesthetic management of pediatric liver transplant. The book includes anesthetic techniques involved in conducting multiorgan transplant. It discusses clinical approach to a patient with acute liver failure, brain death criteria and laws and organ donor management. It also presents newer techniques and methodologies adopted in the field of liver transplant. It includes ample illustrations, flowcharts, key points in each chapter, figures and photographs. The book contains chapters focusing on post-transplant patients presenting for non-transplant surgery. The book fills the gap in the literature for a comprehensive guide for the anesthetist performing or pursuing liver transplant, students/trainees/examinees who have a keen interest in this field and doctors dealing with such patients in critical care, donor management, pursuing general anesthesia. It is also helpful for hepatologists, intensivists and surgeons associated with liver transplant.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    About the Editors
    1: The History of Liver Transplantation in India
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Background
    1.3 Step I: Public Education
    1.4 Step 2: Changing the Law
    1.5 Step 3: The Initial Procedures
    1.6 Step 4: Sustainable Programmes
    1.6.1 Numbers
    1.6.2 Statewise Distribution
    1.6.3 The Situation in 2020
    1.7 India Vs the World
    1.8 Concerns
    1.9 Recommendations
    1.10 Conclusions
    Part I: Basics Anatomy and Pathophysiology of Liver Disease
    2: Physiological Role of Liver and Interpreting Liver Function Tests 2.1 Gross Anatomy of the Liver
    2.1.1 Hepatic Blood Flow Regulation
    2.2 Cellular Anatomy of the Liver
    2.2.1 Models of Liver Microanatomy
    2.3 Liver, the Immunological Gateway
    2.3.1 Innate and Adaptive Immunity
    2.3.2 Immune Tolerance
    2.4 Hepatic Drug Metabolism
    2.4.1 First Pass Effect
    2.4.2 Phases of Drug Metabolism
    2.4.3 Drug Extraction Ratio
    2.5 Energy Metabolism
    2.5.1 Glucose Homeostasis
    2.5.2 Nitrogen Metabolism
    2.5.3 Fatty Acid Metabolism
    2.6 Role of the Liver in Coagulation
    2.7 Hepatic Endocrine Function 2.8 Chronic Liver Disease
    2.9 Interpreting Liver Function Tests
    2.10 Tests Detecting Hepatocyte Injury
    2.10.1 Serum Aminotransferases
    2.10.2 AST to ALT Ratio
    2.10.3 Lactate Dehydrogenase
    2.11 Tests Detecting Injury to Bile Ducts
    2.11.1 Alkaline Phosphatase
    2.12 5′-Nucleotidase
    2.13 Gamma-Glutamyl Transferase
    2.14 Tests Assessing Biliary Organic Anion Transport
    2.14.1 Serum Bilirubin
    2.15 Tests Measure Hepatic Synthetic Capacity
    2.15.1 Serum Proteins
    2.16 Prothrombin Time and International Normalized Ratio 2.17 Tests Measuring Blood Flow and Metabolic Capacity of Liver
    2.18 Pattern of Liver Test Abnormalities
    2.19 Monitoring Liver Transplant
    References
    3: Surgical Anatomy of the Liver
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Ligaments of the Liver (Fig. 3.1)
    3.2.1 Ligamentum Venosum (Arantius Ligament)
    3.3 Lobar and Segmental Anatomy of the Liver
    3.3.1 Functional Surgical Anatomy of the Liver
    3.3.2 Bismuth's Liver Segmentation
    3.4 Caudate Lobe
    3.4.1 Hepatocaval Ligament (Makuuchi Ligament)
    3.4.2 Riedel Lobe (Fig. 3.8)
    3.5 Hepatic Veins (Venous Outflow) 3.5.1 Right Inferior Hepatic Veins: RIHV (Fig. 3.11)
    3.5.2 Inferior Phrenic Veins
    3.6 Anatomical Relations Around the Hilum
    3.6.1 Extrahepatic and Intrahepatic Vasculature
    3.7 Portal Vein
    3.8 Hepatic Artery
    3.9 Biliary Anatomy
    3.9.1 Intrahepatic Bile Duct Anatomy
    3.9.2 The Right Hepatic Duct
    3.9.3 The Left Hepatic Duct
    3.9.4 Extrahepatic Biliary Anatomy
    3.9.5 Biliary Ductal Anomalies
    3.9.6 Bile Duct Blood Supply
    3.10 Gallbladder and Cystic Duct
    3.10.1 The Calot's Triangle (Fig. 3.19)
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Daphne Stannard, Dina A. Krenzischek.
    Summary: PeriAnesthesia Nursing Care: A Bedside Guide for Safe Recovery is a key reference for clinicians practicing in preoperative areas, phase I and phase II PACU nursing areas, and nurses working in critical care, OB, and other specialty recovery units. Ideal for perianesthesia nursing orientation and perioperative cross-training programs, this text is beneficial for all those caring for pre- and postanesthesia patients. Additionally, it is a valuable tool for nursing students specializing in critical care and perianesthesia nurses preparing to sit for the certified post anesthesia nurse (CPAN) and certified ambulatory perianesthesia nurse (CAPA) certification examinations. Divided into three sections that cover the lifespan, PeriAnesthesia Nursing Care: A Bedside Guide for Safe Recovery is specifically designed to be functional for the clinician and grounding for the student nurse. The first section focuses on core concepts applicable to all perianesthesia patients and families, while the second is population specific, and the third concentrates on particular surgeries and procedures that follow body systems. --Book Jacket.
    Digital Access R2Library 2018
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    ASPAN, American Society of PeriAnesthesia Nurses ; [edited by] Lois Schick, Pamela E. Windle.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey Nursing 2021
  • Digital
    Alireza Fazeli, William V. Holt, editors.
    Summary: "This book presents a timely collection of reviews by experts in periconception and fertilization. The book provides a good introduction for those new to the field as well as those who have worked in this field for some time, but not have been able to keep up-to-date with recent advances on the topic. The book reviews the current knowledge in this field, then focuses its attention on short-term and long-term effects of the periconception period, both from a physiological and medical perspective. Finally the volume covers the examination of the potential mechanisms involved in controlling periconception period. From the early days of discovery about the basics of the fertilization process, scientist shave known that early events happening during conception play a major part in the creation of new offspring. However, until nearly a decade ago we thought these events were just concerned with the conception and nothing to do with lifelong health and welfare, or wellbeing of the offspring. Early indications from IVF in sheep and cattle suggested that the embryo culture conditions employed in the laboratory could result in unusually large and unhealthy offspring. These observations sounded alarm bells and stimulated research into the impacts of in vivo and in vitro conditions on the health of embryos and offspring. This book provides a summary of the state-of-the-art research being done to more fully understand the importance of the periconception environment"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Introduction: a brief guide to the periconception environment / Alireza Fazeli, William V. Holt
    Epigenetic influences during the periconception period and assisted reproduction / Akwasi A. Amoako, Tamer M. Nafee [and others]
    The importance of the periconception period: immediate effects in cattle breeding and in assisted reproduction such as artificial insemination and embryo transfer / Mieke Van Eetvelde, Sonia Heras, J. L. M. R. Leroy, Ann Van Soom, Geert Opsomer
    The consequences of maternal-embryonic cross talk during the periconception period on subsequent embryonic development / Dimitrios Rizos, Veronica Maillo, Maria-Jesús Sá́nchez-Calabuig [and others]
    The role of maternal nutrition during the periconceptional period and its effect on offspring phenotype / Tom P. Fleming, Judith J. Eckert, Oleg Denisenko
    The long-term effect of the periconception period on the embryo's epigenetic profile and phenotype: the role of maternal disease such as diabetes and how the effect is mediated (example from a rabbit model) / Bernd Fischer, Maria Schindler, S. Mareike Pendzialek, Jacqueline Gürke, Elisa Haucke [and others]
    Long-term effects of the periconception period on embryo epigenetic profile and phenotype: the role of stress and how this effect is mediated / James Ord, Alireza Fazeli, Penelope J. Watt
    The long-term effects of the periconceptional period on embryo epigenetic profile and phenotype; the paternal role and his contribution, and how males can affect offspring's phenotype/epigenetic profile / Emma S. Lucas, Adam J. Watkins
    Exploitation of non-mammalian model organisms in epigenetic research / William V. Holt.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Alexander Birbrair, editor.
    Summary: This volume explores novel concepts of pericyte biology. The present book is an attempt to describe the most recent developments in the area of pericyte biology which is one of the emergent hot topics in the field of molecular and cellular biology today. Here, we present a selected collection of detailed chapters on what we know so far about the pericytes. Together with its companion volumes Pericyte Biology in Different Organs and Pericyte Biology in Disease, Pericyte Biology - Novel Concepts presents a comprehensive update on the latest information and most novel functions attributed to pericytes. To those researchers newer to this area, it will be useful to have the background information on these cells' unique history. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cells and researchers or clinicians involved with specific diseases. .

    Contents:
    Pericyte biology: development, homeostasis, and disease / Alexander Birbrair
    The NG2 proteoglycan in pericyte biology / William B. Stallcup
    Pericytes for therapeutic bone repair / Carolyn A. Meyers, Joan Casamitjana, Leslie Chang, Lei Zhang, Aaron W. James, Bruno Péault
    Pericyte biology in zebrafish / Nabila Bahrami, Sarah J. Childs
    The microvascular pericyte: approaches to isolation, characterization, and cultivation / Paula Dore-Duffy, Nilufer Esen
    Pericytes in veterinary species: prospective isolation, characterization and tissue regeneration potential / Cristina L. Esteves, F. Xavier Donadeu
    Pericytes in the human vocal fold mucosa / Kiminori Sato
    Ca2+ signalling in pericytes / Theodor Burdyga, Lyudmyla Borysova
    Pericytes derived from human pluripotent stem cells / John Jamieson, Bria Macklin, Sharon Gerecht
    Pericytes in tissue engineering / Betül Çelebi-Saltik
    Pericyte Secretome / Abderahim Gaceb, Gesine Paul
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Alexander Birbrair, editor.
    Summary: The present book is an attempt to describe the most recent developments in the area of pericyte biology which is one of the emergent hot topics in the field of molecular and cellular biology today. Here, we present a selected collection of thirteen detailed chapters on what we know so far about pericytes in distinct organs in physiological and pathological conditions. Further, it provides an update on the most novel functions attributed to these cells and will introduce a newer generation of researchers and scientists to the importance of these cells, ranging from their discovery in different organs through current state-of-the-science. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cells and vascular research. This volume explores pericytes' physiologic roles in different tissues, ranging from the pancreas, lungs and liver through skeletal muscle, gut, retina and more. Together with its companion volumes Pericyte Biology in Disease and Pericyte Biology - Novel Concepts, Pericyte Biology in Different Organs presents a comprehensive update on the latest information and most novel functions attributed to pericytes. To those researchers newer to this area, it will be useful to have the background information on these cells' unique history. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cells and researchers or clinicians involved with specific organs. .

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Contributors
    Pericytes in the Retina
    Pancreatic Pericytes in Glucose Homeostasis and Diabetes
    Pericytes in the Lung
    Pericytes in Skeletal Muscle
    Pericytes in the Gut
    Pericytes in Bone Marrow
    Cochlear Capillary Pericytes
    Pericytes in the Placenta: Role in Placental Development and Homeostasis
    Pericytes in the Liver
    Pericytes in the Periodontal Ligament
    Pericytes in the Heart
    Pericytes in the Umbilical Cord
    The Pluripotent Microvascular Pericytes Are the Adult Stem Cells Even in the Testis
    Index
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Alexander Birbrair.
    Summary: This volume explores pericytes' roles under distinct pathological conditions, ranging from tumors, ALS, Alzheimers disease, Multiple Sclerosis, stroke, diabetes, atherosclerosis, muscular dystrophies and more. Together with its companion volumes Pericyte Biology in Different Organs and Pericyte Biology – Novel Concepts, Pericyte Biology in Disease presents a comprehensive update on the latest information and most novel functions attributed to pericytes. To those researchers newer to this area, it will be useful to have the background information on these cells' unique history. It will be invaluable for both advanced cell biology students as well as researchers in cell biology, stem cell biology and clinicians involved with these specific diseases.

    Contents:
    Pericytes in cutaneous wound healing
    Pericytes in glioblastomas: multifaceted role within tumor microenvironments and potential for therapeutic interventions
    Pericytes in breast cancer
    Pericytes in sarcomas and other mesenchymal tumors
    Pericytes in metastasis
    The role of pericytes in Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    Pericytes in Alzheimers Disease: novel clues to cerebral amyloid angiopathy pathogenesis
    Pericytes in Multiple Sclerosis
    Pericytes in ischemic stroke
    Pericytes in Hereditary Hemorrhagic Telangiectasia
    Pericytes in primary familial brain calcification
    Pericytes in type 2 diabetes
    Pericytes in atherosclerosis
    Pericytes in chronic lung disease
    Pericytes in muscular dystrophies
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Sandraluz Lara-Cinisomo, Katherine Leah Wisner, editors.
    Summary: Perinatal Depression among Spanish-Speaking and Latin American Women:A Global Perspective on Detection and Treatment. As more is known about postpartum depression, the more it is recognized as a global phenomenon. Yet despite the large numbers, information about this condition as experienced by Spanish speaking women and Latinas has not always been easy to come by. Perinatal Depression among Spanish-Speaking and Latin American Women focuses on four diverse Latina populations (Mexico, Chile, Spain, and U.S.) to analyze key similarities and differences within this large and wide-ranging group. This first-of-its-kind reference reviews current research on the topic, including prevalence, screening methods, interventions, and--of particular salience for this population--barriers to care. Findings on psychoeducation, assessment tools, and cognitive-behavioral and other forms of therapy provide important insights into best practices, and continuity of care. And psychosocial, cultural, and linguistic considerations in working with Latinas are described in depth for added clinical usefulness. This landmark volume: Outlines characteristics of Spanish-speaking women and Latinas screened for postpartum depression Introduces the Edinburgh Postnatal Depression Scale, English and Spanish versions, and reviews their use with Latina women Compares postpartum depression and health behaviors in Spanish and Latina immigrant mothers Offers streamlined assessment-to-intervention models Provides two in-depth case studies illustrating cultural factors influencing the treatment of Latinas with perinatal depression Presents an instructive firsthand account of postpartum depression. Between its thorough coverage of the issues and its innovative clinical ideas, Perinatal Depression among Spanish-Speaking and Latin American Women has a wealth of information of interest to researchers and practitioners in maternal and child health, obstetrics/gynecology, mental health, and women's health.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. A global perspective on postpartum depression: An overview of the current research with Spanish-speaking women in the U.S. and abroad
    Chapter 2. Characteristics of Hispanic Women Screened for Postpartum Depression
    Chapter 3. Maternity, migration and mental health: Comparison between Spanish and Latina immigrant mothers in postpartum depression and health behaviors
    Chapter 4. Assessment, Engagement and Treatment Entry for Latina Women with Perinatal Depression
    Chapter 5. Screening for postpartum depression in Chilean women with the Postpartum Depression Screening Scale, Spanish version
    Chapter 6. Perinatal Depression Treatments for U.S. Latinas: A Review of Research Findings
    Chapter 7. Psychosocial and cultural considerations in detecting and treating depression in Latina perinatal women in the United States
    Chapter 8. Perinatal depression in Mexican women: Prevalence, risk factors, and prevention of postpartum depression
    Chapter 9. Treating Latinas with postpartum depression: Two case reports
    Chapter 10. Maternidad Tab , the Silent Epidemic: An autobiographical story of postpartum depression in Mexico.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [editors], Mary E. Norton, Jeffrey A. Kuller and Lorraine Dugoff.
    Summary: "Get a quick, expert overview of the fast-changing field of perinatal genetics with this concise, practical resource. Drs. Mary Norton, Jeffrey A. Kuller, and Lorraine Dugoff fully cover the clinically relevant topics that are key to providers who care for pregnant women and couples contemplating pregnancy. It's an ideal resource for Ob/Gyn physicians, maternal-fetal medicine specialists, and clinical geneticists, as well as midwives, nurse practitioners, and other obstetric providers"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Principles of medical genetics and genomics
    Non-Mendelian genetics
    Principles of genetic counseling
    Cytogenetics: part 1, general concepts and aneuploid conditions
    Cytogenetics: part 2, structural rearrangements and reproductive impact
    Molecular genetics
    Carrier screening
    Serum and ultrasound based screening tests for aneuploidy
    Cell free DNA screening
    Ultrasound markers for aneuploidy
    Genetic evaluation of fetal sonographic abnormalities
    Chromosomal microarray analysis
    Exome and genome sequencing
    Prenatal diagnostic testing
    Preimplantation genetic screening and diagnosis
    Fetal treatment of genetic disorders.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital/Print
    Antonio L. Teixeira, Danielle Macedo, Bernhard T. Baune, editors
    Summary: Perinatal psychiatry is an emerging field that investigates the role of perinatal events - for example pregnancy complications and infections - in the development of neuropsychiatric conditions, such as schizophrenia and mood disorders. Among the implicated pathological mechanisms, perinatal-induced inflammation seems to play a major role and is being considered as a potential target for therapeutic intervention. Bringing together various approaches in the field (preclinical and clinical, epidemiological, immunological and genetic methods), the book discusses the available evidence, the putative mechanisms and the challenges ahead. -- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Perinatal psychiatry : ready for prime time? / Sudhakar Selvaraj, Haitham Salem, Cristian P. Zeni, Antonio L. Teixeira
    Developmental programming during psychological stress in pregnancy : a neurobiological perspective / Natalie Aboustate, Bernhard T. Baune
    Epigenetic modifications of early-life stress and adult life psychopathology / Chris Murgatroyd
    Hypothalamus-pituitary-adrenal axis programming by early-life stress : a role played by inflammatory and epigenetic mechanisms / Gabriel R. Fries
    Intergenerational aspects of immune and endocrine function in perinatal depression / Andrew J. Perrin, Carmine M. Pariante, Patricia A. Zunszain
    Neonatal meningitis mechanisms and implications in adult life / Vijayasree V. Giridharan, Lutiana R. Simoes, Pavani Sayana, Fabricia Petronilho, Rodrigo Hasbun, Tatiana Barichello
    Toxoplasma gondii infection as a risk factor for major psychiatric disorders : pre-clinical and clinical evidence / João Luís Vieira Monteiro de Barros, Aline Silva de Miranda, Antonio Lucio Teixeira
    A critical appraisal on the epidemiological evidence linking perinatal inflammation and risk of psychosis / Lia Snaders, Felicia Gabler, David De Lucena
    Maternal immune activation as a risk factor for schizophrenia : evidence from preclinical and clinical studies / Camila Nayane de Carvalho Lima, Tejaswini Doifode, Allan Colodel, Pavani Sayana, Vijayasree V. Giridharan, Danielle S. Macedo et al.
    Sex and age influence in the effects of perinatal immune activation in animals / Danielle S. Macedo, Manuel Alves Santos Júnior, Aline Santos Monte, Germana Silva Vasconcelos, Tatiane da Silva Araújo, Silvânia Maria Mendes Vasconcelos
    Maternal immune activation and neuropsychiatric disorders : the intricate puzzle of autism specturm disorder / Mellanie Fontes-Dutra, Bruna Rabelo, Júlio Santos-Terra, Iohanna
    Zika virus infection and potential mechanisms implicated in neuropsychiatric complications / Fernanda Martins Marim, Vidyleison Neves Camargos, Celso Martins Queiroz-Junior, Vivian Vasconcelos Costa
    The immune responses at the fetomaternal interface / Moisés Evandro Bauer, Priscila Vianna
    Placenta and cord blood as source of immune markers of offspring neurodevelopment and psychopathology / Ana Cristina Simões e Siva, Janaina Matos Moreira, Rafael Coelho Magalhães
    Cytokine model of cognition in relation to mental disorders during neurodevelopment / Célia Fourrier, Bernhard T. Baune.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC454 .P47 2020
    1
  • Print
    edited by Frederick C. Battaglia, Giacomo Meschia, E. J. Quilligan.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RG600 .P416
    2
  • Digital
    Fabio Triulzi, Cristina Baldoli, Cecilia Parazzini and Andrea Righini.
    Contents:
    Normal development.- Normal and abnormal commissures development, midline anomalies
    Posterior fossa malformations
    Malformations of cortical development
    Malformations of eye and orbit
    Vascular malformations
    Ventriculomegaly
    Infections
    Ischemic and hemorrhagic lesions
    Twin to twin transfusion syndrome. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Print
    Glenda Fregia Butnarescu.
    Contents:
    v.1 Reproductive health; v.2 Reproductive risk.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    RG951 .B88
    2
  • Digital
    [clinical] editors, Kathleen Rice Simpson, Patricia A. Creehan, Nancy O'Brien-Abel, Cheryl K. Roth, Annie J. Rohan.
    Summary: "The goal of the book is to provide useful clinical information to practicing perinatal nurses. A perinatal nurse assist women during their pregnancy educating about childbirth techniques, prenatal health, and what to expect throughout their pregnancy as well as how to bond and care for their baby after birth. Perinatal Nursing provides up-to-date information on best practices, standards, guidelines, etc. It is a comprehensive text for the standard of care"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Ovid 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Erin M. Denney-Koelsch, Denise Côté-Arsenault.
    Summary: This unique book is a first-of-its-kind resource that comprehensively covers each facet and challenge of providing optimal perinatal palliative care. Designed for a wide and multi-disciplinary audience, the subjects covered range from theoretical to the clinical and the practically relevant, and all chapters include case studies that provide real-world scenarios as additional teaching tools for the reader. Perinatal Palliative Care: A Clinical Guide is divided into four sections. Part One provides the foundation, covering an overview of the field, key theories that guide the practice of perinatal palliative care, and includes a discussion of perinatal ethics and parental experiences and needs upon receiving a life-limiting fetal diagnosis. Part Two delves further into practical clinical care, guiding readers through issues of obstetrical management, genetic counseling, neonatal pain management, non-pain symptom management, spiritual care, and perinatal bereavement care. Part Three discusses models of perinatal palliative care, closely examining evidence for different types of PPC programs: from hospital-based programs, to community-based care, and examines issues of interdisciplinary PPC care coordination, birth planning, and team support. Finally, Part Four concludes the book with a close look at special considerations in the field. In this section, racial, ethnic, and cultural perspectives and implications for PPC are discussed, along with lessons in how to provide PPC for a wide-range of clinical and other healthcare workers. The book closes with a look to the future of the field of perinatal palliative care. Thorough and practical, Perinatal Palliative Care: A Clinical Guide is an ideal resource for any healthcare practitioner working with these vulnerable patient populations, from palliative care specialists, to obstetricians, midwifes, neonatologists, hospice providers, nurses, doulas, social workers, chaplains, therapists, ethicists, and child life specialist s.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Foundations of Perinatal Palliative Care
    1. Introduction to Perinatal Palliative Care
    2. Theoretical Perspectives to Guide the Practice of Perinatal Palliative Care
    3. Perinatal Ethics
    4. Parental Experiences and Needs After Life-Limiting Fetal Diagnosis.-Part 2 Clinical Care for Families Facing Life-Limiting Fetal Conditions
    5. Obstetrical Management in Life-Limiting Fetal Conditions
    6.Genetics and Genetic Counseling in Perinatal Palliative Care.-7. The Neonatologists Role in Prenatal Counseling
    8. Neonatal Pain Management
    9. Non-Pain Symptom Management
    10. The Role of the Palliative Care Specialist in Perinatal Care
    11. Spiritual Care in the Perinatal Period
    12. Perinatal Bereavement Care
    Part 3 Models of Perinatal Palliative Care
    13. Structure and Development of Hospital-Based Perinatal Palliative Care Programs
    14. Community-Based Perinatal Palliative Care
    15. Interdisciplinary Perinatal Palliative Care Coordination, Birth Planning, and Support of the Team
    Part 4 Special Considerations for the Field of Perinatal Palliative Care
    16. Considerations in Unique Populations in Perinatal Palliative Care: From Culture, Race, Infertility, and Beyond
    17. Education in Perinatal Palliative Care for Nurses, Physicians, and Other Health Professionals
    18. Advancing the Field of Perinatal Palliative Care: Needs and Strategies.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Marta C. Antonelli, editor.
    Contents:
    Changes Induced by Prenatal Stress in Behavior and Brain Morphology. Can they be Prevented or Reversed?
    Sleep in Prenatally Restraint Stressed Rats, a Model of Anxious Depression
    Hormonal Modulation of Catecholaminergic Neurotransmission in a Prenatal Stress Model
    Involvement of Nitric Oxide, Neurotrophins and HPA Axis in Neurobehavioral Alterations Induced by Prenatal Stress
    Prenatal Stress and Adult Drug-seeking Behavior: Interactions with Genes and Relation to Non-drug Related Behavior
    A Self-medication Hypothesis for Increased Vulnerability to Drug Abuse in Prenatally Restraint Stressed Rats
    How Postnatal Insults May Program Development
    Studies in Animal Models
    Perinatal Positive and Negative Influences on the Early Neurobehavioral Reflex and Motor Development
    Short and Long-term Consequences of Perinatal Asphyxia: Looking for Neuroprotective Strategies
    Affective, Cognitive and Motivational Processes of Maternal Care
    Role of Sensory, Social and Hormonal Signals from the Mother on the Development of Offspring
    Retrospective Studies
    Prenatal Stress and its Effects on the Fetus and the Child; Possible Underlying Biological Mechanisms
    Using Natural Disasters to Study Prenatal Maternal Stress in Humans
    Early Life Influences on Cognition, Behavior and Emotion in Humans: From Birth to Age 20
    Perinatal Programming of Neurodevelopment. Epigenetic Mechanisms and the Prenatal Shaping of the Brain
    Epigenetic Mechanisms of Perinatal Programming: Translational Approaches from Rodent to Human and Back
    Perinatal Administration of Aromatase Inhibitors in Rodents as Animal Models of Human Male Homosexuality: Similarities and Differences
    Impact of the Perinatal Environment on Child Development: Implications for Prevention Policies
    Perinatal Programming Prevention Measures
    Pregnancy Outcomes after a Maternity Intervention for Stressful EmotionS (PROMISES): A Randomised Controlled Trial.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Faruk Uguz, Laura Orsolini, editors.
    Summary: This book focuses on recent advances in research and practical recommendations regarding the use of psychotropic drugs during pregnancy and lactation, two important social and psychological life events for women. In addition to the social context, including the addition of a new family member, many women experience the occurrence or recurrence of psychiatric disorders during the perinatal period. Psychiatric disorders during this period can have negative effects on the fetus, infant and other children in the family, and can result in functional impairment among mothers. The book offers a comprehensive overview of psychopharmacological treatments for nearly all specific psychiatric conditions (e.g. bipolar disorder, panic disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder) and includes chapters on clinical approaches to treating these disorders. As such, it will appeal to a wide readership, including psychiatrists, obstetricians, gynecologists and pediatricians.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Zhong Chao Han, Tsuneo A. Takahashi, Zhibo Han, Zongjin Li, editors.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive introduction to various types of perinatal stem cells. Given their unique regenerative abilities, stem cells offer a promising avenue in the treatment of degenerative diseases or injury. Currently, the limitations of postnatal cell sources and expanding efficiency may limit autologous stem cell therapies. Although embryonic stem cells (ESCs) and induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs) can be cultured indefinitely ex vivo, and can differentiate into three germ layers, ethical issues, the teratoma formation of ESCs and oncogenic risk of iPSCs are major obstacles to their clinical application. More recently, perinatal stem cells have been isolated from the umbilical cord, Wharton's Jelly, placenta, amniotic membrane and amniotic fluid, which are normally discarded as medical waste. This book, after describing perinatal stem cells in detail, introduces readers to the various types of perinatal stem cells, addressing their characterization, banking, quality control and stability. Importantly, it also reviews the clinical applications of perinatal stem cells to therapy of diseases. Accordingly, it offers a valuable resource for clinicians, researchers and graduate students alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Anthony Atala, Kyle J. Cetrulo, Rouzbeh R. Taghizadeh, Sean V. Murphy, Curtis L. Cetrulo, Jr.
    Summary: Perinatal Stem Cells provides researchers and clinicians with a comprehensive description of the current clinical and pre-clinical applications of stem cells derived from perinatal sources, such as amniotic fluid, placenta and placental membranes, the umbilical cord and Wharton's jelly. It's compiled by leading experts in the field, offering readers detailed insights into sources of perinatal stem cells and their potential for disease treatment. Therapeutic applications of perinatal stem cells include the treatment of in utero and pregnancy related diseases, cardiac disease, liver disease, pulmonary disease, inflammatory diseases, for hematopoietic regeneration, and for neural protection after stroke or traumatic brain injury. In addition, the rapid advance in clinical translation and commercialization of perinatal stem cell therapies is highlighted in a section on Clinical and Industry Perspective which provides insight into the new opportunities and challenges involved in this novel and exciting industry.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Renato Augusto Moreira de Sá, Eduardo Borges da Fonseca, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the latest evidence-based guidelines for perinatal management and is designed to help obstetricians and neonatologists minimize complications and offer patients the best possible care. Since 1960, there has been a significant increase in basic and clinical investigations on normal and pathological pregnancy in the developed world. This has provided insights into the physiopathology of pregnant women, fetuses and newborns and led to the development of new technologies, bringing about a new medical subspecialty: perinatal medicine. The book is divided into eight main sections: The first examines basic periconceptional care and discusses the ethical aspects of perinatology. The next section focuses on prenatal considerations, such as the nutritional aspects of gestation and puerperium, physical exercise during pregnancy, routine laboratory tests, prenatal care of multiple gestations and the role of the neonatologist in prenatal care. The third and fourth sections then explore fetal evaluation, and clinical intercurrences in pregnancy, respectively. The next section addresses pregnancy complications: prevention, diagnosis and management. The sixth section covers the basic aspects of congenital infections and the seventh examines labor and delivery aspects. Lastly, the final section includes chapters on neonatal assistance. Written by leading experts in obstetrics, neonatology, and perinatology, this thoroughly updated, comprehensive resource reflects the latest information in all areas, including genetics and imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Rolando Cimaz, editor.
    Summary: This book, written by very well-known opinion leaders in the field, covers all aspects of periodic and non -periodic fevers, and related disorders. The expression refers to several different auto-inflammatory diseases, showing similar symptoms-the primary symptom being a recurrent fever for an infectious cause cannot be found. The opening chapters give some historical hints, explain the genetic basis of the disease and provide insights into the pathogenesis derived from recent experimental studies and guides the reader through classification and nomenclature. A large part of the book is then devoted to a detailed description of the specific related diseases and their clinical presentations, the disease course, and potential complications in both pediatric and adult patients. The advice regarding treatment is based on the best currently available evidence in this constantly evolving area. The book is part of Springers series Rare Diseases of the Immune System, which presents recently acquired knowledge on pathogenesis, diagnosis, and therapy with the aim of promoting a more holistic approach to these conditions. Autoinflammatory diseases are hereditary disorders that are caused by single-gene defects in innate immune regulatory pathways and are characterized by a clinical and biological inflammatory syndrome in which there is limited, if any, evidence of autoimmunity. Periodic and Non-Periodic Fevers will be an invaluable source of up-to-date information for all practitioners involved in the care of patients with these disease.

    Contents:
    Preface
    I From Pathogenesis to Classification
    1 Historical notes on Autoinflammatory disorders
    2 Pathogenesis:Genetic basis, Innate Immunity, Inflammosomes, Cytokines
    3 Classification and nomenclature of Periodic and Non Periodic fevers
    II Specific diseases
    4 Mevalonate Kinase Deficiency (MKD)
    5 Tumor necrosis factor receptors associated syndrome (TRAPS)
    6 Cryopyrin-Associated Periodic Syndromes (CAPS)
    7 Pyogenic Arthritis, Pyoderma gangrenosum and Acne Syndrome (PAPA)
    8 Adenosine deaminase syndrome 2 (ADA2)
    9 Interferonopathies
    10 Inflammatory bone disease
    11 Amyloidosis
    12 Dermatologic autoinflammatory diseases
    13 Autoinflammatory diseases with immunodeficiency
    14 Periodic Fever, Aphthous Stomatitis, Pharyngitis, Adenitis Syndrome (PFAPA)
    15 Proteasome. related disorders
    16 Chronic Non-bacterial osteomyelitis
    17 Systemic JIA and adult onset Still disease
    18 Behcet disease
    19 Recurrent idiopathic pericarditis
    20 Schnitzler syndrome
    Subject Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Khadija Amine, Wafa El Kholti, Jamila Kissa.
    Summary: This book is an evidence-based guide to periodontal root coverage that provides up-to-date information on the etiology of gingival recession defects, prognostic factors relating to the defect, patient, or operator, and surgical techniques. Attention is drawn to critical elements in the execution of surgical procedures that can impact on outcomes. In order to ensure that the guidance reflects the highest level of evidence, the authors have undertaken an exhaustive literature search of the four main electronic databases (MEDLINE/PubMed, Cochrane Library, ScienceDirect, and EBSCOhost) for studies on root coverage, including randomized clinical trials, systematic reviews, meta-analyses, and network meta-analyses. The aim is to supply readers with a truly reliable source of knowledge that will help them to navigate this complex field, in which numerous surgical procedures have been described, with great variability in clinical and statistical outcomes. The book will be of value to all who wish to improve their understanding of gingival recession defects and the techniques to achieve root coverage that offer the best long-term results.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Contents; About the Authors; Part I;
    1: Gingival Recessions: Definition and Classification; 1.1 Definition; 1.2 Classifications; 1.2.1 Classification of Sullivan and Atkins [9]; 1.2.2 Classification of Miller [10]; 1.2.3 Classification of Cairo [11]; References;
    2: Etiology of Gingival Recessions; 2.1 Anatomical Factors; 2.1.1 Thin Gingival Biotype; 2.1.2 Abnormal Tooth Position; 2.1.3 High Frenum Attachment; 2.2 Pathological Factors; 2.2.1 Periodontal Disease; 2.2.2 Bacterial Plaque; 2.2.3 Dental Calculus; 2.3 Traumatic Factors; 2.3.1 Toothbrushing; 2.3.2 Flossing Trauma; 2.4 Iatrogenic Factors; 2.4.1 Orthodontic Movement; 2.4.2 Prosthetic and Restorative Treatment; References;
    3: Summary; Part II;
    4: Prognostic Factors: Defect Related Factors; 4.1 Recession Classification; 4.2 Recession Size; 4.3 Adjacent Papilla Dimension; 4.4 Keratinized Tissue; 4.5 Noncarious Cervical Lesions (NCCLs); 4.6 Tooth Malposition and Tooth Location; References;
    5: Prognostic Factors: Patient Related Factors; 5.1 Plaque Control; 5.2 Toothbrushing; 5.3 Tobacco Smoking; References;
    6: Prognostic Factors: Operator-Related Factors; References;
    7: SummaryPart III;
    8: Surgical Procedures; 8.1 Free Gingival Graft (FGG); 8.2 Coronally Advanced Flap (CAF); 8.2.1 Coronally Advanced Flap (CAF) for the Management of Isolated Gingival Recession Defects; 8.2.2 Coronally Advanced Flap (CAF) for the Management of Multiple Gingival Recession Defects; 8.3 Laterally Positioned Flap (LPF); 8.4 Double Papilla Flap (DPF); 8.5 Tunnel Technique; 8.6 Summary; References;
    9: Critical Factors in Execution; 9.1 Root Conditioning; 9.2 Flap Tension/Stability; 9.3 Microsurgical Approach; 9.4 Summary; References.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Julien Santi-Rocca, editor.
    Summary: Periodontitis is a disease that affects more than half the adult population in the world. Treatment is often based on ancient recommendations consisting in mechanically removing material from damaged zones. However, novel therapeutic management strategies exist, from prevention to efficient treatment, and regeneration. The need of integrative approaches to circumvent this worldwide pledge can be achieved through: A better understanding of this complex disease by promoting scientific research and a comprehensive multidisciplinary approach, including epidemiology, microbiology, immunology, physiology, therapeutics, psychology, etc. A better outreach by promoting vulgarization and recommendations for health professionals. A better information of the empowered patients, leading them to consider prevention and to take part in their therapeutic course. The book "Periodontitis: Advances in Experimental Research" includes a timely collection of chapters covering all the fields of research about periodontitis, consisting in concise reviews by the best specialists themselves and with clinical perspectives for periodontitis. Recent technological advances have allowed to explore shadowed areas of periodontology. The book "Periodontitis: Advances in Experimental Research" is a unique occasion to set a milestone for a more integrated field of periodontitis, with a broad scientific, medical, and public audience thanks to dedicated sections in each chapter: Abstract and main body (scientific audience and expert clinicians) Highlights (scientific audience and clinicians) Impact for Practice (clinicians and economical/political decision makers) Summary for Patients (patients and economical/political decision makers).

    Contents:
    Preface
    Chapter1. Advances in experimental research about periodontitis: lessons from the past, ideas for the future (Julien Santi-Rocca)
    Part I: Periodontal microbiota
    Chapter 2. Microbiota in Periodontitis: advances in the omic era (Shao Bing Fong, Emile Boyer, Martine Bonnaure-Mallet, Vincent Meuric)
    Chapter 3. Aggregatibacter actinomycetemcomitans: from basic to advanced research (Abdelhadi Hbibi, Amal Bouziane, Badiaa Lyoussi, Mimoun Zouhdi, Driss Benazza)
    Chapter 4. Meta-analyses on the Periodontal Archaeome (Jéssica Alves de Cena, Yuri Silvestre-Barbosa, Aline Belmok, Cristine Miron Stefani, Cynthia Maria Kyaw, Nailê Damé-Teixeira)
    Chapter 5. Parasites in periodontal health and disease: a systematic review and meta-analysis (David Felipe Martin-Garcia, Malik Sallam, Gabriela Garcia, Julien Santi-Rocca)
    Chapter 6. Fungi - a component of the oral microbiome involved in periodontal diseases (Justyna Karkowska-Kuleta, Dorota Satala, Magdalena Smolarz, Marcin Zawrotniak, Maria Rapala-Kozik)
    Chapter 7. Herpesviruses in periodontitis: An umbrella review (Aleksandar Jakovljevic, Miroslav Andric, Jelena Jacimovic, Jelena Milasin, Javier Enrique Botero)
    Part II: Periodontitis pathophysiology
    Chapter 8. Recent updates on microbial biofilms in periodontitis: an analysis of in vitro biofilm models (Maick Meneguzzo Prado, Nathalia Figueiredo, Andréa Pimenta, Tamires Szeremeske Miranda, Magda Feres, Luciene Cristina Figueiredo, Josiane de Almeida, Bruno Bueno-Silva)
    Chapter 9. Update on B cell response in periodontitis (Julien Demoersman, Jacques Olivier Pers)
    Chapter 10. Polarization profiles of T lymphocytes and macrophages responses in periodontitis (Franco Cavalla, Marcela Hernández)
    Chapter 11. Complementary experimental methods in genetics open up new avenues of research to elucidate the pathogenesis of periodontitis (Arne S. Schaefer)
    Part III: Periodontitis-associated conditions
    Chapter 12. Update on the bidirectional link between diabetes and periodontitis (Leila Salhi, Michèle Reners)
    Chapter 13. Periodontitis as a risk factor for Alzheimer's disease: the experimental journey so far, with hope of therapy (Alice Harding, Shalini Kanagasingam, Richard Welbury, Sim K. Singhrao)
    Chapter 14. Cardiovascular diseases and periodontitis (Peter Riis Hansen, Palle Holmstrup)
    Part IV: Therapeutic management of periodontitis
    Chapter 15. Update on the role of cytokines as oral biomarkers in the diagnosis of periodontitis (Triana Blanco-Pintos, Alba Regueira-Iglesias, Carlos Balsa-Castro, Inmaculada Tomás)
    Chapter 16. Non-surgical periodontal treatment: SRP and innovative therapeutic approaches (Alexia Vinel, Antoine Al Halabi, Sébastien Roumi, Hélène Le Neindre, Pierre Millavet, Marion Simon, Constance Cuny, Jean-Sébastien Barthet, Pierre Barthet, Sara Laurencin-Dalicieux)
    Chapter 17. Update on the roles of oral hygiene and plaque control on periodontal disease (Leila Salhi, Bruno De Carvalho, Michèle Reners)
    Chapter 18. Multi-photonic adjunctive therapy for the management of periodontitis: recent advances and new treatment approach (Marco Giannelli, Daniele Bani)
    Chapter 19. Probiotics during the therapeutic management of periodontitis (Flavia Furlaneto, Karin Hitomi Ishikawa, Michel Reis Messora, Marcia P A Mayer)
    Chapter 20. Periodontal cell therapy: a systematic review and meta-analysis (Antoine Dubuc, Valérie Planat-Bénard, Mathieu Marty, Paul Monsarrat, Philippe Kémoun)
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Richard Palmer, Peter Floyd, editors.
    Summary: This book guides through all essentials in the field of periodontology including the pathology, diagnosis, and treatment of the most common periodontal conditions. Now in its 4th edition, this fully updated version marks the 25th anniversary of the first edition. It discusses the developments in classification while maintaining a no-nonsense logical approach to what many people find a complex subject. The book will help clinicians acquire and maintain the knowledge and skill to treat the many patients encountered in day-to-day practice. It covers the scientific background of periodontal-systemic disease interactions, the clinical application of periodontal surgery and the management of multi-rooted teeth. With newly incorporated supplementary information, the book will be a helpful source for general dentist, dental students, dental hygienists and even for postgraduate students.

    Contents:
    1. Periodontal examination and screening
    2. Pathology of periodontal disease
    3. Periodontal disease and systemic health
    4. Diagnosis, prognosis and treatment planning
    5. Effective communication with patients to improve motivation
    6. Non-surgical treatment and supportive periodontal care
    7. Periodontal surgery
    8. Treatment of multi-rooted teeth
    9. Reconstructive periodontal treatment
    10. Multidisciplinary integrated treatment
    11. Diagnosis and management of acute conditions
    12. Patient presentations.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Carin A. Hagberg, Vijaya N. R. Gottumukkala, Bernhard J. Riedel, Joseph L. Nates, Donal J. Buggy.
    Summary: More than 80% of patients with cancer will need the services of anesthesiology and perioperative medicine, intensive care medicine, and pain management specialists during their cancer journey for diagnostic, therapeutic, and symptom management needs, as well as for the management of recurrent disease, secondary cancers, and ongoing non-oncologic surgical needs during survivorship. Perioperative Care of the Cancer Patient is today's most up-to-date, authoritative, comprehensive reference on the acute care of surgical patients with cancer, from a team of international experts in this emerging and dynamic specialty-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    edited by Sheila Ryan Barnett, Sara E. Neves.
    Summary: "Older patients carry some of the highest risks of suffering an adverse event or death following anesthesia and surgery. They are inherently vulnerable, presenting with numerous comorbidities and reduced physiological reserve, requiring 'gero-centric' perioperative care for everything from routine eye surgery to major cardiac surgeries. Dementia, frailty, and the need for palliative care and pain management for the orthopedic patient are important areas requiring special consideration in this group. This book provides a general overview of these topics for those healthcare providers who may not have extensive knowledge of this patient population, while at the same time offering practical tips for the more experienced clinician. Chapters cover the spectrum of perioperative care including preoperative management of comorbid conditions, intraoperative anesthetic management, postoperative pain control, and a primer on advanced directive discussions. This book is appropriate not only for anesthesiologists but for any perioperative physician caring for the older patient"--Publisher's description.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    C. Ronald MacKenzie, Charles N. Cornell, Stavros G. Memtsoudis, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I: Preoperative Conditions
    General Principles and Practices of Perioperative Medicine
    The Prevalence of Disabling Musculoskeletal Conditions and the Demand for Orthopedic Surgery in the 21st Century
    The Connective Diseases: The Rheumatologist's Perspective
    The Pathophysiologic Events of Total Joint Replacement Surgery
    Part II: Anesthesiological Management
    Anesthesiology in the Orthopedic Patient
    Pediatric Anesthesia for Orthopedic Surgery
    Anesthetic Techniques and Their Clinical Application for Specific Orthopedic Procedures
    The Role of the Post-Anesthesia Care Unit in the Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient
    Postoperative Pain Management in the Orthopedic Setting
    Part III: Medical Management in Specific Clinical Settings
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Connective Tissue Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Cardiac Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Chronic Pulmonary Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Renal Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Diabetes Mellitus
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Gastrointestinal and Liver Issues
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Neurological Disease
    Perioperative Care of the Orthopedic Patient with Psychiatric Disease
    Part IV: Specific Perioperative Problems in Orthopedic Surgery
    Perioperative Care of the Elderly Orthopedic Patient
    Venous Thromboembolism and Orthopedic Surgery
    Coagulation Disorders and Orthopedic Surgery
    Perioperative Nutrition in the Orthopedic Surgical Patient
    Infection and Perioperative Orthopedic Care
    Risk and Benefits of Bilateral Total Knee Replacement Surgery
    Compartment Syndrome and Orthopedic Surgery: Diagnosis and Management
    Bone Health and Orthopedic Surgery
    Perioperative Care of theComplex Spine and Scoliosis SurgeryPatient
    Management of Blood Products in Orthopedic Surgery
    Part V: Role of Allied Services
    Professional Nursing Practice in the Orthopedic Care Setting
    The Approach to Physical Therapy Following Orthopedic Reconstructive Surgery
    Quality Improvement in the Perioperative Orthopedic Setting
    Introduction of Clinical Pathways in Orthopedic Surgical Care: The Experience of the Hospital for Special Surgery
    Ethical Considerations in Perioperative Orthopedic Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    C. Ronald MacKenzie, Charles N. Cornell, Stavros G. Memtsoudis, editors.
    Summary: References -- 2: Perioperative Risk Models -- Introduction -- General Risk Assessment Models -- Cardiac Risk Assessment Tools -- Pulmonary Risk Assessment Tools -- Hepatic Risk Assessment Tools -- Venous Thromboembolism Risk Assessment Tools -- Renal/Genitourinary Risk Assessment Tools -- Additional Models -- Discussion and Summary -- Case Study -- How Does One Approach the Perioperative Risk Assessment of Such a Patient? -- References -- 3: The Prevalence of Disabling Musculoskeletal Conditions and the Demand for Orthopedic Surgery in the Twenty-First Century -- Introduction This is a comprehensive, multidisciplinary manual providing preoperative considerations, postoperative complications, and guidelines for the anesthetic and medical management of patients undergoing orthopedic surgery. The editors are leaders in their field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword to the Second Edition
    Preface to the Second Edition
    Preface to the First Edition
    Contents
    Contributors
    Part I: Preoperative Considerations
    1: General Principles and Practices of Perioperative Medicine
    Introduction
    Preoperative Consultation
    Goals of the Preoperative Medical Consultation
    Identification of Conditions that Affect Postoperative Outcome
    Optimization of Conditions that May Affect Postoperative Outcome
    The Assessment of Perioperative Risk
    Patient Education and Preventive Practices
    Efficacy of Preoperative Consultation Incidence of Degenerative Disorders of the Spine
    Incidence of Spine Procedures
    Incidence of Complications After Spine Surgery
    Definition and Classification of Complications
    Study Methodology
    Surgeon-Related Factors
    Procedure-Related Factors
    Patient-Related Factors
    Prevalence of Osteoarthritis and Related Reconstructive Surgeries of the Hip and Knee
    The Incidence of Complications After Total Knee and Total Hip Arthroplasty
    General Trends
    Specific Complications: Medical
    Infection
    Dislocation
    Venous Thromboembolism
    Periprosthetic Fractures
    Summary Effects in Other Organ Systems
    The Role of Embolic Load
    The Role of Cement
    The Role of Fat Embolization: The Fat Embolism Syndrome
    The Pathophysiology of Spine Fusion Surgery
    Timing of Complications
    Interventions
    Summary
    Case Study
    References
    Part II: Anesthesiologic Management
    6: Anesthesia in the Orthopedic Patient
    Introduction
    The Orthopedic Population
    Advanced Age
    Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Osteoarthritis
    Positioning
    Regional Anesthesia
    Mortality
    Postoperative Analgesia and Rehabilitation
    Respiratory Complications
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ehab Farag, Andrea Kurz, editors.
    Summary: This book presents the most recent evidence-based facts on perioperative fluid management and discusses fluid management from basic sciences to clinical applications and the patientsℓ́ℓ outcomes. Recent advances in understanding the Revised Starling principle with new concepts in tissue perfusion and the most recent techniques of perioperative goal directed fluid management are described. The endothelial glycocalyx functions and the influence of fluid management on its integrity are covered in detail; moreover, the techniques for its protection are also discussed. The dilemma of perioperative use of hydroxyethyl starch solutions and the resurgence of interest in using human albumin as an alternative colloid is explored. The problems of using unbuffered solutions during the perioperative period and comparison between restrictive versus liberal fluid management are discussed in full. Perioperative Fluid Management will be of interest to anesthesiologists and also intensivists.

    Contents:
    PART I. FUNDAMENTALS OF FLUID MANAGEMENT
    1. A History of Fluid Management / Elizabeth A. M. Frost
    2. The Revised Starling Principle and Its Relevance to Perioperative Fluid Management / C. Charles Michel , Kenton P. Arkill , and FitzRoy E. Curry
    3. The Functions of Endothelial Glycocalyx and Their Effects on Patient Outcomes During the Perioperative Period. A Review of Current Methods to Evaluate Structure-Function Relations in the Glycocalyx in Both Basic Research and Clinical Settings / FitzRoy E. Curry , Kenton P. Arkill , and C. Charles Michel
    4. Techniques for Goal-Directed Fluid Management / Paul E. Marik
    5. The Perioperative Use of Echocardiography for Fluid Management / Maged Argalious
    6. Microcirculatory Blood Flow as a New Tool for Perioperative Fluid Management / Daniel De Backer
    7. Mean Systemic Filling Pressure Is an Old Concept but a New Tool for Fluid Management / Hollmann D. Aya and Maurizio Cecconi
    8. Restricted or Liberal Fluid Therapy / Thomas E. Woodcock
    9. The Perioperative Use of Albumin / Ehab Farag and Zeyd Y. Ebrahim
    10. The Dilemma for Using Hydroxyethyl Starch Solutions for Perioperative Fluid Management / Christiane S. Hartog and Konrad Reinhart
    11. Balanced Versus Unbalanced Salt Solutions in the Perioperative Period / Sheldon Magder
    12.Positive Fluid Balance and Patients' Outcomes / John Danziger
    13. Fluid Management and Its Role in Enhanced Recovery / Andrew F. Cumpstey , Michael P. W. Grocott , and Michael (Monty) G. Mythen
    PART II. CASE SCENARIOS MANAGEMENT DURING COLORECTAL, ORTHOPEDIC, AND SPINE CASES
    14. Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management in Major Orthopedic Surgery / Wael Ali Sakr Esa
    15. Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management for Major Colorectal Surgery / Kamal Maheshwari
    16. Case Scenario for Fluid Therapy in Septic Shock / William Phillips
    17. Case Scenario for Fluid Management in Liver Resection / Maged Argalious and Harendra Arora
    18. Case Scenario for Fluid Management During Major Spine Surgery / Verna L. Baughman
    19. Case Scenario for Fluid Management After Subarachnoid Hemorrhage in the Neuro- intensive Care Unit / Jamil R. Dibu and Edward M. Manno.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Ehab Farag, Andrea Kurz, Christopher Troianos, editors.
    Summary: This revised and expanded second edition presents the most recent evidence-based facts on perioperative fluid management and discusses fluid management from basic sciences to clinical applications and the patients' outcomes. Recent advances in understanding the Revised Starling principle with new concepts in tissue perfusion and the most recent techniques of perioperative goal directed fluid management are described. The endothelial glycocalyx functions and the influence of fluid management on its integrity are covered in detail; moreover, the techniques for its protection are also discussed. The dilemma of perioperative use of hydroxyethyl starch solutions and the resurgence of interest in using human albumin as an alternative colloid is explored. The problems of using unbuffered solutions during the perioperative period and comparison between restrictive versus liberal fluid management are discussed in full. Lastly, case scenarios for every possible clinical situation describe in full the most up-to-date fluid management for the corresponding clinical problem. Perioperative Fluid Management, Second Edition is of interest to anesthesiologists and also intensivists.

    Contents:
    Part I Fundamentals of Fluid Management
    A History of Fluid Management
    The Revised Starling Principle and Its Relevance to Perioperative Fluid Management
    The Functions of Endothelial Glycocalyx and Their Effects on Patient Outcomes During the Perioperative Period. A Review of Current Methods to Evaluate Structure-Function Relations in the Glycocalyx in Both Basic Research and Clinical Settings
    Techniques for Goal-Directed Fluid Management
    The Perioperative Use of Echocardiography for Fluid Management
    Microcirculatory Blood Flow as a New Tool for Perioperative Fluid Management
    Mean Systemic Filling Pressure Is an Old Concept but a New Tool for Fluid Management
    Restricted or Liberal Fluid Therapy
    The Perioperative Use of Albumin
    The Use of Albumin in Intensive Care Unit
    The Dilemma for Using Hydroxyethyl Starch Solutions for Perioperative Fluid Management
    Balanced Versus Unbalanced Salt Solutions in the Perioperative Period
    Positive Fluid Balance and Patients' Outcomes
    Fluid Management and Its Role in Enhanced Recovery
    Venous Circulation: a New Concept in Fluid Management
    Pathophysiology of Fluid Management in Neonate and Pediatric Patient
    Zero Fluid Balance versus Liberal Fluid Management. pro and Con
    Pathophysiology of perioperative Fluid Management from Surgeon Point of View
    Part II FluidManagement Case Scenarios
    Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management in Major Orthopedic Surgery
    Case Scenario for Perioperative Fluid Management for Major Colorectal Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Therapy in Septic Shock
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management in Liver Resection
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management During Major Spine Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management After Subarachnoid Hemorrhage in the Neuro- intensive Care Unit
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management during Open Heart Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management during Thoracic Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management during Major Vascular Surgery
    Case Scenario for Fluid Management for Patients in Cardiothoracic Intensive Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Carlo Enrique Marcucci, Patrick Schoettker, editors.
    Summary: All anesthesiologists are confronted with patients who show bleeding disorders, whether congenital, acquired, or pharmacologically induced. Although many studies, meta-analyses, guidelines, and textbooks have been published on the subject, they mostly cover specific aspects or require a thorough knowledge of hemostasis. The goal of this book is to provide the anesthetist with an overview of hemostasis and the mechanisms underlying bleeding and coagulation in general and to assist in the understanding of specific coagulation disorders as they may occur in the various anesthetic subspecialties. It is hoped that, through the provision of practical information and tools, the book will help residents and trained anesthetists to manage one of the most frustrating challenges that they face: the bleeding patient. A full understanding of coagulation requires a lifelong career, and this book is not intended to replace the consulting hematologist, whose expert opinion should always be sought. The available procoagulant blood products and drugs all have potentially dangerous side-effects; furthermore, in bleeding disorders pitfalls are frequent and a misdiagnosis can have potentially catastrophic consequences. The aim of the editors is thus instead to enhance the collaboration between the disciplines of Anesthesiology and Hematology.

    Contents:
    Part I: Pre-operative haemostasis: Cell based coagulation model
    Laboratory testing of hemostasis
    Viscoelastic tests of hemostasis
    Point of care platelet function tests
    Hemostasis assessment and evaluation
    Hereditary coagulopathies
    Acquired coagulopathies
    Drug induced
    Antiplatelet drugs
    Intravenous fluids and coagulation
    Split blood products
    Isolated coagulation products
    Pro-coagulant drugs
    Patient blood management. Part II: Per-operative haemostasis: In cardiac surgery
    In Hepatic Surgery
    In Pediatric Surgery
    In Obstetrics Surgery
    In Trauma
    In Neurosurgery
    In Orthopedic Surgery
    In Neuraxial and Peripheral Nerve blocks. Part III: Post-Operative: Intensive Care
    Anti-Coagulation. Part IV: Economic aspects and organization.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Charuhas V. Thakar, Chirag R. Parikh, editors.
    Summary: The kidneys participate in all vital processes of the body to maintain overall homeostasis and health. When kidneys are injured during surgical interventions, metabolic and hemodynamic control is disrupted, leading to dysfunction associated with greater mortality, length of hospital stay, and cost. Peri-operative Kidney Injury presents the epidemiology, risk factors, diagnosis, treatment, and outcomes associated with kidney injury during the peri-operative period. Concepts and principles of care to prevent kidney complications during surgical procedures are provided to equip health care professionals along with strategies to manage acute kidney injury and associated challenges when they occur. Chapters detail diverse surgical settings, ranging from the more common, such as abdominal, cardiac, and vascular surgeries, to the intricately complex, including the use of the left ventricular assist device and organ transplants. This practical and comprehensive text blends the evidence-based standards of care with cutting edge advances in the field, while also providing the reader with a peek into innovations on the horizon.

    Contents:
    Part I Peri-operative AKI: Overview and Approach
    1 Incidence, Trends and Diagnosis of Peri-operative AKI
    2 Serious peri-operative complications: Hospital Medicine Perspectives
    3 Role of Novel Kidney Injury Biomarkers in Perioperative AKI
    4 Clinical Pearls: Renal Replacement Therapy for AKI in the Post-operative Period.- 5 Clinical Pearls: Non-dialytic Management of Kidney Complications in the Post-operative Period
    6 Intra-Operative Considerations to Prevent Post-Operative AKI
    Part II Cardiac and Vascular Surgery
    7 AKI after Cardiac Surgery in Adults.- 8 AKI after Cardiovascular Surgery in Children
    9 AKI in the Era of Ventricular Assist Devices.- 10 Kidney Injury after Vascular Surgery.- Part III Abdominal and Urologic Surgery.- 11 AKI after Major Abdominal Surgery.- 12 Kidney Injury in Abdominal Compartment Syndrome.- 13 Kidney Function and Injury after Nephrectomy for Kidney Cancer
    Part IV Transplant Surgery
    14 The Kidney in Non-Renal Solid Organ Transplantation
    15 Acute Allograft Injury After Kidney Transplantation
    Part V Special Topics in Peri-operative AKI.- 16 Trauma and Acute Kidney Injury
    17 Fluid-Electrolyte Imbalances and Extra-Corporeal Therapy in the Neurosurgical Setting
    18 Nutrition in Peri-operative Patients with Kidney Failure.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Karen Stuart-Smith, editor.
    Contents:
    Perioperative medicine: defining the anaesthesiologist's role in shaping perioperative outcomes
    Prehabilitation
    Impact of co-morbidities, physiological status and age on survival
    Transthoracic echocardiography in the preoperative clinic
    Defining postoperative quality of recovery
    Enhanced recovery for colorectal surgery
    Perioperative beta-blockade: the pros and cons. The story of beta-blockade and cardiac protection
    Perioperative management of the diabetic patient
    Perioperative management of non-diabetic patients with hyperglycaemia (stress-induced hyperglycaemia)
    Postoperative Pulmonary Complications
    Haemostatic resuscitation for perioperative bleeding
    Fluid therapy in trauma
    Role of multimodal monitoring in the perioperative period: improving outcomes in high-risk surgical patients
    Can perioperative interventions during cancer surgery affect recurrence or metastasis?
    Transverse abdominis plane block: evolution and current understanding
    Future ultrasound technologies for the perioperative physician
    Lung ultrasound in anaesthesia and critical care medicine
    The acute pain team
    The transition of acute post-operative pain to acute persistent pain to chronic pain: assessing and managing the risks.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mark F. Newman, Lee A. Fleisher, Clifford Ko, Michael (Monty) Mythen.
    Summary: Based on the most current evidence and best practices, Perioperative Medicine: Managing for Outcome, 2nd Edition, is an easy-to-follow, authoritative guide to achieving optimal outcomes in perioperative care. Written and edited by recognized authorities in anesthesiology and surgical critical care, this fully updated edition helps you think critically about complex, long-term issues surrounding the care of the surgical patient, providing decision trees that define strategies to enhance the medical outcome of care. Focuses on what anesthesiologists, surgeons, and intensivists need to know in order to improve outcomes through evidence- and outcome-based approaches. Provides practical guidance on potential risks to all major organ systems, the etiology of particular organ dysfunctions, preoperative and intraoperative risk factors, and perioperative protection strategies to minimize potential complications. Features a consistent chapter format - with even more color-coded algorithms, summary tables, and boxes - that enables you to quickly explore and determine the best management approaches. Includes six all-new chapters: Perioperative Fluid Management; Delirium and POCD; Role of Palliative Care/ICU; Value-Based Care: The UK Model; CFO Perspective on Value; Hospital to Home (Perioperative Transitions of Care) Discusses timely topics such as quality improvement, pay-for-performance, preexisting disease and comorbid conditions in anesthesiology, and the team-based model of care. Features two new editors, surgeon Clifford Ko, MD, and Perioperative Summit leader, Michael (Monty) Mythen, MD. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2022
  • Digital
    [editors] Molly Blackley Jackson, Somnath Mookherjee, Nason P. Hamlin.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Molly Blackley Jackson, Ronald Huang, Elizabeth Kaplan, Somnath Mookherjee, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive third edition provides robust support to clinicians providing perioperative care for patients. Patients with a range of medical conditions undergo surgeries of varying levels of risk, and the evolving field of consult medicine aims to address their needs, whether pre- or post-surgery. This book offers evidence and experience-based information, advice, and guidelines on all aspects of perioperative medicine. Care around surgeries in many major clinical areas are included, including cardiology, pulmonology, gastroenterology, rheumatology, endocrinology and so on. This new edition has been updated throughout with the latest literature, more visual content (tables and algorithms), and eleven new chapters on topics such as: chronic pain, congestive heart failure, hormone therapy and transgender patients, and postoperative hypoxemia. This new edition focuses on high value care in order to improve outcomes, including minimizing complications and readmissions. It also provides streamlined key points for caring for patients with medical diagnoses that may be especially complicated around surgery. This resource is invaluable for practicing physicians (including medical consultants, surgeons, and anesthesiologists) and other professionals who aim to optimize care of surgical patients.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    The Preoperative Evaluation
    Perioperative Medication Management
    Anesthesia Fundamentals
    Cardiovascular Risk Stratification
    Ischemic Heart Disease
    Congestive Heart Failure
    Atrial Fibrillation
    Hypertension
    Valvular Heart Disease
    Implantable Cardiac Devices
    Diabetes
    Stress Dose Steroids
    Thyroid Disease
    Hormone Therapy and Transgender Patients
    Liver Disease
    Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Chronic Anticoagulation
    Disorders of Hemostasis
    Thrombophilias
    Thrombocytopenia
    Anemia
    Sickle Cell Disease
    Venous Thromboembolic Disease
    Cerebrovascular Disease
    Epilepsy and Seizure Disorders
    Parkinsons Disease
    Spinal Cord Injury
    Chronic Pain
    Pulmonary Risk Assessment and Management
    Asthma and COPD
    Obstructive Sleep Apnea / Obesity Hypoventilation Syndrome
    Pulmonary Hypertension
    Special Topics in Lung Disease: Restrictive, Myesthenia Gravis
    Chronic Kidney Disease
    Acute Kidney Injury
    Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
    Gout and Pseudogout
    Decision-Making Capacity
    Elderly Patients and Frailty
    Nutrition
    Patients with Solid Organ Transplant
    Substance Use and Dependence
    Postoperative Evaluation and Care
    Postoperative Fever
    Postoperative Delirium
    Postoperative Ileus
    Postoperative Hypoxemia
    Postoperative Tachycardia
    Postoperative Emergencies
    Postoperative Electrolyte Abnormalities
    Acute Pain Management Pearls
    Surgical Procedures Overview.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Marinella Astuto, Pablo M. Ingelmo, editors.
    Contents:
    Introduction
    Perioperative medicine and anesthesia
    PART I Perioperative care before surgery
    Preoperative evaluation
    Preoperative preparation
    Prehospital care and transport
    PART II Perioperative care during surgery
    Perioperative care in day hospital surgery
    Perioperative care in remote locations
    Perioperative care in orthopedic surgery
    Perioperative care of the neurosurgical patient
    Perioperative care in thoracic surgery
    Perioperative care in abdominal and urological surgery
    PART III Perioperative care in special situations and conditions
    Perioperative care of children with difficult airway
    Perioperative care of children with neuromuscular disease
    Perioperative care of children with metabolic disease
    Perioperative care in children with congenital heart disease
    Perioperative care of children with OSA
    Perioperative care of children with trauma
    Perioperative care of children with cancer
    Perioperative care of children with cerebral palsy and behavioural problems
    PART IV Important techniques for perioperative care
    Vascular and nonvascular access in the perioperative period
    US-guided nerve targets
    Noninvasive hemodynamic and respiratory monitoring during the perioperative period
    PART V. Early and long term consequences of anesthesia and surgery
    Negative behavior after surgery
    Acute pain prevention and control
    How to protect the infant brain during surgery
    Can anesthesia induce apoptosis in children?- Long-term consequences of anesthesia and surgery on the infant brain
    Prevention of chronic postsurgical pain.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Roderic G. Eckenhoff, Niccolò Terrando.
    Summary: "The occurrence of personality, sensory and cognitive disturbances after anesthesia and surgery has been recognized for many decades, although the magnitude, duration and causes have remained a matter of debate. Certainly the transient occurrence of delirium after surgery is well known, and the various forms are reviewed here by Drs. Proekt, Gabbard, Sieber and Oh. The more durable forms of cognitive impairment after surgery have been more enigmatic. In the past two decades, the application of strict neurocognitive testing by research groups have definitively documented impairments lasting from weeks to months, and thus a term was coined; post-operative cognitive dysfunction" or POCD, a "syndrome" reviewed in depth here by Drs. Nelli, Culley and Crosby. Complicating the analysis of POCD has been the fact that a large number of patients may actually have cognitive improvement as a result of enhanced mobility after orthopedic surgery or reduced pain perhaps following cancer resection. Thus, post-operative cognitive improvement (POCI) is reviewed here by Drs. Arias, Sibille and Price Completing the first section of this book is the more contentious, but critically important topic of whether anesthesia and surgery result in a persistent cognitive disorder, such as mild cognitive impairment or dementia, an area discussed in detail by Drs. Schenning and Hogan"--Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    Peter F. Svider, Anna A. Pashkova, Andrew P. Johnson, editors.
    Summary: This comprehensive text is an easy-to-access reference that provides a foundation for understanding contemporary evidence-based practices relating to pain management in the perioperative setting. Chapters review the exponential increase in prescription drug abuse associated with the "opioid epidemic"; surgeons' important role in managing perioperative and chronic pain in a variety of practice settings; the role of quality improvement in patient safety initiatives; inadequate opioid prescribing education (OPE) in surgical training programs; and literature demonstrating the existence of evidence-based alternatives to opioids. Written and edited by experts in the field of anesthesiology and pain medicine, Perioperative Pain Control: Tools for Surgeons is a practical resource for surgical trainees and surgeons of all specialties including general surgery, thoracic surgery, otolaryngology, plastic surgery, urology, gynecology, vascular surgery, neurosurgery, and orthopedic surgery.

    Contents:
    Perioperative Pain Control: Practical Tools for Surgeons
    The Surgeon's Role in the Opioid Epidemic
    Pain Prescription Legislation: What You Need to Know as the Surgeon
    Opioid Prescribing Education in Surgical Training (Follow COP)
    Pre-operative Optimization
    Non-Opioid Adjuncts and Alternatives
    Post-Operative Analgesia for the Chronic Pain Patient
    Non-Enteral Pain Management
    Perioperative Annalgesia in General Abdominal, Vascular, and Thoracic Surgery
    Perioperative Analgesia for Thyroid and Parathyroid Surgery
    Evidence-Based Perioperative Analgesia for Otolaryngology-Head and Neck Surgery
    Perioperative Analgesia in Cranial and Skull Base Surgery
    Perioperative Analgesia for Orthopedic and Spine Surgery
    Evidence-Based Perioperative Analgesia for Urologic Surgery
    Obstetrics and Gynecology
    Perioperative Analgesia and Pain Management in Pediatric Patients
    Approaches to Perioperative Pain Management in the Plastic Surgical Patient. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Carol J. Peden, Lee A. Fleisher, Michael Englesbe.
    Summary: "Quality improvement (QI) principles are increasingly important in every area of today's healthcare, encompassing efforts to make healthcare delivery safer, more effective, patient-centered, timely, equitable, and efficient. Perioperative Quality Improvement provides up-to-date, easy-to-read guidance for perioperative clinicians on this critical topic. Each chapter covers a pertinent area of QI in the perioperative setting, focusing on both concepts and implementation. Written and edited by key international opinion leaders in the field, this text is a relevant, concise resource for anesthesiologists, surgeons, nurse anesthetists, and hospitalists--anyone involved in perioperative medicine regardless of specialty area"-- publisher's description.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    [edited by] David L. Reich, Gregory W. Fischer.
    Contents:
    Principles and the normal heart
    Getting started with echocardiography: the twenty standard views
    Principles and physics: principles of ultrasound
    Principles and physics: principles of Doppler ultrasound
    Principles and physics: equations to remember (the Bernoulli equation, velocity-time integrals, and the continuity equation)
    Principles and physics: transducer characteristics
    Principles and physics: imaging artifacts and pitfalls
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: components of the complete examination
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: epiaortic imaging
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: three-dimensional views: replicating the surgeon's view
    Normal anatomy and flow during the complete examination: extracardiac anatomy
    Quantitative and semiquantitative echocardiography: dimensions and flows
    Quantitative and semiquantitative echocardiography: ventricular and valvular physiology
    Understanding how transesophageal echocardiography demonstrates cardiovascular pathology
    Myocardial ischemia and aortic atherosclerosis
    Aortic valve anatomy and embryology
    Mitral valvular disease
    Tricuspid valvular disease
    Pulmonic valvular disease
    Cardiomyopathies
    Aneurysms and dissections
    Endocarditis
    Imaging of cardiac tumors and solid and gaseous materials
    Intracardiac devices, catheters, and cannulas
    Echocardiographic evaluation of pericardial disease
    Adult congenital heart disease
    Pulmonary hypertension
    Recent advances
    Maintaining quality of perioperative echocardiography
    Indications for transesophageal echocardiography
    Complications of transesophageal echocardiography
    Equipment, infection control, and safety
    Oversight and administration
    Training and certification for transesophageal echocardiography
    Medical insurance claims, compliance, and reimbursement for anesthesiology
    Regulatory, legal, and liability issues pertaining to transesophageal echocardiography.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    Ashraf Badawi, editor.
    Summary: This title represents a comprehensive manual of periorbital rejuvenation and includes an in-depth review of the anatomy of the orbit and periorbital region. Physiological changes associated with the aging of the periorbital region and potential rejuvenation options are also covered, while readers are given a series of step-by-step illustrative guides to procedural techniques. The book provides a valuable selection of clinical pearls on how to avoid potential pitfalls using a number of cases in which a range of potential invasive and non-invasive treatment options, including neuromodulators and cosmeceuticals, are used. Periorbital Rejuvenation: A Practical Manual provides a comprehensive and concise overview of periorbital anatomy and the potential effects of aging. Cutting-edge laser treatment options including laser assisted and neuromodulator techniques are ideal for the trainee to develop their knowledge and as a reference guide for the experienced practitioner.

    Contents:
    1. Anatomy of the Orbit and periorbital region
    2. Aging of the orbit and rejuvenation options
    3. Eye Medications and its effect on orbital fat and cosmesis
    4. Soft tissue fillers for the periorbital region
    5. Neuromodulators in Periorbital Rejuvenation
    6. CHEMICAL PEELINGS IN THE PERIORBITAL REGION
    7. Periorbital rejuvenation by lasers and energy-based devices
    8. Oculoplastic surgery for periorbital rejuvenation
    9. Cosmeceuticals for the periorbital region
    10. Editor's Tips.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Akira Kudo, editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Brendon J. Coventry, editor.
    Contents:
    Diagnostic Biopsy Procedures
    Cutaneous Surgery
    Hand Surgery
    Foot Surgery
    Hernia Surgery
    Head and Neck Surgery.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Nicolas W. Shammas, editor.
    Summary: This book examines new technologies (device and pharmacologic) that have evolved over the past few years in treating peripheral arterial disease. Chapters offer optimal strategies to treat PAD, supported by peer-reviewed data. The pillars of this strategy will focus on (a) changing vessel compliance to allow better lumen expansion, (b) less recoil and dissections, and (c) less bailout stenting. Chapters also review embolic protection devices and apply the adjunctive use of anti-proliferative therapy to maintain good long term outcomes. In addition, the book reviews drug coated balloons and drug eluting stent technologies and other means of drug delivery into the vessel wall. The goal of this book is to discuss all these emerging technologies under the strategy of treating patients with the focus on both acute and long term outcomes. Featuring world renown experts, this book offers a critical and comprehensive overview of the current data and future directions that would pave the way for optimal PAD management. Peripheral Arterial Interventions is an essential resource for physicians, residents, fellows, and medical students in cardiology, radiology, vascular surgery, primary care, and health promotion and disease prevention as well as internal and vascular medicine specialists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Atherosclerosis and inflammation in Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 2. Epidemiology and Public Health Implications of Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 3. Risk factors and Outcomes of Patients with Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 4. Pharmacologic Interventions in Patients with Peripheral Arterial Disease
    Chapter 5. The Role of Exercise in Managing the PAD patient
    Chapter 6. Vessel Compliance, Barotrauma and Dissections with Endovascular Therapy of the PAD patient
    Chapter 7. Femoropopliteal Dissections and Their Impact on Procedural and Long Term Outcomes
    Chapter 8. The Role of Atherectomy in Vessel Prepping Prior to Definitive Endovascular Treatment of the PAD patient
    Chapter 9. Lithoplasty of severe calcified disease
    Chapter 10. Specialty balloons and Vessel Prepping
    Chapter 11. The FLEX atherotome role in reducing dissections and stenting
    Chapter 12. Distal embolization in treating PAD
    Chapter 13. Drug coated balloons in infrainguinal arterial interventions
    Chapter 14. Iliac artery Disease Management
    Chapter 15. Drug Eluting Stents in PAD management
    Chapter 16. Infrapopliteal Artery Interventions in Critical Limb Ischemia Patients
    Chapter 17. Reducing the Metal Burden in the infrainguinal arteries: Tack Endovascular System and Spot Stenting
    Chapter 18. Approach to Chronic Total Occlusions
    Chapter 19. Thrombotic Infrainguinal Arterial Disease: Mechanical and Pharmacological Approaches to Therapy
    Chapter 20. Endovascular Management of Aortic Aneurysms
    Chapter 21. Putting it All Together: An algorithm based approach to managing the PAD patient.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    edited by Emile R. Mohler, Michael R. Jaff.
    Contents:
    Epidemiology of PAD
    Office evaluation of peripheral artery disease : history and physical examination strategies
    Vascular laboratory evaluation of peripheral artery disease
    Magnetic resonance, computed tomographic, and angiographic imaging of peripheral arterial disease
    Non-atherosclerotic peripheral artery disease
    Medical therapy of peripheral artery disease
    Endovascular treatment of peripheral artery disease
    When to refer patients with claudication.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Aynur Özge, Derya Uludüz, Ömer Karadaş, Hayrunnisa Bolay, editors.
    Summary: This book discusses interventional treatment options on intractable (drug resistant) headache patients and extended headache attacks and extensively reviews the reasons behind treatment failure in intractable headaches, offering potential solutions based on clinical black holes of headache outpatient practice. The most appropriate interventions for certain types of headache such as chronic migraine and medication-overuse headaches, are discussed among others. The book provides practical advice on properly administering the interventional treatments either as a bridge treatments or prophylaxis options. The expected complications of the treatments, and strategies to minimize them are also discussed. Approaches in special patient populations such as pediatric or pregnancy cases and other non-standard cases are also extensively discussed.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Contents; Contributors; List of Videos;
    Chapter 1: Introduction to Interventional Procedures; Timing and Patient Selection; 1.1 About Headache; 1.2 Management; 1.3 Interventional Techniques; References;
    Chapter 2: Headache Anatomy and Mechanisms of Peripheral Nerve Interventions; 2.1 Transmission of Nociception from Peripheral Structures; 2.2 Convergence of Peripheral Inputs on Second-Order Neurons; 2.3 Projections to the Thalamus; 2.4 Projections to the Brainstem and Hypothalamus; 2.5 Sphenopalatine Ganglion; 2.6 The Vagus Nerve and Parasympathetic Efferents 2.7 Antinociceptive ProjectionsReferences;
    Chapter 3: Pharmacology of Interventional Headache Management; 3.1 Local Anesthetics; 3.1.1 Mechanism of Action; 3.1.2 Recommended Doses; 3.1.3 Side Effects; 3.2 Corticosteroids; 3.2.1 Mechanism of Action; 3.2.2 Recommended Doses; 3.2.3 Side Effects; 3.3 Botulinum Toxin; 3.3.1 Mechanism of Action; 3.3.2 BoNT Preparations; 3.3.3 Efficacy; 3.3.4 Immunogenicity; 3.3.5 Side Effects; 3.3.6 Contraindications; 3.3.7 Recommended Doses; References;
    Chapter 4: Greater Occipital Nerve and Lesser Occipital Nerve Blocks 4.1 GON and LON Blocks for the Treatment of Various Headache Types4.1.1 Cluster Headache; 4.1.2 Migraine; 4.1.3 Occipital Neuralgia; 4.1.4 Postdural Puncture Headache; 4.2 Treatment Intervals and the Drugs; 4.3 Outcome; 4.4 Side Effects; 4.5 Contraindications; 4.6 Personal Comments; References;
    Chapter 5: The Role of Other Peripheral Nerve Blocks; 5.1 Nerve Blocks; 5.1.1 Auriculotemporal Nerve Block; 5.1.2 Supratrochlear Nerve Block; 5.1.3 Supraorbital Nerve Block; 5.1.4 Infraorbital Nerve Block; 5.1.5 Mental Nerve Block; 5.1.6 Sphenopalatine Ganglion Block; 5.1.7 Cervical Root Block
    Chapter 7: The Role of Interventional Procedures in Childhood and Adolescent Headaches-Peripheral Neuromodulation7.1 Greater Occipital Nerve Block; 7.1.1 Selection of Patients; 7.1.2 Contraindications for GON Block; 7.1.3 GON Block Procedure; 7.1.4 Response to Treatment; 7.2 Greater Occipital Nerve Stimulation; 7.3 Trigeminal Nerve Stimulation: Supraorbital Branch; 7.4 Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation; References;
    Chapter 8: Interventional Headache Management in The Elderly; 8.1 Botulinum Toxin (BonT) Treatment; 8.2 Peripheral Nerve Blocks; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Ningfei Liu, editor.
    Summary: This book provides extensive knowledge of peripheral lymphedema, including the etiology and pathophysiology of the disease, as well as the anatomy and physiology of the lymphatic system and guide for the treatment of lymphedema to clinicians. The ultimate goal of lymphedema therapy is the targeted and individualized treatment. New technology of multimodality lymphatic imaging emerged in the recent years largely improves the diagnosis of lymphatic circulation disorders. The treatment of peripheral lymphedema is expected to have new achievement. This book illustrates the latest achievements in clinical and basic research of lymphedema to the clinical investigators as well as basic researchers. Pathogenesis of lymphatic system, diagnosis of lymphedema, treatment and further complication management are demonstrated in this book. Some special lymphedema related syndromes, issues on prevention and prognosis are also included.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Overview of lymphatic system
    1 Physiology of lymphatic system (physiology of capillary filtrate flow to lymphatics)
    2 Anatomy of lymphatic system
    3 Formation and transport of lymph
    4 Function of the lymphatic system
    Part 2 Lymphedema
    5 Introduction
    6 Etiology of primary lymphedema
    7 Secondary lymphedema of different types
    8 Stage of lymphedema
    Part 3 Pathogenesis of lymphatic system in lymphedema
    9 Changes in lymphatic vessels in primary lymphedema
    10 Changes in lymph node in primary lymphedema
    11 Pathology of collecting lymph vessels in secondary lymphedema
    12 Pathology of the initial lymph vessels in lymphedematous skin
    13 Co-malformations of venous and lymphatic vessels in primary lymphedema
    Part 4 Pathology of lymphedematous tissue
    14 Lymphedema fluid
    15 Inflammation
    16 Tissue overgrowth in lymphedema
    Part 5 Diagnosis of lymphedema - Assistant in diagnosis
    17 Clinical diagnosis and differential diagnosis
    18 MR lymphangiography (MRL)
    19 Nuclear Medicine imaging in the diagnosis of Peripheral lymphedema : Lymphoscintigraphy
    20 Indocyanine green lymphography
    21 Nuclear Medicine imaging in the diagnosis of Peripheral lymphedema : Single-Photon Emission Computed Tomography/Computed Tomography(SPECT/CT)
    22 Comparison of current imaging methods in diagnosis of peripheral lymphedema
    Part 6 Treatment of lymphedema - conservative treatment
    23 Compression Therapy
    24 Complex Physical Decongestive Therapy for Lymphedema (CDT)
    25 Far infrared radiation thermotherapy
    Part 7 Treatment of lymphedema - Surgical treatment
    26 Suction Assisted Lipectomy with simultaneous skin excision for lymphedema
    27 Microsurgery - Vascularized Lymph Vessel Transfer
    28 Microsurgery - Lymphaticovenular anastomosis for the treatment of lymphedema
    29 Microsurgery - Lymph node/flap transplantation
    30 Microsurgery - Lymphatic Tissue Transfer for the Treatment of Axillary Dissection Related Lymphedema
    31 Silicone tube implantation
    32 Liposuction
    Part 8 Curative effect assessment
    33 Circumference measurement
    34 Bioelectrical impedance analysis
    35 Skin fibrometer and Lymph Scanner
    Part 9 Lymphedema in children
    36 Lymphedema in childhood
    Part 10 Prevention of tumor treatment related lymphedema
    37 Prevention of lymphedema after breast cancer surgery
    38 Prevention of pelvic malignancies and related lymphedema.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Jeffrey A. Cohen, Justin J. Mowchun, Victoria H. Lawson, Nathaniel M. Robbins.
    Digital Access Oxford 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Jean-Michel Vallat, Joachim Weis.
    Digital Access Wiley 2014
  • Digital
    Andrea M Trescot, editor.
    Contents:
    Part I. Peripheral nerve entrapments: general principles
    Part II. Headache
    Part III. Facial and cervical nerve entrapments
    Part IV. Chest wall peripheral nerve entrapment syndromes
    Part V. Upper extremity peripheral nerve entrapments
    Part VI. Abdominal wall pain
    Part VII. Pelvic pain
    Part VIII. Low back pain
    Part IX. Lower extremity
    Index
    Index of symptoms.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Christopher J. Dy " David M. Brogan, Eric R. Wagner, editors.
    Summary: Peripheral nerve issues are potential sequalae of orthopedic surgery, even after cases in which technically excellent surgery was performed. These injuries can impede the expected recovery of function after the primary surgery. Given the manifold challenges associated with recovery of peripheral nerve injuries, this book is designed as a multidisciplinary guide to the diagnosis, prognostication and treatment of peripheral nerve issues after common orthopedic surgeries. Beginning with an overview of nerve compression, injury and regeneration, as well as a presentation of the current diagnostic and imaging modalities for peripheral nerve injuries, this unique text is organized by anatomic region and by type of procedure performed. Topics covered include shoulder and elbow arthroplasty and arthroscopy, fractures of the hand and wrist, hip preservation surgery, total knee replacement, open surgery of the foot and ankle, lumbosacral myeloradiculopathy, and more. Each chapter is authored by both a subspecialty surgeon who routinely performs the surgeries described and a subspecialized hand/peripheral nerve surgeon with experience in evaluating and treating nerve issues after that particular injury. Emphasis is placed on multidisciplinary team approaches, patient counseling, and technical aspects of surgical treatment. Generously illustrated and written by experts in the field, Peripheral Nerve Issues after Orthopedic Surgery is a truly interdisciplinary resource for orthopedic, plastic, hand and trauma surgeons, physiatrists, and all professionals managing postoperative peripheral nerve pain.

    Contents:
    Nerve Compression, Nerve Injury, and Nerve Regeneration: An Overview
    Evaluation of the Patient with Postoperative Peripheral Nerve Issues
    Nerve Injury after Shoulder Arthroscopy, Stabilization, and Rotator Cuff Repair (axillary, musculocutaneous, suprascapular nerves)
    Nerve Injury after Shoulder Arthroplasty
    Nerve Injury after Humerus, Elbow, and Forearm Fractures (radial, posterior interosseous, and ulnar nerves)
    Nerve Injury Associated with Elbow Procedures
    Nerve Injury after Distal Radius, Metacarpal and Finger Fractures
    Median and Ulnar Nerve Injury at the Elbow and Wrist
    Pelvic, Acetabular, Hip, and Proximal Femur Fractures: Intra-pelvic and Extra-pelvic Neuroanatomy
    Pelvic, Acetabular, Hip, and Proximal Femur Fractures: Surgical Exposures and Treatment of Nerve Injury
    Nerve Injury after Total Hip Arthroplasty
    Nerve Injury after Hip Arthroscopy, Hip Preservation Surgery, and Proximal Hamstring Repair
    Nerve Injury after Distal Femur, Tibial Plateau, and Tibial Shaft Fractures
    Nerve Injury after Total Knee Arthroplasty
    Nerve Injury after Knee Arthroscopy, ACL Reconstruction, Multiligament Knee, and Open Knee Surgery
    Nerve Injury after Distal Tibia, Pilon, and Ankle Fractures
    Nerve Injury after Fractures of the Hindfoot, Midfoot, and Forefoot
    Nerve Injury after Open and Arthroscopic Surgery of the Ankle and Foot, Including Morton Neuroma
    Lumbosacral Double Crush Syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Alaa Abd-Elsayed, Andrea M. Trescot.
    Summary: At last—a single, convenient reference on this interventional pain management technique, covering all recent advances in this fast-changing field. Peripheral Nerve Stimulation: A Comprehensive Guide is a one-stop resource offering practical guidance on performing a wide array of pain-relieving procedures using office-based ultrasound-guided techniques, fluoroscopy, and more. Concise and user-friendly, this easy-to-use guide helps physicians deliver safe, accurate, and cost-effective care by demonstrating how to evaluate the causes of pain, identify the most promising stimulation technique, locate the site with precision, and provide effective pain relief.

    Contents:
    History of Peripheral Nerve Stimulation for Pain
    Peripheral Nerve Entrapments
    Mechanism of Action of Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Ultrasound Versus Fluoroscopy
    Surgical Tools For Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Surgical Techniques For Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Peripheral Nerve Stimulation Education and Psychological Evaluation
    Occipital Nerve Stimulation
    Trigeminal Nerve Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    The Sphenopalatine Ganglion: Associated Illnesses and Therapeutic Modalities
    Axillary and Suprascapular Nerves
    Brachial Plexus
    Ulnar Nerve
    Median Nerve
    Radial Nerve
    Intercostal Nerves
    Ilioinguinal and Iliohypogastric Nerve
    Genitofemoral Nerve
    Superior Cluneal Nerves
    Middle Cluneal Nerves
    Inferior Cluneal Nerve
    Pudendal Peripheral Nerve Stimulation For Chronic Pelvic Pain
    Lateral Femoral Cutaneous Nerve
    Femoral Nerve
    Sciatic Nerve
    Genicular Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Peroneal Nerves (Fibular Nerves)
    Saphenous Nerve
    Posterior Tibial Nerve
    Sural Nerve
    Superior Gluteal Nerve
    Craniofacial Stimulation and Headache
    Peripheral Nerve Stimulation for Complex Regional Pain Syndrome
    Postherpetic Neuralgia
    Approach to Low Back Pain and Peripheral Nerve Stimulation
    Peripheral Nerve Stimulation for Chronic Pelvic Pain
    Postamputation Pain
    Peripheral Neuropathy
    Overactive Bladder
    Gastric Stimulation For Gastroparesis
    Motor Stimulation
    Vagal Nerve Stimulation.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Mark Bromberg.
    Summary: Do you find the evaluation of a patient presenting clinical symptoms of distal extremity numbness and weakness daunting and complex? Are you unsure of the diagnostic processes and best-practices in the treatment of peripheral neuropathy? This invaluable guide presents a practical approach to the diagnosis and successful management of patients with peripheral neuropathies. Starting with a structured series of patient queries for symptoms and examination signs, the diagnostic process emphasizes the role of electrodiagnostic tests in defining the neuropathy. Specific neuropathies are presented with their epidemiology, causative pathology, diagnostic and laboratory factors, alongside advised treatments and overall management strategies. This leading resource will assist non-neuromuscular neurologists, physiatrists, neurology and physiatry residents, and will also be useful to electromyographers, proving an ideal aid for busy clinic schedules.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2018
  • Digital
    Venera A. Shaimova, editor ; English text edited by Yana Gorodechnaya.
    Summary: This book provides an illustrated guide to peripheral retinal degenerations and the role of spectral domain coherence tomography (SD-OCT) in diagnosis and treatment. The book discusses 73 clinical cases and gives detailed information on the principles of SD-OCT and its application in the imaging of peripheral retina. Peripheral Retinal Degenerations: Optical Coherence Tomography and Retinal Laser Coagulation, 2nd edition, discusses a broad range of retinal pathologies such as chorioretinal degenerations, posterior vitreous detachment, vitreoretinal adhesions and tractions and includes a plethora of high-quality clinical images throughout. Ophthalmologists and retinal specialists will find this updated edition to be the perfect didactic resource for furthering skills and knowledge in this clinical area.

    Contents:
    Principles and methods of peripheral retina OCT scanning
    Optical coherence tomography of the peripheral retina and the vitreoretinal interface
    Peripheral retinal degenerations as a risk factor for rhegmatogenous retinal detachment
    Intraretinal degenerations
    Vitreoretinal degenerations
    Chorioretinal degenerations
    Retinal laser photocoagulation in peripheral degenerations.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Owen A. O'Connor, Won Seog Kim, Pier Luigi Zinzani.
    Summary: "The immune system can be classified into 2 basic component: (1) the innate immune system, and (2) the acquired immune system. The innate immune system is considered to be relatively agnostic to any specific antigen, and is often described as invariant. The innate immune response is the first line of defense, and typically exhibits limited specificity. Examples of innate immune response may include phagocytosis by macrophases, barriers to infect provided by the skin and tears, NK- and mast cells, and complement mediated cytolysis. In contrast, the adaptive (or sometimes called acquired) immune response develops in response to specific antigen, being 'custom' designed for the antigen in question, usually occurs later in the immune response, and has the ability to recall the response to past infections. Components of a functioning acquired immune response might involve antigen presenting cells presenting antigen ot T-cells, the activation of specific T-cells which would signal to B-cells enlisting their engagement in the response and the production of highly specific antibody capable of binding specific antigen. T- and B- lymphocytes are the major types of lymphocytes found in the human body, where they can constitute 20-40% of all white blood cells, with only about 2-3% of these being found in the peripheral circulation, the remainder being localized to various lymphoid organ is (lymph nodes, spleen, submucosal tissue). Remarkably, the total mass of lymphocytes in the body can approximate the mass of the brain and liver"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals T-Cell Lymphocyte Biology / Claudio Tripodo, Stefano Pilleri
    Mechanisms of T-Cell Lymphomagenesis / François Lemonnier, Philippe Gaulard, Laurence de Leval
    Epigenetics of T-Cell Lymphoma / H. Miles Prince, Jasmine Zain, Anas Younes, Sean Whittaker, Owen O'Connor, Sean Harrop
    Animal Models of T-Cell Lymphoma / Keiichiro Hattori, Raksha Shrestha, Tatsuhiro Sakamoto, Manabu Kusakabe, Mamiko Sakata-Yanagimoto
    The Geographic Distribution of the PTCL : Global Epidemiology / Amulya Yellala, Avyakta Kallam, James Armitage
    Classification of the Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas / Neval Ozkaya, Elaine Jaffee
    Molecular Classification of the PTCLs / Tyler A. Herek, Javed Iqbal
    Peripheral T-Cell Lymphoma
    Not Otherwise Specified / Nora Bennani, Stephen Ansell
    Angioimmunoblastic T-Cell Lymphoma (AITL) / Jehan Dupuis, Franck Morschhauser
    The Spectrum of Anaplastic Large Cell Lymphoma / Jianping Kong, Andrew Feldman
    HTLV-1-Positive Adult T-Cell Leukemia-Lymphoma (ATL) / Wataru Munakata, Kensei Tobinai
    Natural Killer/T Cell Lymphomas / S.J. Kim, R. Suzuki, A. Jaccard, S.T. Lim, Won Seog Kim
    T-Prolymphocytic Leukemia (T-PLL) / Dima El-Sharkawi, Claire Deardon
    Large Granular Lymphocytes Leukemia (LGL) / Karolina H. Dziewulska, Katharine B. Moosic, HeeJin Cheon, Kristine C. Olson, David J. Feith, Thomas P. Loughran, Jr. Gamma Delta T-Cell Lymphomas / Francine Foss, Aadil Ahmed, Mina Xu
    Enteropathy Associated T-Cell Lymphoma and Monomorphic Epitheliotropic Intestinal T-Cell Lymphoma / Craig R. Soderquist, Jennifer Shingleton, Sandeep Dave, Govind Bhagat
    Hepatosplenic T-Cell Lymphomas / Robert N. Stuver, Mwanasha Merrill, Salvia Jain
    Cutaneous T-Cell Lymphoma / Alejandro Ariel Gru, Bethanie Rooke, Kevin Molloy, Julia Scarsbrick
    Other Rare Subtypes of PTCL / Pier Paolo Picaluga
    Standard Front-line Therapies / Raphael Koch, Lorenz Truemper
    Approved Agents in the Relapsed or Refractory Setting, Excluding Brentuximab Vedotin / Helen Ma, Owen A. O'Connor
    The Role for Autologous Stem Cell Transplantation (ASCT) in Peripheral T Cell Lymphomas (PTCL) / Juan Alejandro Ospina, H. Martinez-Cordero, J. Enciso, H. Idrobo
    Allogeneic Stem Cell Transplantion / Anna Dodero, Paolo Corradini
    Emerging Immunotherapy Approaches in Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas / Barbara Pro, Andrei Shustov
    Emerging New Small Molecules in Peripheral T-Cell Lymphomas / Alessandro Broccoli, Pier Luigi Zinzani
    The Value and Relevance of T-Cell Lymphoma Registries / Tetiana Skrypets, Martina Manni, Monica Civallero, Iryna Kriachok, Massimo Federico
    Innovative Chemotherapy-Free Approaches for the Treatment of PTCL / Enrica Marchi, Ahmed Sawas, Helen Ma, Luigi Scotto, Francesca Montanari
    Global Collaborations / Dejan Radjeski, Eliza Hawke, Owen A. O'Connor, Pier Luigi Zinzani, WonSeog Kim, Enrica Marchi.
    Digital Access Wiley 2021
  • Digital
    Radhika Tandon, Anat Galor, Virender Singh Sangwan, Manotosh Ray, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sergio Sandrucci, Baudolino Mussa, editors.
    Summary: Indications for central venous cannulation in critically ill patients have increased dramatically in recent years owing to the use of more complex therapies unsuitable for delivery via peripheral veins. The main drawbacks of central venous access are morbidity and the growing scarcity of experienced operators. Ultrasound-guided peripheral venous access offers a solution, in that it reduces morbidity and can be performed by a dedicated nursing team. The aim of this book is to teach the fundamentals of this emerging technique. Advice is provided on the choice of materials and on vein selection. The advantages and disadvantages of peripherally inserted central venous catheters (PICC) in relation to other types of central venous catheter are discussed, and the principles of use and practical applications of ultrasound for venipuncture are explained. Maneuvers for PICC positioning, techniques for the evaluation of PICC tip placement, and the prevention, diagnosis, and management of complications are all described in detail. Advice is also provided on the organization of a dedicated PICC team within a hospital or a supportive care program, and psychological, legal, and economic issues are considered. Peripherally Inserted Central Venous Catheters will be of interest to a wide range of professionals, including nutritionists, oncologists, anesthesiologists, surgeons, registered nurses, nurse practitioners, physicians, physician assistants, and radiologists.

    Contents:
    Introduction and Overview of PICC History
    Which Material and Device? The Choice of PICC
    Vessel Health and Preservation: The Proactive Approach
    The Choice of a Vein in Critically Ill Patients: Cost-Effectiveness
    Advantages, Disadvantages, and Indications of PICCs in Inpatients and Outpatients
    Ultrasound Anatomy of Peripheral Veins and Ultrasound-Guided Venipuncture
    Evaluation Techniques of the PICC Tip Placement
    Frequency, Diagnosis, and Management of Occlusive and Mechanical PICC Complications
    Clinical Problems Associated with the Use of Peripheral Venous Approaches: Infections
    Clinical Problems Associated with the Use of Peripheral Venous Approaches in Clinical Practice: Thrombosis
    Maneuvers, Precautions, and Tricks for PICC Positioning Procedure
    The "Off-Label" Use of PICCs
    Venous Access Devices and Emotional Response in Oncologic Patients: Diagnostic and Management Aspects
    Peripheral Inserted Central Catheters: Medicolegal Aspects
    The PICC Team.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Bryan D. Springer, Javad Parvizi, editors.
    Summary: Periprosthetic Joint Infection of the Hip and Knee is a practical reference for the diagnosis and treatment of total joint infections following hip and knee arthroplasty. In addition to useful chapters presenting common tests and algorithms used for diagnosis, the book gives background on the epidemiology, risk factors, and prevention strategies of periprosthetic joint infection. Additionally, practical clinical information is given, including antibiotic treatment strategies and delivery methods and medical optimization techniques for physicians to follow for patient care and follow-up. Covering a topic that is currently underrepresented in the medical literature, Periprosthetic Joint Infection of the Hip and Knee will be useful to orthopedic surgeons, rheumatologists, and other physicians involved in the care of patients with hip and knee prosthetic implants.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology of Total Hip and Knee Arthroplasty Infection
    Risk Factors for Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Prevention of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Medical Optimalization of Patients Prior to Surgery
    Diagnosis of Periprosthetic Joint Infection: An Algorithmic Approach to Patients
    Intraoperative Tests to Aid in Diagnosis of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Biofilm-Related Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Microbiology of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Antibiotics in Treatment of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    PMMA and Antimicrobial Delivery
    Prosthetic Retention: Treatment Options
    Single-Stage Exchange for Treatment of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Two-Stage Exchange Hip Arthroplasty: Static Spacers
    Two-Stage Exchange Hip Arthroplasty: Articulating Spacers
    Two-Stage Exchange Knee Arthroplasty: Static Spacers
    Two-Stage Exchange Knee Arthroplasty: Articulating Spacers
    Knee Arthrodesis
    Resection Arthroplasty and Hip Joint Fusion
    Above-Knee Amputation
    Post-Operative Management of Periprosthetic Joint Infection.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Daniel Kendoff, Rhidian Morgan-Jones, Fares S. Haddad, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I. Incidence and Socioeconomic Impact
    Part II. Prevention of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Part III. Diagnosis of Periprosthetic Joint Infection
    Part IV. Local Antibiotic Therapy
    Part V. The Hip Joint
    Part VI. The Knee Joint
    Part VII. Perioperative Optimization
    Part VIII. Long-term Perspectives
    Part IX. Future Approaches.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Raymond T. Krediet, Dirk G. Struijk, Sadie van Esch ; foreword by Norbert Lameire.
    Contents:
    Anatomy and physiology of the peritoneum / Krediet, R.T.
    Treatment modalities / Struijk, D.G.
    Access- and catheter-related complications / Struijk, D.G.
    Measurement of peritoneal transport / Krediet, R.T.
    Assessment of the peritoneum by biomarkers in peritoneal effluent / Krediet, R.T.
    Peritonitis and other catheter-related infections / Esch, S. van
    Information technology in peritoneal dialysis / Struijk, D.G.
    Residual renal function and peritoneal dialysis dose in adequacy of peritoneal dialysis / Krediet, R.T.
    Peritoneal dialysis solutions / Krediet, R.T.
    Long-term peritoneal dialysis and encapsulating peritoneal sclerosis / Krediet, R.T.
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Emel Canbay, Yutaka Yonemura.
    Contents:
    1. Anatomy of Peritoneum and Preoperative Assessment of Patients with Peritoneal Surface Malignancies
    2. Surgical Technique for Cytoreductive Surgery
    3. Intraperitoneal Chemotherapy Applications
    4. Management of Special Issues
    5. Molecular Mechanism of Peritoneal Metastases.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Beate Rau, Alfred Königsrainer, Faheez Mohamed, Paul H. Sugarbaker, editors.
    Summary: This book provides surgeons and oncologists with a well-founded and detailed overview of the available treatment options for peritoneal malignancy and differential selection of the appropriate forms of therapy. Systemic chemotherapy options are also considered, as are surgical cytoreduction (CRS) and all forms of intraperitoneal chemotherapy (IPC) especially hyperthermic IPC (HIPEC), and immunotherapy, including specific procedures such as PIPAC. Subsequent chapters address perioperative care, complications and recurrences, as well as psycho-oncological, palliative medical and nursing care. The process of parietal and visceral peritonectomy in the large and small intestine is additionally illustrated by three video clips accessible online. Covering a broad range of aspects, including peritoneal metastasis and intraperitoneal chemotherapy, the book offers a valuable tool for surgeons, oncologists and anesthesiologists alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Ariane J. Marelli, Jamil A. Aboulhosn.
    Summary: Covering the full spectrum of CHD from infants through adults, Perloff's Clinical Recognition of Congenital Heart Disease, 7th Edition, provides unparalleled guidance on the diagnosis and treatment of common and uncommon CHD in one definitive resource. The editors of this new edition, Drs. Ariane J. Marelli and Jamil A. Aboulhosn, have maintained Dr. Joseph Perloff's richly nuanced approach while bringing this classic text completely up to date with all the latest evidence and technologic advances in the field. With its comprehensive, step-by-step approach, you'll acquire a structured understanding of CHD across age ranges, allowing you to effectively detect these conditions as early as possible. NEW in the 7th Edition: Updated images throughout, as well as phonocardiograms, electrocardiograms, flow charts, and anatomic drawings Specific, integrated findings for individual patients with Dr Perloff's classic approach to diagnosis and treatment Streamlined review of sequelae and complications Historical Notes at the beginning of each chapter Tips on selecting among the increasing array of currently available procedures, helping foster and develop clinical judgment skills Update on genetic contributions to clinical recognition for a more complete presentation of patient diagnosis. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2023
  • Digital
    Mark Sobel, editor.
    Summary: This unique book is a practical, "go to" source of comprehensive information on the care of peroneal tendon injuries, accurately illustrating this hot topic with many anatomical drawings of how the anatomy influences the diseases we see clinically. This presentation opens with a review of the normal anatomy, biomechanics and examination of the peroneal tendons, followed by a discussion of congenital variations and imaging strategies used in diagnosis and evaluation. Both conservative and surgical management techniques are then elucidated in injury-specific chapters, from peroneus brevis splits and stenosing tenosynovitis to painful os peroneum syndrome (POPS) and acute dislocation. Chapters on rehabilitation and comorbid pathologies round out the presentation. The diagnosis of peroneal tendon injury is much more common today than it was 20 years ago. Utilizing the latest evidence and presenting the most cutting-edge management techniques, The Peroneal Tendons will be useful for orthopedic and podiatric surgeons, sports medicine specialists, and students and residents in these areas.

    Contents:
    Normal Anatomy and Physical Examination of the Peroneal Tendons
    Biomechanics of the Peroneal Tendons
    Congenital Variations of the Peroneal Tendons
    Imaging of the Peroneal Tendons
    Conservative Treatment of the Peroneal Tendons
    Peroneal Brevis Splits
    Peroneal Brevis Splits Associated with Chronic Lateral Ankle Instability
    Stenosing Tenosynovitis along the Lateral Wall of the Calcaneus
    Painful Os Peroneum Syndrome (POPS)
    Attritional Rupture of the Peroneal Tendons
    Acute Subluxation/Dislocation of the Peroneal Tendons
    Immobilization and Rehabilitation of the Peroneal Tendons
    Peroneal Tendon Pathology Associated with the Cavovarus Foot
    Peroneal Tendon Pathology Associated with Calcaneous Fractures.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Gérard Lizard, editor.
    Summary: This book provides an overview of the biology and biochemistry of peroxisomes, and discusses the contribution of these organelles to peroxisomal and neurodegenerative diseases. It begins with a detailed introduction to the biogenesis and metabolic functions of peroxisomes, and highlights their role in oxidative stress and in lipid metabolism such as fatty acid oxidation. The following chapters focus on the molecular and clinical aspects of peroxisomal disorders caused by defects in peroxisomal function. In particular, the biological aspects of peroxisomal biogenesis disorders such as Zellweger syndrome and Heimler syndrome are discussed. This includes their underlying genetic causes as well as the biochemical and metabolic defects associated with the disorders. In addition, several chapters cover recent observations suggesting an association between peroxisomal dysfunction and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer's, Multiple Sclerosis and other degenerative cerebellar pathologies. The final section of the book discusses important cell and animal models for studying the role of peroxisomes in human diseases and presents current therapeutic strategies for their treatment. This book deals with a highly topical subject that is at the heart of current research, and represents a valuable contribution for all students and researchers who want to understand the complex biology of peroxisomes and their role in human diseases.

    Contents:
    [II]. Peroxisomal diseases : biological characteristics and diagnosis: Peroxisome biogenesis disorders / Masanori Honsho, Kanji Okumoto, Shigehiko Tamura, Yukio Fujiki
    Fatty acid oxidation in peroxisomes : enzymology, metabolic crosstalk with other organelles and peroxisomal disorders / Ronald J. A. Wanders, Frédéric M. Vaz, Hans R. Waterham, Sacha Ferdinandusse
    Zellweger syndrome disorders : from severe neonatal disease to atypical adult presentation / David Cheillan
    Heimler syndrome / S. Mechaussier, I. Perrault, H. Dollfus, A. Bloch-Zupan, N. Loundon, L. Jonard et al. [IV]. Cell and animal model systems: A mouse model system to study peroxisomal roles in neurodegeneration of peroxisome biogenesis disorders / Yuichi Abe, Shigehiko Tamura, Masanori Honsho, Yukio Fujiki
    The Drosophila melanogaster as genetic model system to dissect the mechanisms of disease that lead to neurodegeneration in adrenoleukodystrophy / Margret H. Bülow, Brendon D. Parsons, Francesca Di Cara
    Human peroxisomal 3-ketoacyl-CoA thiolase : tissue expression and metabolic regulation / Norbert Latruffe. [V]. Treatment of peroxisomal diseases: Biological functions of plasmalogens / Md Shamim Hossain, Shiro Mawatari, Takehiko Fujino
    Therapeutic efficacy of plasmalogens for Alzheimer's disease, mild cognitive impairment, and Parkinson's disease in conjunction with a new hypothesis for the etiology of Alzheimer's disease / Takehiko Fujino, Md Shamim Hossain, Shiro Mawatari.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    edited by Tsuneo Imanaka, Nobuyuki Shimozawa.
    Summary: This book provides readers with a comprehensive overview of peroxisomes and their role in human diseases. It starts by describing the history of peroxisome research and then examines in detail the current understanding of the biogenesis and function of peroxisomes. It then focuses on peroxisomal disorders and the involvement of peroxisomes in cancer and age-related diseases, discussing in detail the use of model organisms to elucidate the pathogenesis of peroxisomal disorders and the physiological importance of peroxisomal proteins. Further, the book examines diagnostic and therapeutic strategies in peroxisomal disorders as well as significant recent advances. Lastly, it addresses various topics in peroxisome research, including the isolation of peroxisomes from mammalian tissues and cells, the structural biology of peroxisomal proteins, the lipidomics of peroxisomal disorders, the value of exome sequencing, and neuropsychological testing in X-linked adrenoleukodystrophy. Given its scope, the book is a valuable resource for postgraduate students and researchers in the life sciences and clinicians in the fields of internal medicine, pediatrics, and neurology.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Biogenesis and Function of peroxisome
    1 The history of peroxisomal research
    2 Peroxisome Biogenesis
    3 Peroxisome Degradation and Its Molecular Machinery
    4 The function of the peroxisome
    Part 2 Dysfunction of Peroxisome and Human Disease
    5 Peroxisomal disorders
    6 Model organisms used to understand peroxisomal disorders
    7 Diagnosis of peroxisomal disorders
    8 Therapeutic strategies for X-linked adrenoleukodystrophy, a representative peroxisome disease
    Part 3 Topics in Peroxisome Research
    9 The isolation of peroxisomes
    10 Structure Biology of peroxisomal proteins, peroxins
    11 Lipidomics of peroxisomal disorders
    12 Neurophysiology and neuropsychology for X-ALD.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Lewis, Kim.
    Summary: This volume is a collection of chapters from the leading experts in the relatively new and burgeoning field of persister cell studies. Persisters play a leading role in the recalcitrance of chronic infections, and enable the development of classical antibiotic resistance. The focus of the book is on studies that provide an understanding of the mechanisms of persister formation, antibiotic tolerance and role in disease, at the molecular level.

    Contents:
    Intro; Introduction; Contents; Contributors;
    Chapter 1: Evolution Under Antibiotic Treatments: Interplay Between Antibiotic Persistence, Tolerance, and Resistance; 1.1 Distinguishing Between Resistance, Tolerance, and Antibiotic Persistence; 1.1.1 Antibiotic Resistance; 1.1.2 Antibiotic Tolerance; 1.1.3 Antibiotic Persistence; 1.1.4 Different Types of Persistent Bacteria; 1.1.4.1 Triggered Persistence [Previously Called Type I (Balaban et al. 2004)]; 1.1.4.2 Spontaneous Persistence [Previously Called Type II (Balaban et al. 2004)]; 1.2 Quantification of Antibiotic Tolerance and Persistence 1.3 Evolution of Antibiotic Tolerance Under Intermittent Antibiotic Treatments1.3.1 Tolerance and Persistence-by-Lag Evolve to Match the Duration of the Antibiotic Treatment; 1.3.2 Evolution of Stationary Phase Triggered Antibiotic Persistence; 1.3.3 Evolution of Drug-Induced Tolerance; 1.3.4 Antibiotic Tolerance in the Clinic; 1.3.4.1 Evolution of Tolerance in the Clinic; 1.3.4.2 Techniques to Detect Tolerance in the Clinic; 1.4 Antibiotic Tolerance and Persistence Promote the Evolution of Resistance; 1.5 Conclusion; References 2.3.2.1 The Mesenteric Lymph Nodes and Spleen Are Preferred Niches for Antibiotic-Tolerant S. Typhimurium During Infection2.3.2.2 The Subpopulation of S. Typhimurium Capable of Surviving Antibiotic Treatment During Infection Are Slow or Non-Growing ... ; 2.4 Molecular Mechanisms: How to Cope with Combined Host and Antibiotic Challenges?; 2.4.1 Formation of Salmonella Antibiotic Persisters During Infection; 2.4.2 Salmonella Antibiotic Persisters Must Survive the Immune Response During Infection; 2.5 Going Forward: Future Directions and Challenges; References
    Chapter 2: Antibiotic Persisters and Relapsing Salmonella enterica Infections2.1 Persistence of Infection, Antibiotic Persistence, and Antibiotic Persistence During Infection: What Is the Difference?; 2.2 A Brief Introduction to Salmonella enterica Infections; 2.3 Evidence for Role of Antibiotic Persistent Salmonella in Relapsing Infections; 2.3.1 Clinical Evidence for Antibiotic Persistence During Infection in Humans; 2.3.2 Experimental Evidence for Antibiotic Persistence During Infection in Mice
    Chapter 3: The Biology of Persister Cells in Escherichia coli3.1 Basic Concepts of Persister Cell Biology; 3.1.1 Persister Formation as a Phenotypic Switch into Dormancy; 3.1.2 Stochasticity and Heterogeneity of Persister Formation; 3.1.3 Biological Functions of Persister Cells; 3.2 Unraveling the Genetic Basis of Persister Formation; 3.2.1 Conceptual Overview; 3.2.2 Distinguishing Persister Formation/Survival from Phenotypic Resistance; 3.3 Non-Specific Mechanisms of Persister Cell Formation; 3.3.1 Energy Metabolism and Oxygen; 3.3.2 PASH: ``Persistence as Stuff Happenś́
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nira Ramachandran.
    Summary: The book revisits the causes of persisting undernutrition in India, but moves away from the usual focus on women and children to a broader view of the entire population. It estimates the economic losses resulting from ignoring undernutrition in the adult working population, and questions the current narrow focus of nutrition interventions, suggesting that a family-based approach may provide quicker results and long-term sustainability. It compares the best and worst performing states in the country to glean learnings from both successes and failures and emphasizes the need to hand over the ownership of nutrition outcomes from the state to the community and family for more sustainable results. The book is organized in three sections: Part 1 details the nutrition status of the population, regional variations in nutrition outcomes, and government response in terms of interventions. Part 2 reviews issues and concerns like gender discrimination, poor child nutrition status, ineffective implementation of government programmes in the field, and the possible impacts of emerging issues like climate change. Part 3 seeks solutions from both international and country experiences.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Brendan McCormack, Sandra van Dulmen, Hilde Eide, Kirsti Skovdahl, Tom Eide.
    Contents:
    Person-centredness in healthcare policy, practice and research / Brendan McCormack, Sandra van Dulmen, Hilde Eide, Kirsti Skovdahl, and Tom Eide
    Philosophical perspectives on person-centredness for healthcare research / Jan Dewing, Tom Eide and Brendan McCormack
    The knowing and being of person-centred research practice across worldviews : an epistemological and ontological framework / Angie Titchen, Shaun Cardiff, and Stian Biong
    Being a person-centred researcher : principles and methods for doing research in a person-centred way / Gaby Jacobs, Famke van Lieshout, Marit Borg, and Ottar Ness
    Research into person-centred healthcare technology : a plea for considering humanisation dimensions / Gaby Jacobs, Teatske van der Zijpp, Famke van Lieshout, and Sandra van Dulmen
    A participatory approach to person-centred research : maximising opportunities for recovery / Larry Davidson, Chyrell Bellamy, Elizabeth Flanagan, Kimberly Guy, and Maria O'Connell
    Co-creating flourishing research practices through person-centred research : a focus on persons living with dementia / Kirsti Skovdahl and Jan Dewing
    Leadership research : a person-centred agenda / Tom Eide and Shaun Cardiff
    Staffing structures for effectiveness in person-centred care : the rafaela system / Lisbeth Fagerström
    Giving voice to 'hard to reach groups' in healthcare research : a narrative approach / Catherine Buckley
    Promoting health across the lifespan : a systems approach / Elisabeth Fosse, Steffen Torp, and Ingun Stang
    How knowledge developed through ethnography may inform person-centred healthcare practices / Kristin Briseid, Astrid Skatvedt and Brendan McCormack
    Person-centred technology-supported interventions / Sandra van Dulmen, Espen Brembo, Janne Dugstad, and Hilde Eide
    Learning to be an effective person-centred practitioner / Caroline Williams and Brendan McCormack
    Doing eye and vision research in a person-centred way / Rigmor C. Baraas, Lene A. Hagen, Hilde R. Pedersen, and Jon V. B. Gjelle
    Person-centred communication research : systematic observation of real life practice / Hilde Eide, Linda Hafskjold, Vibeke Sundling, and Sandra van Dulmen
    Introducing sex and gender-sensitive person-centred healthcare research / Stina Öresland and Sylvia Määttä
    Future directions for person-centred healthcare research / Sandra van Dulmen, Brendan McCormack, Hilde Eide, Kirsti Skovdal, and Tom Eide.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Jan Dewing, Brendan McCormack, Tanya McCance.
    Summary: This book is the first ever to offer a contemporary collection of different perspectives on person-centredness in international doctoral nursing research. The research in the book is based on the ideas and values of personhood and person-centeredness, which have been used and can be seen to guide research approaches, inform research designs and theorize research findings. Further, a specific framework for person-centred nursing is embedded throughout the research studies presented in the text. The Person-centred Nursing Framework (PCNF) developed by Brendan McCormack and Tanya McCance in 2010, is recognized as a nursing theory and this book further develops it as a basis for research and for advancing person-centredness in nursing. The framework informs all stages of the research process, from design through to dissemination. The book is structured into a number of highly engaging chapters written by doctoral candidates, and recently graduated candidates. The opening and closing chapters, written by the editors, place the subsequent chapters in a global context of person-centredness and nursing. The potential for person-centred nursing research to be a global movement is recognized and debated. The subsequent chapters lead readers through philosophical ideas, methodologies and methods whilst also offering reflective and honest insights into learning how to become a person-centred researcher. This field is growing and developing but yet there is no specific book available. As a result, researchers spend considerable time and effort translating existing research methodologies into person-centred perspectives. This book fills this gap and acts as a key resource for future nurse researchers. The text is intended for, and benefits nursing doctoral candidates, masters candidates and academic staff who teach and supervise research candidates; it may also appeal to other graduate learners. The book has international contributions which makes it appealing internationally.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chapter 1. Person-centred Nursing Research Principles
    Chapter 2. The Person-centred Nursing Framework and Nursing Research
    Chapter 3. Coming to know Personhood: philosophical 'dates'
    Chapter 4. Overviews of person-centered research: selected specific research examples.
    Chapter 5. Developing theoretical frameworks: integrating specific values and principles into research
    Chapter 6. Methodologies for Person-centred Nursing Research
    Chapter 7. Knowing how to act
    person centred research methods
    Chapter 8. Knowing, Being and Becoming in person-centred research (action research chapter).
    Chapter 9. Phenomenological and hermeneutic approaches
    Chapter 10. Experimentation and Quasi- experimentation in person-centred research
    Chapter 11. Multiple and mixed methods approaches
    Chapter 12. Person-centredness in education research
    Chapter 13. Adopting a person-centred approach in doctoral supervision
    Chapter 14. Summary chapter: facing the future with confidence.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Pei-Yun Sabrina Hsueh, Thomas Wetter, Xinxin Zhu, editors.
    Summary: This book clarifies consumer and personal health informatics and their relevance to precision medicine and healthcare applications. Personal Health Informatics covers a broad definition of this emerging field, with individuals not simply consuming health but as active participants, researchers and designers in the healthcare ecosystem. The world of health informatics is constantly changing given the ever-increasing variety and volume of health data, care delivery models that shift from fee-for-service to value-based care, new entrants in the ecosystem and the evolving regulatory decision landscape. These changes have increased the importance of the role of patients in research studies for understanding work processes and activities, and the design and implementation of health information systems. Therefore, personal health informatics now provide research tools and protocols to engage within individual contexts when developing solutions, which can improve clinical practice, patient engagement and public health. Personal Health Informatics offers a snapshot of this emerging field, supported by the methodological, practical, legal and ethical perspectives of researchers and practitioners. In addition to being a research reader, this book provides pragmatic insights for practitioners in designing, implementing and evaluating personal health informatics in healthcare settings. It represents an excellent reader for students in all clinical disciplines and biomedical and health informatics to learn from the case studies provided in this emerging field.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Overview
    Section I: The State-of-the-Art Novel Care Delivery Models
    Section II: Methods for Translating Biomedical Research and Real-World Evidence into Patient-Centric Precision Health Application
    Section III: Methods for Patient-Centric Design
    Section IV: Ethics, Bias, Privacy, and Fairness
    Acknowledgment
    Contents
    About the Editors and Contributors
    About the Editors
    About the Contributors
    Part I: The State-of-the-Art Novel Care Delivery Models
    Chapter 1: E-enabled Patient-Provider Communication in Context
    Introduction Case Example #1: Development of the E-Health Care Model and Implementation in the PreClinic in Denmark
    Evaluation of ECM Accomplishments
    Case Example #2: Task-Sharing Mental Health Primary Care Delivery Model Via Smart Phones in Pacific Island Countries
    The Study
    Summary of Results
    Challenges and Opportunities
    Future Directions
    Case Example #3: Colombia: Prenatal Care and Early Risk Identification
    A Systems Model for E-Health Enabled Collaborative Care Delivery
    Collaborative Care Delivery in the Time of COVID-19
    Lessons on Collaborative Care Delivery from COVID-19 Discussion
    References
    Chapter 2: Direct Primary Care: A New Model for Patient-Centered Care
    Primary Care, the Patient-Centered Medical Home, and Direct Primary Care
    Primary Care
    Patient Centered Medical Home
    Direct Primary Care
    Accreditation Process
    Experience of the Patient and Provider
    The Patient-Provider-Payer Shift
    The Implications for DPC in Practice
    Mixed Methods Research Methodology
    Qualitative Methods
    Quantitative Methods
    Data Types
    Data Quality
    Results
    Timely Access
    Effectiveness
    Patient-Centered
    Efficiency/Affordability Conclusions, Implications, and Future Directions
    References
    Chapter 3: Smart Homes for Personal Health and Safety
    Introduction
    Sense4Safety: Using Smart Home Technology to Reduce Fall Risk
    Falls and MCI as Significant Public Health Problems
    Rationale for Passive In-Home Sensing
    Use of Passive Monitoring Technology for Early Detection of Functional Changes
    The Sense4Safety Intervention
    Ethical Implications
    Conclusion
    References
    Chapter 4: Health App by Prescription: The German Nation-Wide Model
    Introduction
    Overview
    German Healthcare System Licensing and Marketing Authorization
    Reimbursement by the Statutory Health Insurance (SHI)
    New Digital Services in the German Healthcare System
    Electronic Health Card and Personal Health Records (2000-2020)
    Digital Health Applications (Since 2020)
    First Experiences with DiGAs
    Acceptance and Knowledge About DiGA Among German Healthcare Professionals and Citizens
    DiGA as a New Business Model for Healthcare Start-ups and New Strategic Partnerships
    Conclusion
    Glossary
    References
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Marie Benedict and Victoria Christopher Murray.
    Summary: "The remarkable, little-known story of Belle da Costa Greene, J. P. Morgan's personal librarian-who became one of the most powerful women in New York despite the dangerous secret she kept in order to make her dreams come true, from New York Times bestselling author Marie Benedict and acclaimed author Victoria Christopher Murray. In her twenties, Belle da Costa Greene is hired by J. Pierpont Morgan to curate a collection of rare manuscripts, books, and artwork for his newly built Morgan Library. Belle becomes a fixture on the New York society scene and one of the most powerful people in the art and book world, known for her impeccable taste and shrewd negotiating for critical works as she helps build a world-class collection. But Belle has a secret, one she must protect at all costs. She was born not Belle da Costa Greene but Belle Marion Greener. She is the daughter of Richard Greener, the first Black graduate of Harvard and well-known advocate for equality. Belle's complexion isn't dark because of her alleged Portuguese heritage that lets her pass as white-her complexion is dark because she is African American. The Personal Librarian tells the story of an extraordinary woman, famous for her intellect, style, and wit, and shares the lengths she must go-for the protection of her family and her legacy-to preserve her carefully crafted white identity in the racist world in which she lives"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access 2021
    SUNet ID login required
  • Digital/Print
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    NCBI
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    T55.3.P75 W757 2016
    1
  • Digital
    Stefania Boccia [and 5 others], editors.
    Summary: Practitioners are increasingly adopting a personalised medicine approach to individually tailored patient care, especially disease diagnosis and treatment with the use of biomarkers. However, development and implementation of such approaches to chronic disease prevention need further investigation and concerted efforts for proper use in healthcare systems. This book provides high-quality, multidisciplinary knowledge from research in personalised medicine, specifically personalised prevention of chronic disease. It addresses different perspectives of prevention in the field, and is the outcome of a four-year work of the Personalized prevention of Chronic Disease (PRECeDI) Consortium, a multi-disciplinary and multi-professional team of experts. The Consortium jointly agreed to document and address the five aspects or domains of personalised medicine and prevention as individual chapters: Identification of biomarkers for the prevention of chronic disease Evaluation of predictive genomic applications Ethico-legal and policy issues surrounding personalised medicine Roles and responsibilities of stakeholders in informing healthy individuals on their genome: a sociotechnical analysis Identification of organisational models for the provision of predictive genomic applications The book focuses on the Consortium's recommendations that are derived from each of these domains based on up-to-date evidence and research that the authors write, follow, and systematically organise and report. Personalisation of health care is, eventually, a driver of innovation in research and healthcare systems. With this SpringerBrief on Personalised Health Care: Fostering Precision Medicine Advancements for Gaining Population Health Impact, the Consortium provides further evidence of the clinical validity and utility of personalised medicine with special emphasis on the prevention of chronic diseases. The book is a useful resource for policy makers, industry and healthcare professionals, scientists, technology-sector professionals, investors, citizens, and private companies that need proper advice to realise the potential of personalised medicine.

    Contents:
    Introductions
    Identification of biomarkers for the prevention of chronic disease
    Evaluation of predictive genomic applications
    Ethico-legal and policy issues surrounding personalised medicine
    Roles and responsibilities of stakeholders in informing healthy individuals on their genome: a sociotechnical analysis
    Identification of organisational models for the provision of predictive genomic applications --
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Sherif El-Khamisy, editor.
    Summary: "The mammalian genome is constantly challenged by exogenous and endogenous threats. Although much is known about the mechanisms that maintain genome integrity, little is known about the applications of this knowledge to combat human disease. The past 20 years has witnessed extensive research and progress in this area and scientists started to design new therapies harnessing individual genetic differences among patients to combatdegenerative disorders and cancer. We summarize these advancements and discuss perspectives for the future of personalized medicine"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Approaches for identifying novel targets in precision medicine: lessons from DNA repair / Dean T. Williams, Christopher J. Staples
    Nucleotide excision repair: from neurodegeneration to cancer / Anastasios Liakos, Matthieu D. Lavigne, Maria Fousteri
    Role of protein linked DNA breaks in cancer / Walaa R. Allam, Mohamed E. Ashour, Amr A. Waly, Sherif El-Khamisy
    The emerging role of proteomics in precision medicine: applications in neurodegenerative diseases and neurotrauma / Rana Alaaeddine, Mira Fayad, Eliana Nehme, Hisham F. Bahmad, Firas Kobeissy
    The role of nitric oxide from neurological disease to cancer / Ahmed Maher, Mohamed F. Abdel Rahman, Mohamed Z. Gad
    RNA nuclear export: from neurological disorders to cancer / Guillaume M. Hautbergue
    Can astrocytes be a target for precision medicine? / Chloe F. Allen, Pamela J. Shaw, Laura Ferraiuolo
    Mitochondrial diseases as model of neurodegeneration / Laila A. Selim, Heba Hassaan
    Personalised medicine: genome maintenance lessons learned from studies in yeast as a model organism / Arwa A. Abugable, Dahlia A. Awwad, Dalia Fleifel, Mohamed M. Ali, Sherif El-Khamisy [and others]
    The power of zebrafish in personalised medicine / Sarah Baxendale, Freek van Eeden, Robert Wilkinson
    Personalized medicine and resurrected hopes for the management of Alzheimer's disease: a modular approach based on GSK-3[beta] inhibitors / Reem K. Arafa, Nehal H. Elghazawy
    Regenerative medicine: advances from developmental to degenerative diseases / Nicholas F. Blair, Thomas J. R. Frith, Ivana Barbaric
    Gene therapy in the nervous system: failures and successes / Jayanth S. Chandran, Joseph M. Scarrott, Pamela J. Shaw, Mimoun Azzouz.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Danilo Garcia, Trevor Archer, Richard M. Kostrzewa, editors.
    Summary: Brain disorders (neurodevelopmental, neurodegenerative, and affective disorders) can be investigated, treated, and prevented using person-centered methods. Because researchers have not reached a clear consensus on whether or not personality is stable or changeable, it has been difficult to outline how to use these methods in the care of people with brain disorders. Thus, the first part aims to identify the ways in which brain disorders and personality are linked. The second part explores different person-centered approaches that can be incorporated in a healthcare or education setting to help people with various brain disorders and to promote physical, mental and social health. The third part focuses on challenges and new venues.

    Contents:
    Part 1 Chapter 1
    Personality and the Brain
    Chapter 2
    Personality Stability and Change in Alzheimer's Disease and Major Depressive Disorder
    Chapter 3
    Affect, Stress, and Neurodegenerative Onslaughts
    Chapter 4
    Aspects of Personality Traits and Changes in Different Stages of Dementia Disorders
    Chapter 5
    The Study of Personality Traits in the Blekinge part of the Swedish National Study on Aging and Care (SNAC-B)
    Chapter 6
    Neurodevelopmental Disorders, Temperament, and Character
    Part 2 Chapter 7
    Person-Centered Approaches
    Chapter 8
    A Case Study in Sweden: The Need of Person-Centered Methods in the Care of Dementia Patients with Severe Aggressive Behavior
    Chapter 9
    Life Narratives and Elderly Care
    Chapter 10
    Acting as a Person-Centered Approach: Theater for the Elderly
    Chapter 11
    Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder: a personalized approach
    Chapter 12
    Person-Centered Schools
    Chapter 13
    Integrating healthy personality development and educational practices: The case of student engagement with school
    PART 3 Chapter 14
    Current Directions in Psychiatric Classification: From the DSM to RDoC
    Chapter 15
    The Future of Person-Centered Care Services: Scientific, Measurement, and Practical Advancements in Personality and Brain Disorders.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Christoffer Johansen.
    Summary: A tremendous amount of research has been performed looking at the relationship between personality and disease. Research on this topic has been spread throughout scientific journals on psychology, behavioral health, psychoneuroimmunology, oncology, and epidemiology. Personality and Disease brings this research together in one place for the first time. With contributions from world experts, the book summarizes research findings on personality as it relates to cancer, heart disease, diabetes, asthma and allergies, dementia, and more. Is there such a thing as a cancer- prone personality? Do sadness, anger, stress, or shyness affect the likelihood that we will fall ill to specific diseases? Can we protect ourselves from disease through a positive outlook? This book will address both what we know, and what we persist in believing despite evidence to the contrary, and why such beliefs persist in the face of evidence.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Digital
    Masaki Mandai, editor.
    Summary: This book thoroughly illustrates the designed and tailored medical approaches for tumors of the female reproductive organ. The chapters explore different cancer species such as ovarian cancer, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, etc. Various treatment modalities such as immunotherapy and histotype-specific treatment are delivered, and it offers a chapter on how genome-wide analysis contributes to personalized treatment. It is essential to understand this concept because many molecular target drugs and the prevalence of genome-based analysis in clinical settings have enabled us to introduce valid precision medicine in the field of gynecologic oncology. Chapters explain the stream of transition from conventional standardized treatment to personalized treatment and address future perspectives. Personalization Gynecologic Oncology is a well-designed source for beginning to advanced oncologists, gynecologists, geneticists, genetic counselors, and nurses. Offering the latest treatment strategies, the Editor hopes the ideas presented here will be a foundation for further development in the field.

    Contents:
    1 Personalized treatment in ovarian cancer
    2 Carcinogenesis and personalization in hpv-associated precancer lesions of the cervix
    3 Personalized treatment for gestational trophoblastic tumor
    4 Personalized treatment in uterine sarcoma
    5 Clinical relevance of brca1/2 pathogenic variants and impaired dna repair pathways in ovarian carcinomas
    6 Personalized treatment in immunotherapy for gynecologic cancer
    7 Risk assessment and prevention strategies for hereditary gynecological cancers
    8 How genome-wide analysis contributes to personalized treatment in cancers including gynecologic cancers
    9 Personalized treatment of gynecological cancer according to age and symptom benefit.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Robert A. Norman, editor.
    Contents:
    Personalized Dermatology
    Genetic testing
    Evolutionary Dermatology
    Climate change and Skin Cancer
    Ecological Dermatology
    Human skin biodiversity and how it is changing
    The Future of Dermatology
    Combining diagnostic skills with genetic results.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    edited by Pedro Gambus, Jan Hendrickx.
    Summary: "Because there is no disease condition that can be treated with the administration of anaesthetic medications, the specialty of anaesthesiology does not possess a curative effect in itself. Nevertheless, achieving the state of anaesthesia or the anaesthetic state relies completely on the use of drugs. Drugs used in anaesthesia are very powerful and able to transiently break the most deeply rooted physiological defence mechanisms. Some of the effects induced are lack of consciousness, absence of response to pain, absence of muscle tone, immobility, lack of breathing, dysfunction of the autonomous nervous system, to name just a few. Some of these effects might be considered target or "therapeutic effects", such as unconsciousness, analgesia or immobility, but others are "side effects" that are induced because of the relative low specificity of currently used anaesthetic drugs"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2019
  • Digital
    editor, Mark C. Houston.
    Summary: "Personalized and Precision Integrative Cardiovascular Medicine embraces a systems-oriented medical approach that works to identify and understand the underlying or root causes of disease. It takes into account the personalization of healthcare as each patient is unique. It employs in-depth health history taking, scientific testing and environmental and lifestyle review. It is used as disease prevention and for the treatment of chronic conditions (such as heart disease) through nutrition, supplementation, life-style changes, and stress management. Integrative Medicine is a model of healthcare in which conventional Western medicine is integrated with non-conventional or alternative modalities. And Metabolic Medicine/Cardiology is a newer field of medicine which concentrates on the prevention, management and treatment of cardiovascular disease at the cellular level through biochemical interventions. All three of these complementary approaches to Cardiovascular Medicine will be covered in this new title"-- Provided by publisher
    Digital Access LWW Health Library 2020
  • Digital
    Terrence Adam, Constantin Aliferis, editors.
    Summary: This book adopts an integrated and workflow-based treatment of the field of personalized and precision medicine (PPM). Outlined within are established, proven and mature workflows as well as emerging and highly-promising opportunities for development. Each workflow is reviewed in terms of its operation and how they are enabled by a multitude of informatics methods and infrastructures. The book goes on to describe which parts are crucial to discovery and which are essential to delivery and how each of these interface and feed into one-another. Personalized and Precision Medicine Informatics provides a comprehensive review of the integrative as well as interpretive nature of the topic and brings together a large body of literature to define the topic and ensure that this is the key reference for the topic. It is an unique contribution that is positioned to be an essential guide for both PPM experts and non-experts, and for both informatics and non-informatics professionals.

    Contents:
    Intro; Acknowledgments; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Introduction;
    Chapter 1: Birth of a Discipline: Personalized and Precision Medicine (PPM) Informatics; Introduction to PPM and Its Relationship with Informatics; Purpose of the Present Book; Purpose of Present Volume; Contents and Structure of the Book; Classical Personalized and Precision Medicine; Newer and Emerging Forms of PPM; References; Part II: Classical PPM;
    Chapter 2: Clinical Risk Assessment and Prediction; Overview of Early PPM Modalities; Growth Curves; Risk Factors; Delivery of Classical PPM Tools at Point of Care Modeling Disease Severity and RiskDisease Staging; Prediction Models; Modeling Risk of Binary Events; Evaluating Prediction Models; Selection of New Risk Factors; Nomograms; Looking Forward; References;
    Chapter 3: Principles of Guideline-Driven PPM Informatics; Guidelines Driving Precision Care; Computable Guidelines and Informatics Considerations; References;
    Chapter 4: Genetic Counseling at the Intersection of Clinical Genetics and Informatics; Introduction; Genetic Counseling: Traditional Roles and Service Delivery Models; Genetic Testing; Genetic Testing Results; Carrier Screening Newborn ScreeningDiagnostic and Predictive Testing; Pharmacogenomics; Genetic Counseling Practice Guidelines; Genetic Counseling Educational Standards; Ethical and Legal Considerations; Autonomy, Beneficence, Non-maleficence, and Justice; The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); The Genetic Information Nondiscrimination Act of 2008; Duty to Warn; Expanding Roles and Service Delivery Models for Genetic Counseling; Genetic Counselors in Utilization Management; Genetic Counselors in the Public Health Setting; Conclusion; References
    Chapter 5: Fundamentals of Drug Metabolism and Pharmacogenomics Within a Learning Healthcare System Workflow PerspectiveIntroduction; Foundations of Pharmacogenomics for Precision Medicine Informatics; Origins of Pharmacogenetics; Modern Pharmacogenomics; Learning Healthcare System Workflow for Pharmacogenomics; Reverse Translation: Advancing Pharmacogenomics Knowledge with Real World Data; Sequencing Technologies and Data Pre-processing; Publicly Available Data Sources and Resources; Translational Informatics Study Design; Agnostic Signal Detection and Dimensionality Reduction Signal Tuning and ValidationSignal Augmentation and a Priori Knowledge; Forward Translation: Augmenting Clinical Practice with Actionable Pharmacogenomics Knowledge; "N of 1" and Comparable Populations; Signal Robustness and Sequencing Technology Considerations; Knowledge Management and Representation; Computational Tools to Navigate Signals; Appropriate Conveyance of Knowledge; Future Directions; Summary and Conclusion; References;
    Chapter 6: The Growing Medication Problem: Perspective from Industry; Introduction; RightMed® Comprehensive Solution; Precision Medicine Information Challenge
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    M. Mohamed Essa, M. Walid Qoronfleh, editors.
    Summary: The book focuses on implications of traditional and processed foods for autism spectrum disorder (ASD) intervention and management. Numerous phytonutrients and pharmacologically active compounds in edible natural products and diet could influence and offer protection to neuronal dysfunction that occurs due to ASD. The neuroprotective effects of various fruits, vegetables, nuts and seeds phytochemicals, and other natural bioactive ingredients against ASD and related conditions are discussed. Topics such as the possible neuroprotective mechanism of action of these foods and the therapeutic role of antioxidants in relation to ASD are addressed. This book also highlights the scope of using anti-inflammatory agents and antioxidants to promote neurogenesis and improve other symptoms in ASD. It emphasizes personalized nutritional approaches with dietary management of neurodevelopmental disorders/ASD cases. Information in this book is relevant to researchers in the field of complementary and alternative medicine, nutraceuticals, neuroscience, agriculture, nutrition, and food science. This volume is beneficial to students of varying levels, and across multiple disciplines.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction Food and Brain
    2. Food and Behavior
    3. Food and Psychological Wellbeing
    4. Food and Cognition
    5. Autism and Food
    6. Healthy Brains: Types of Food and their Active Pharmacological Ingredients
    5. Dieting: Importance of Diet and Diet Types
    6. Nutrigenomics
    7. Epigenetics
    8. Gut Microbiota (microbiome)
    9. Personalized Nutrition
    10. Vegetables
    11. Fruits
    12. Nuts, Seeds and Spices
    13. Grains [Oats, Barley & Quinoa]
    14. Seafood [fish like Salmon, Oyster, Sea vegetables (algae)]
    15. Other
    16. Autism Management through Food and Diet
    17. Personalized Nutrition Therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Travis L. Holloway, Ismail Jatoi.
    Contents:
    Personalized management of breast cancer / Travis L. Holloway & Ismail Jatoi
    Diagnosis and biomarkers / Aysegul Sahin & Alexandra Shaye Brown
    Molecular subtypes of breast cancer / Henry O. Ebili, A. Olayiwola Oluwasola & Olufunmilayo I. Olopade
    Surgery and radiotherapy : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Travis Holloway & Ismail Jatoi
    Hormone-blocking therapy : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Annie R. Su & Mothaffar F. Rimawi
    EGF receptor inhibitors : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Sean Warsch, Gabriel Tinoco, Stefan Glück, Kiran Avancha & Alberto J. Montero
    Antiangiogenic therapy : patient selection and clinical outcomes / Sheeba Irshad, Andrew Tutt & Paul Ellis
    Current guidelines of breast cancer management / Cristina Falci, Zora Baretta & Silvio Monfardini
    Management algorithms of breast cancer / Paolo Carli, Loredana Militello, Elena Torrisi, Alessando Tuzi & Andrea Veronesi
    Index.
    Digital Access TandFonline [2014]
  • Digital
    Jorge Hidalgo, Robert C Hyzy, Ahmed Mohamed Reda Taha, Yasser Younis A. Tolba, editors.
    Summary: In dealing with the unprecedented COVID-19 pandemic, there are an increased number of patients requiring personalized management as the disease pathology varies. With variable lung compliance and airway resistance as well as the severity of the disease, one size will not fit all patients. This book is problem-oriented with evidence-based discussions of the daily encountered scenarios in the ICU for mechanically ventilated patients, dealing with the pathology, monitoring and troubleshooting facing intensivists daily. These scenarios are managed utilizing a goal-directed approach and algorithms to achieve these goals. All chapters contain an explanation of a different solution illustrating the respiratory mechanics, physiology and pathology involved in such a scenario. Each chapter also closes with a take-home message to summarize the content. In addition to describing the ventilation of different patient categories, this text also features ventilation cases specific to COVID-19 including airway management in the enhanced air born isolated patient, pulmonary embolism, different states of shock and differential lung ventilation. There is also a specific chapter on monitoring mechanical ventilation with point of care ultrasound, which is an available modality in most ICUs. Another unique chapter describes how to connect more than one patient to one ventilator in case of a shortage of machines. Written by experts in the field, Personalized Mechanical Ventilation is a timely and valuable resource for critical care physicians, nurses and respiratory therapists on the front lines of both COVID-19 and day-to-day care of mechanically ventilated patients in the ICU.

    Contents:
    Respiratory Physiology and mechanics at the bedside
    Principals of Mechanical Ventilation
    Understanding Circuit, Filters and Humidification
    Airway management during Mechanical Ventilation COVID 19
    Non-invasive ventilation, AVAPS and high-flow nasal Cannula
    Modes of Mechanical Ventilation
    Acute respiratory failure
    Mechanical Ventilation in trauma patient
    Mechanical ventilation in Obese patient
    Postoperative Mechanical ventilation (fast track)
    Guidelines to set the ventilator for (COVID-19)
    Prone position during Mechanical Ventilation
    Using one ventilator for multiple patients
    Ventilator associated pneumonia
    Mechanical ventilation during pregnancy
    The Art of Weaning and Extubation
    Mechanical ventilation in shock state
    Respiratory monitoring Clinical and technical consideration
    Role of Point of Care Ultrasound during Mechanical Ventilation
    Acute respiratory distress and ARDS like syndromes
    Patient-ventilator dyssynchrony
    Unilateral lung disease and differential lung ventilation
    Obstructive airways disease
    Mechanical ventilation during ECMO (VV/VA)
    Mechanical ventilation in Neurocritical care patient
    Common Troubleshooting in daily practice.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Ali Dabbagh, editor.
    Summary: This book discusses the current and future impact of cellular and molecular medicine (CMM) on anesthesiology and perioperative medicine. It covers the topic from a translational perspective and describes the relevance of CMM to daily clinical practice. Taking a bench-to-bedside approach, chapters examine topics including perioperative acute and chronic management, perioperative organ protection, and novel pharmaceuticals. Personalized Medicine in Anesthesia, Pain and Perioperative Medicine is aimed at anesthesiologists and pain physicians, and will also be of interest to pharmacists and those working in cellular and molecular medicine.

    Contents:
    The role of personalized medicine in current and future clinical practice; the impact of cellular and molecular medicine in perioperative care.- Personalized anesthesia and genomics, transcriptomics, proteomics and metabolomics of anesthesia and pain management.- Personalized anesthesia in central and peripheral nervous system.- Personalized cardiac anesthesia.- Personalized anesthesia for lungs and respiratory tract.- Personalized medicine in pain management.- Personalized anesthesia for pediatrics and neonates.- Personalized anesthesia for musculoskeletal system.- Personalized anesthesia for renal and genitourinary system.- Personalized anesthesia for GI tract and hepatobiliary system.- Personalized critical care medicine.- Personalized anesthesia in hematologic and coagulation system.- Personalized medicine in anesthetic pharmacology.- Personalized medicine and perioperative stress response modification.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Peter J. Polverini, editor.
    Contents:
    Emerging Role of Personalized Medicine in Oral Health: Personalized Oral Health Care and the New Health Care Environment
    Omics Technology: Application to Oral Disease Prevention, Disease Prediction and Diagnosis
    Omics-Based Technology Development
    Personalized Medicine in Dental Practice: Personalized Oral Medicine and Transformation of Dental Practice
    Health Information Technology and Integrative Medicine
    Comprehensive Genetic Testing in Dental Practice
    Biomarkers for Individualized Oral Cancer Therapy
    Metabolomics and Oral Disease Diagnosis
    Companion Diagnostics in the Dental Office
    Genomics of Dental Caries and Caries Risk Assessment
    Genomics of Periodontal Risk Assessment and Disease Progression
    Personalized Oral Medicine and Public Health: Personalized Oral Medicine and Personalized Health Insurance
    The Economics of Personalized Oral Medicine
    Educating Dental Students and Dental Practitioners for the Practice of Personalized Oral Medicine
    Personalized Oral Health Care and the Future Oral Health Care Workforce
    Personalized Oral Medicine and the Global Diagnostic Market Place
    Opportunities and Challenges Shaping the Future of Personalized Oral Health Care.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Ives Cavalcante Passos, Benson Mwangi and Flávio Kapczinski.
    Summary: This book integrates the concepts of big data analytics into mental health practice and research. Mental disorders represent a public health challenge of staggering proportions. According to the most recent Global Burden of Disease study, psychiatric disorders constitute the leading cause of years lost to disability. The high morbidity and mortality related to these conditions are proportional to the potential for overall health gains if mental disorders can be more effectively diagnosed and treated. In order to fill these gaps, analysis in science, industry, and government seeks to use big data for a variety of problems, including clinical outcomes and diagnosis in psychiatry. Multiple mental healthcare providers and research laboratories are increasingly using large data sets to fulfill their mission. Briefly, big data is characterized by high volume, high velocity, variety and veracity of information, and to be useful it must be analyzed, interpreted, and acted upon. As such, focus has to shift to new analytical tools from the field of machine learning that will be critical for anyone practicing medicine, psychiatry and behavioral sciences in the 21st century. Big data analytics is gaining traction in psychiatric research, being used to provide predictive models for both clinical practice and public health systems. As compared with traditional statistical methods that provide primarily average group-level results, big data analytics allows predictions and stratification of clinical outcomes at an individual subject level. Personalized Psychiatry – Big Data Analytics in Mental Health provides a unique opportunity to showcase innovative solutions tackling complex problems in mental health using big data and machine learning. It represents an interesting platform to work with key opinion leaders to document current achievements, introduce new concepts as well as project the future role of big data and machine learning in mental health. .
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Nico van Weert, Jan Hazelzet, editors.
    Summary: This book highlights the work of pioneers in this field, in order to inspire their peers, healthcare leaders and an interested audience. Prior to the respective care practices, the authors describe the core of personalized care and illustrate its connections to value-driven care and evidence-based medicine. The last part of the book addresses organizational and other conditions under which personalized care can thrive. In the Netherlands, substantial work is being done on value-driven care and more is currently being discussed. This book focuses on the benefits of value-driven care for patients and healthcare providers alike. To do so, it explores a range of representative cases and scenarios, such as: Scenario 1: You are able to surgically remove the most difficult tumors and find out one day that you don't need to do so in all indicated patients. Later you can find out how to recognize when surgery isn't the best treatment for certain patients. And now your team has a fixed routine to find the optimal choice together with the patient. Scenario 2: You consider yourself to be a patient-centered doctor who is really in touch with their patients--until you ask them to report for themselves on how they are doing. In the "patient-reported outcomes" you see that you have completely missed an important aspect. Later, you can structurally integrate this into your outpatient clinic. Scenario 3: In line with the planning principles of your hospital, you see chronic patients once a year--and of course also 'as needed'--until your data shows you that you see patients too early or too late, but rarely when it would be most helpful. Later you can discover how to offer your consultation exactly on time--based on early signals and often even before the patient calls the clinic. This is what value-driven care is all about: care is of more significance to the patient when it is tailored to his or her unique situation. Recognizing the patient's needs, preferences and values, and structurally adapting care accordingly--that is the noble profession of value-driven care, which takes us an important step closer to the ideal of personalized care.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Personalized care as value-driven care
    Evidence Based Medicine and personalized care
    The IBD coach for person-oriented care
    Onco-geriatric MDO is based on treatment goals of older oncology patients
    I repair: EHealth application in the interest of the patient, healthcare professional and the BV. The Netherlands. a school example of value-driven care!
    Metabolic network for customized prevention and treatment
    Personal attention for the patient in Zorgpad Pituitary tumor
    Value-driven care for chronic kidney damage
    From process improvement aimed at quality and safety to a change process with care providers and patients to achieve personalized care: Radboudumc Basis op Orde
    Care monitor supports outcome-oriented care for patients with head and neck cancer
    Cleft lip and palate
    Turner
    Breast Cancer in the Region with Dashboard / The State of Patient-Centered Breast Cancer Care: an Academic Center's Experience and Perspective
    Pregnancy and childbirth care
    Better experiences of rheumatism patients through value-driven patient journey
    Organizational bed for person-centered care
    Interprofessional learning and working
    With regional funding towards transparent and personalized care. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Masakazu Toi, Eric Winer, John Benson, Suzanne Klimberg, editors.
    Contents:
    Part I Treatment for the Patients Having Breast Cancer High-Risk
    Chapter I Risk-Reducing Surgery for Breast Cancer Patients with BRCA Mutations
    Chapter 2 Prophylactic Risk Reducing Surgery for Breast Cancer
    Chapter 3 Merits and Demerits of Practice for Hereditary Breast and Ovarian Cancer Syndrome (Advices and Issues)
    Part II Axillary Treatment
    Chapter 4 Sentinel Lymph Node Biopsy and Neoadjuvant Chemotherapy in Breast Cancer Patients
    Chapter 5 Axillary Reverse Mapping (ARM) as a Means to Reduce Lymphedema During Sentinel Lymph Node or Axillary Node Dissection
    Chapter 6 Ultrasound for Axillary Staging
    Chapter 7 One Step Nucleic Acid Amplification(OSNA)Assay for Primary Breast Cancer
    Chapter 8 Management of the Clinically Node-Negative Axilla in Primary Breast Cancer
    Chapter 9 Lymphatic Mapping and Optimization of Sentinel Lymph Node Dissection
    Part III Radiation therapy
    Chapter 10 Personalization of Radiotherapy for Breast Cancer
    Chapter 11 New Technologies in Radiation Therapy
    Chapter 12 Radiotherapy Following Neoadjuvant Chemotherapy in Locally Advanced Breast Cancer
    Part IV Preoperative Hormone Therapy
    Chapter 13 Novel Translational Research of Neoadjuvant Endocrine Therapy
    Chapter 14 Alterations of Biomarkers by Neoadjuvant Endocrine Therapy
    Part V Preoperative chemotherapy
    Chapter 15 Essence of Neoadjuvant Therapy
    Chapter 16 The challenge to Overcome Triple Negative Breast Cancer Heterogeneity
    Chapter 17 Surgical Management of Breast Cancer after Preoperative Systemic Treatment
    Chapter 18 Imaging of Tumor Response by Preoperative Systemic Treatment
    Part VI Preoperative anti-HER2 therapy
    Chapter 19 Human Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor (HER) Family Molecular Structure
    Chapter 20 Locoregional Therapy Following Neoadjuvant Therapy for HER2-Positive Breast Cancer: Opportunities and Challenges
    Part VII Mathematical prediction/assessment model
    Chapter 21 Nomograms to predict positive resection margin and to predict 3 or more positive lymph nodes
    Chapter 22 Practical Use of Nomograms
    Chapter 23 Data Mining and Mathematical Model Development.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Thomas Bieber, Frank Nestle, editors.
    Summary: This book is a quick reference guide to the new, more personalized approaches to the management of skin disorders that have emerged as a result of progress in our understanding of the genetic background and pathophysiology of skin diseases and the diversity of mechanisms underlying their clinical heterogeneity. A wide range of personalized and targeted therapies are described, including those for different skin cancers, chronic inflammatory skin diseases, and autoimmune diseases. In addition, readers will find that the book documents how research results in personalized medicine can be effectively transferred to dermatological practice and looks forward to future treatments that might be developed on the basis of recent research findings. The authors are all recognized experts in the field, and the text is presented in a reader-friendly format and well illustrated.

    Contents:
    Definition and Scientific Background of Personalized Management
    Dermato-Oncology: Malignant Melanoma
    A Personalized Approach to the Treatment of Basal Cell Carcinoma
    From Single Actinic Keratosis to Field Cancerization
    Cutaneous T Cell Lymphoma
    Merkel-Cell Carcinoma and Sarcomas
    Chronic Inflammatory Skin Diseases: Personalized Management of Atopic Dermatitis
    Immunosuppressors or Biologicals for Distinct Forms of Psoriasis?
    Autoimmune Diseases: Acknowledging the Clinical Heterogeneity of Lupus Erythematosus
    Bullous Diseases
    Vasculitis.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    [edited by] Stanley J. Szefler, Fernando Holguin, Michael E. Wechsler.
    Summary: Personalized medicine is a rapidly emerging area in health care, and asthma management lends itself particularly well to this new development. This practical resource by Dr. Stanley J. Szefler helps you navigate the many asthma medication options available to your patients, as well as providing insights into those which may be introduced within the next several years.

    Contents:
    A population management model of asthma and allergy / Tari Haahtela, Olof Selroos
    Population health management / Monica J. Federico, Katherine Johnston
    Management of severe asthma in adults / Eileen Wang, Nicole Barberis, Rohit Katial
    Management and prevention of severe asthma in children / Anne M. Fitzpatrick
    Exhaled nitric oxide as a biomarker for asthma in children / Joseph D. Spahn, Jonathan Malka
    Blood and sputum eosinophils as a biomarker for selecting and adjusting asthma medication / Claudia L. Gaefke, Tara F. Carr
    Regulatory aspects of pediatric biomarkers for assessing medication response / Gilbert J. Burckart, Dionna J. Green
    Discovery and validation of new biomarkers fo personalizing asthma therapy / Kian Fan Chung
    Pharmacogenomics and applications to asthma management / Emily J. Pennington, Michael E. Wechsler, Victor E. Ortega
    Environmental assessment and control / Perdita Permaul, Wanda Phipatanakul
    Phenotype and genotype determinants of asthma treatments / Fernando Holguin
    Predicting and preventing asthma exacerbations / Dr. Heather Hoch, Dr. Andrew H. Lui
    School-centered asthma programs / Lisa Cicutto
    Systems biology approaches to asthma management / Yasmeen Nkrumah-Elie, Nichole Reisdorph
    The microbiome in asthma / Yvonne J. Huang
    Preventing the development of asthma / Jeffrey R. Stokes, Leonard B. Bacharier
    Identifying and preventing the progression of asthma to chronic obstructive pulmonary disease / Padmaja Subbarao, Malcolm R. Sears
    Imaging procedures and bronchial thermoplasty for asthma assessment and intervention / Shweta Sood, Mario Castro
    Future directions in asthma management / Stanley J. Szefler, Michael E. Wechsler.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    by Dennis L. Dresang.
    Contents:
    Part Part I: Introduction
    chapter 1 Introduction: Personnel Management in Government Agencies and Nonprofit Organizations
    part Part II: Public Policies for Personnel Management in Government Agencies and Nonprofit Organizations
    chapter 2 The Development of the Merit System
    chapter 3 Ethics, Rights, and Responsibilities
    chapter 4 Diversity
    chapter 5 Productivity
    chapter 6 Organization for Personnel Management
    part Part III: Organizational Needs
    chapter 7 Succession Planning
    chapter 8 Position Analysis and Job Evaluation
    chapter 9 Performance Evaluation
    chapter 10 Selecting Employees
    part Part IV: Employee Needs
    chapter 11 Employee Training and Development
    chapter 12 Health and Safety
    chapter 13 Discipline and Dismissal
    chapter 14 Compensation
    chapter 15 Collective Bargaining
    part Part V: Conclusion
    chapter 16 Summary and Conclusions.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2017
  • Digital
    Mayuki Aibiki, Susumu Yamashita, editors.
    Summary: This book presents a valuable new perspective on Post-Cardiac Arrest Syndrome (PCAS), which was defined as system failure following whole-body ischemia-reperfusion injuries by the 2008 International Liaison Committee on Resuscitation. Recently, improving the survival rate of PCAS has become a major priority all over the world. A Perspective on Post-Cardiac Arrest Syndrome addresses various aspects, including: neurological outcomes in non-convulsive status epilepticus, target temperature management, interventions for PCAS after acute coronary syndrome, the significance of measuring lactate clearance, a specific scoring system in prognostication for PCAS, therapeutic indications for suicide hanging cases. This book will help a broad readership, including emergency physicians, intensivists, cardiologists and neurologists treating PCAS patients, to understand the history, current issues and future challenges in PCAS, presented by respected experts in this field.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Perumana R. Sudhakaran, editor ; co-edited by Oommen V. Oommen, M. Radhakrishna Pillai.
    Summary: Being a complex disease that affects millions of people world over, cancer research has assumed great significance. Translational cancer research transforms scientific discoveries in the laboratory or population studies into clinical application to reduce incidence of cancer, morbidity and mortality. It is becoming increasingly evident that cancer is a preventable disease. The IVth International Symposium on Translational Cancer Research held in Udaipur, India in December 2011, discussed various aspects of the biological processes in cancer cells and approaches to cancer prevention.

    Contents:
    1. Nutrition in Cancer: Evidence Based Nutrition Recommendations in Cancer Patients and Survivors
    2. Tumor Stem Cell Enrichment by Anticancer Drugs: A Potential Mechanism of Tumor Recurrence
    3. Curcumin: A potent candidate to be evaluated as a chemosensitizer in paclitaxel chemotherapy against cervical cancer
    4. Azadirachta indica (Neem) and Neem Limonoids as Anticancer Agents: Molecular Mechanisms and Targets
    5. In vitro studies on the antioxidant/antigenotoxic potential of aqueous fraction from Anthocephalus cadamba bark
    6. Possible involvement of Signal Transducer and Activator of Transcription-3 (STAT3) Signaling Pathway in the Initiation and Progression of Hepatocellular Carcinoma
    7. Simple Sequence Repeats In 5? and 3? flanking sequences of Cell Cycle Genes
    8. Mechanisms of Chemopreventive Activity of Sulforaphane
    9. Reciprocal relationship between VE-cadherin and Matrixmetalloproteinase expression in Endothelial cells and its Implications to Angiogenesis
    10. Androgen receptor expression in human thyroid cancer tissues: a potential mechanism underlying the gender bias in the incidence of thyroid cancers
    11. Novel co-ordination complexes of a few essential trace metals: Cytotoxic properties and lead identification for drug development for cancer
    12. Why Gallbladder Cancer is common in Gangetic Belt?
    13. Stress & Cancer Risk: The Possible Role of Work Stress.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Ena Ray Banerjee.
    Summary: "Perspectives in Inflammation Biology" outlines detailed studies using preclinical murine models in Inflammation. The book is meant for academicians, industry persons, research scholars and students alike. The detailed perspective for a beginner and the exhaustive methodologies and analyses outlined, for the veteran researcher, makes this book a unique link between someone who is thinking of embarking on a study of inflammation and one who is delving deep into this area of specialization. The book deals with asthma and allergy as specific disease areas of inflammation of the lung, aseptic peritonitis as a disease of systemic inflammation and details how each role player in its pathophysiology has a unique niche of activity. Data acquisition, sequentiality and analyses in context demonstrate how each role player is validated systematically to become a target for drug discovery. Methods and models used in the course of my work and their relevance will demonstrate to the researcher how a study can be developed from an idea. Further into a researcher's ongoing work, this book is meant to stimulate new questions and pave ways for better dissection of a phenomenon. The highlights of this book are the detailed tables tabulating sub species of immune cells, their inflammatory recruitment indices, their translation into tissue-to-tissue traffic of the inflammatory stimulus and the delicate interplay of resident structural cells, cells recruited from circulation, their feedback poiesis in bone marrow, their instruction in the lymphoid organs and tissues as well as the non-cellular mediators synthesized from corresponding genetic instruction. The book shall definitely help students and researchers how a disease can be simplified from its complex ramifications and network of implications and put back into perspective and the whole thing falls into place without an intimate understanding of the mechanism and the compelling circumstances that causes a disease, a drug hunter cannot hope to begin her quest. To find the Achilles heel and effectively neutralize the enemy!

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Pulmonary and Systemic inflammation
    Chapter 2. Preclinical models of acute and chronic models of lung inflammation
    Chapter 3. Studying the roles of some key molecules in acute allergic asthma
    Chapter 4. Role of integrins [alpha]4 and [alpha]2 onset and development of chronic allergic asthma in mice
    Chapter 5. Role of integrin [alpha]4 (VLA- Very Late Antigen 4) in lymphopoiesis by short and long term transplantation studies in genetic knockout model of mice
    Chapter 6. Studying the roles of some critical molecules in systemic inflammation.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Olav Giere.
    Summary: PRELIMINARY Although of high abundance, diversity and ecological importance, meiofauna is little covered by relevant scientific media. How can this negligence be overcome? The present treatise highlights promising meiofauna research fields, selected both from basic and applied science, as well as new methods that could strengthen the potential of meiobenthology. Selected recent meiofauna studies, often supported by rapidly advancing gene-based methods, underline the relevance and potential of meiobenthology revealing characteristics and harassments of ecosystems, not the least in extreme habitats. Also in the more classical domains such as taxonomy and phylogeny, progress in meiobenthos research defines a new and deeper scientific understanding.

    Contents:
    Intro; Preface and Acknowledgements; Contents; List of Figures; 1 Introduction; References; 2 Fields of General Scientific Importance and Public Interest; 1 New Areas, Novel Communities, Exotic Biotopes; 2 The Deep-Sea-More Than an Interesting 'No Man's Land'; 3 Newly Accessible Polar Regions; References; 3 Pollution and Meiofauna-Old Topics, New Hazards; 1 Water Acidification by CO2 Increase; 2 Microplastics and Plastic Fibres; 3 Oil Spills at the Deep-Sea Floor; 4 Petroleum Hydrocarbons and Groundwater Aquifers; References; 4 Future Trend Lines in Ecological Meiobenthos Research 1 Aspects of Biodiversity 2 Reflections on Distribution, Dispersal and Colonization; 3 Organismic Interactions-Meiofauna Between Microbiota and Macrofauna; References; 5 Physiology, Biochemistry and Meiofauna-A Rarely Touched Terrain; 1 Hypoxia, Anoxia and Hydrogen Sulphide-Fields of Challenge; 2 Temperature-A Principal Physiological Driver; 3 Fatty Acids and Stable Isotopes as Biomarkers; 4 Physiological Pathways Revealed by the Genetic Background; References; 6 Towards an Integrated Triad: Taxonomy, Morphology and Phylogeny; 1 Advances at the Methodological Basis 2 New Trends Reviving 'Old Morphology'3 Phylogeny and Evolution-Meiofauna at the Deep Nodes; References; 7 Epilogue; References
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    edited by Sang-Hie Lee, Merry Lynn Morris, Santo V. Nicosia.
    Summary: Performing Arts Medicine (PAM) is a growing area of specialization within the performing arts field, which addresses the multi-faceted health and wellness of performing artists. This sub-discipline within performing arts is interdisciplinary in nature, involving the expertise of performing arts educators and researchers, physicians and other health professionals. This first of its kind text appeals to a very wide audience that includes performing arts clinical practitioners and health science researchers as well as performing arts pedagogues and performing arts students. The first part of the text gives the reader an overview of the field and discusses over-arching themes and issues in PAM. Part two presents an array of music and dance research involving primarily case studies that address significant issues of concern for performing artists and have implications for pedagogical practice. Part three provides research-based perspectives derived from professionals sharing their in-practice experiences. Finally, part four describes useful PAM models of implementation supporting the needs of performing artists in different settings. Written by experts in the field, Perspectives in Performing Arts Medicine Practice is a valuable resource for performing arts physicians, educators and researchers.

    Contents:
    Overview of Performing Arts Medicine
    This Wide and Universal Stage: How Empathy and Presence Inform the Contribution of Theatrical Practice to the Physician's Art
    Best of Both Worlds: An Odyssey of Medicine and Music
    Current Health Issues of Performing Artists: Implications for Health Promotion
    Exploring the Intersections of Arts and Medicine through the Painters' Lens
    Development of an Exercise Program for the Prevention of Playing Related Musculoskeletal Problems among Violinists
    Nikolai Bernstein's Theory of Movement Construction as a Foundation of Flow in Piano Technique
    Breathing Techniques in Collegiate Vocalists: The Effects of the Mind-Body Integrated Exercise Program on Singers' Posture, Tension, Efficacy and Respiratory Function
    Health Benefits of Culturally Oriented Dance
    Analyzing the Use of the Fifth Position in Dance Training
    A Case Report: Using Multimodalities to Examine a Professional Pianist with Focal Dystonia
    ^Discrepancies in Pianists Experiences in Playing Acoustic and Digital Pianos
    Musculoskeletal and Associated Conditions in the Instrumental Musician
    Experiences in Music Performance Anxiety: Exploration of Pedagogical Instruction among Professional Musicians
    Distilling Dart: Minding Bodily Approaches to Performance Through a Framework for Integration and the Alexander Technique
    Individualizing Training for Dancers
    Creating a Motor Learning Model for Dance Training
    Voice and Dance Technique Integration: Triple Threat or Double Trouble?
    The Role of Nutrition in Injury Prevention among Ballet Dancers
    When Prevention Makes Good Music
    Exploring Traditional Chinese Medicine in Musician Health
    Youth Dance Fundamental Movement Skills and Assessment
    Promoting Resilience and Fostering Mental Health Wellness Among University Dance Students
    ^Development of A Multidisciplinary Approach to Wellness and Injury Management at an Intensive Youth Orchestra Summer Festival
    Clinical Care of Performing Arts Students in the University Setting: A Successful Model with Wide Potential.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Print
    Print
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Varies.
    Call number varies. Search for Perspectives in Psychiatry to find individual volumes of this title.
  • Digital
    edited by Arthur N. Popper and Richard R. Fay.
    Contents:
    A brief history of SHAR
    Structures, mechanisms, and energetics in temporal processing
    Human auditory cortex: in search of the flying Dutchman
    From cajal to the connectome: building a neuroanatomical framework for understanding the auditory system
    Recording from hair cells
    Three decades of tinnitus-related research
    The sense of hearing in fishes
    A quarter-century's perspective on a psychoacoustical approach to loudness
    Nonsyndromic deafness: it ain't necessarily so
    Evolving mechanosensory hair cells to hearing organs by altering genes and their expression: the molecular and cellular basis of inner ear and auditory organ evolution and development
    The implications of discharge regularity: my forty-year peek into the vestibular system
    Aging, hearing loss, and speech recognition: stop shouting, i can't understand you
    Cochlear mechanics, otoacoustic emissions, and medical olivocochlear efferents: twenty years of advances and controversies along the areas ripe for new work
    Examining fish in the sea: a European perspective
    The behavioral study of mammalian hearing
    Hearing in insects: the why, when, and how
    The cognitive auditory system: the role of learning in shaping the biology of the auditory system
    Fundamentals of hearing in amniote vertebrates
    Directional hearing in insects and other small animals: the physics of pressure-difference receiving ears
    Distributed cortical representation of sound locations
    Pitch: mechanisms underlying the pitch of pure and complex tones
    Unavoidably delayed: apersonal perspective of twenty years of research on a sound localization cue
    Size matters in hearing: how the auditory system normalizes the sounds of speech and music for source size
    A changing view of the auditory system obtained from the ears of bats
    From cave fish to pile driving: a tail of fish bioacoustics
    Current topics in the study of sound conduction to the inner ear
    From degenerative debris to neuronal tracing: an anterograde view of auditory circuits
    Adventures in bionic hearing
    My dull deaf ears: four millennia of acquired hearing loss
    What's the use of genetics?
    Advances in the understanding of binaural information processing: consideration of the stimulus as processed
    Temporal processing: observations on the psychophysics and modeling of temporal integration and temporal resolution
    Psychoacoustics and auditory perception
    Appendix. The first 49 volumes.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rita Borg Xuereb, Julie Jomeen, editors.
    Summary: The book Perspectives on Midwifery and Parenthood explores contemporary issues relating to parenthood and midwifery. This book bridges a gap in the literature, where it highlights the close and unique relationships that midwives, nurses, doctors, other health care professionals and students enjoy with women and men during their transition to parenthood. Midwives work in close contact with and address the diverse needs of women and men during one of the most critical life's transitions, preconception, pregnancy, childbirth and early parenting and its long term implications on the psychosocial, emotional, physical and spiritual wellbeing of parents and infants. The chapters cover the transition and preparation for parenthood, midwives and parental-fetal-tie in pregnancy, perinatal mental health, maternal well-being, infertility, repeated loss and surrogacy, supporting early parenting following preterm birth, adolescent pregnancy and early parenthood, social challenges and parenthood including drug and alcohol use in pregnancy, intimate partners violence, migrants and transition to parenthood, fathers transition to parenthood, diversity of family formation - LGBTQ+ parents, breastfeeding, the role of spirituality during pregnancy, and midwifery and parenthood. Each person is unique and so is the response to parenthood, as the mother, father and family embark on this new lifeworld, a lifelong commitment. The book is a compendium of contemporary research depicting the strengths, opportunities, and recommendations how midwives and other health care professionals can nurture optimal, compassionate, respectful person- and family-centred care during pregnancy and early parenting, the transition to parenthood. .

    Contents:
    1. Midwifery and the Transition to Parenthood
    2. Preparation for Parenthood
    3. The Parental-Fetal Tie During Pregnancy
    4. Well-Being and Early Motherhood
    5. Midwifery and Perinatal Mental Health
    6. Infertility, Repeated Loss, and Surrogacy
    7. Supporting Early Parenting Following Preterm Birth
    8. Adolescent Pregnancy and Early Parenting
    9. Drug and Alcohol Use in Pregnancy and Early Parenthood
    10. Violence, Abuse and Coercive Control in Pregnancy and Early Parenting
    11. Migrants, Midwives, and the Transition to Parenthood
    12. Midwives and the Transition to Fatherhood
    13. Diversity of Family Formation: LGBTQ+ Parents
    14. Spirituality and Spiritual Care in the Transition to Motherhood
    15. Breastfeeding: Womens Experiences in the Transition to Motherhood
    16. Perspectives on Midwifery and Parenthood.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    volume editors, Hiroo Yokozeki, Hiroyuki Murota, Ichiro Katayama.
    Contents:
    New pathologies of skin disorders identified from the history of perspiration research / Yokozeki, H.
    Classification of systemic and localized sweating disorders / Ohshima, Y.; Tamada, Y.
    New findings on the mechanism of perspiration including aquaporin-5 water channel / Inoue, R.
    Old and new approaches for assessing sweating / Murota, H.
    Sweat as an efficient natural moisturizer / Shiohara, T.; Sato, Y.; Komatsu, Y.; Ushigome, Y.
    Genetic disorders with dyshidrosis : ectodermal dysplasia, incontinentia pigmenti, fabry disease, and congenital insensitivity to pain with anhidrosis / Wataya-Kaneda, M.
    Histamine modulates sweating and affects clinical manifestations of atopic dermatitis / Takahashi, A.; Tani, S.; Murota, H.; Katayama, I.
    Sweating in systemic abnormalities : uremia and diabetes mellitus / Murota, H.
    Abberant sudomotor functions in Sjögren's syndrome : comparable study with atopic dermatitis on dry skin manifestation / Katayama, I.
    Analysis and management of acquired idiopathic generalized anhidrosis / Satoh, T.
    Dyshidrotic eczema and its relationship to metal allergy / Nishizawa, A.
    Pathophysiology and treatment of hyperhidrosis / Fujimoto, T.
    New etiology of cholinergic urticaria / Tokura, Y.
    Sweat allergy / Hiragun, T.; Hide, M.
    Perspiration functions in different ethnic, age, and sex populations : modification of sudomotor function / Lee, J.-B.; Kim, J.-H.; Murota, H.
    Digital Access Karger 2016
  • Digital
    Sarah Klamroth ; with a preface by Prof. Dr. Klaus Pfeifer and Dr. Simon Steib.
    Summary: Sarah Klamroth describes a novel treadmill training device, which applies additional perturbations to the walking surface and thereby simulating an uneven surface. In a pilot study the author investigated the immediate effects on gait and postural control in patients with Parkinson's Disease after a single training session of perturbation treadmill training. The results show that perturbation treadmill training is feasible for mildly to moderately affected Parkinson patients, and that one training session led to improvements in overground walking speed and gait variability in these patients. Contents Devices for Perturbation Treadmill Training Motor Adaptations Gait and Postural Control in Parkinson's Disease Target Groups Scientists and students in the field of physical therapy, sport science, and neurology practitioners in the field of physical therapy, sport science, neurology, and rehabilitation. About the Author: Sarah Klamroth is Physical Therapist and Sport Scientist, and currently she does her PhD with a focus on Physical Activity and Quality of Life in Parkinson's Disease at the Department of Sport Science and Sport (Division of Exercise and Health, Prof. Dr. Klaus Pfeifer) of the Friedrich-Alexander-University Erlangen Nuremberg.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Print
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    Y96 .A84
    5
  • Digital
    edited by Omkar.
    Summary: This book comprehensively compiles information on some of the major pests that afflict agricultural, horticultural and medicinal crops in particular as well as many polyphagous pests. Not only does this book deal with the pests of common globally produced crops it also addresses those of rarely dealt with crops such as seed spices, medicinal and aromatic plants. While the perspective of insect pests is largely Indian and South East Asian in context, the book does deal with globally problematic pests, particularly polyphagous ones. Not only will the readers be acquainted with the pests, their damaging potential and their life cycle but also with the latest methods of managements including ecofriendly measures being employed to keep pest populations at manageable levels. The 27 chapters in the book, are grouped into four sections primarily based on crop types, viz. pest of agricultural, horticultural and medicinal crops, and polyphagous pests, making the book easy to navigate. Each of the chapters is comprehensive and well illustrated and written by academicians who have dedicated their entire lives to the study of a particular crop-pest complex. The final chapter of this book provides an overview on the principles and processes of pest management.

    Contents:
    Agricultural crops
    Horticultural crops
    Medicinal crops
    Polyphagous pests and management practices.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    [edited by] Eugene C. Lin, MD, Clinical Assistant Professor of Radiology, Department of Radiology, Virginia Mason Medical Center, University of Washington, Seattle, Washington, USA, Abass Alavi, MD, MD(Hon), PhD(Hon), DSc(Hon), Professor of Radiology and Neurology, Director of Research Education, Department of Radiology, Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, USA.
    Summary: Top-selling, concise guide to PET and PET/CT imaging from distinguished radiologists, now in a new edition! PET and PET/CT have been increasingly used as effective imaging modalities in the management of patients with cancer, neurologic disease, musculoskeletal disease, and cardiac disease. PET and PET/CT: A Clinical Guide, Third Edition by world renowned molecular imaging pioneer Abass Alavi and esteemed diagnostic and nuclear radiologist Eugene Lin features the latest advances in PET technology in an easy-to-read format. The book lays a solid foundation with opening chapters on scanner physi.

    Contents:
    PET and PET/CT: A Clinical Guide; Title Page; Copyright; Dedication; Contents; Preface; Contributors; Part I Basic Science; 1 The Physics of PET/CT Scanners; 2 The Basics of 2-[F-18]Fluoro-2-deoxy-D-glucose Radiochemistry and Biology; 3 The Role of Glucose and FDG Metabolism in the Interpretation of PET Studies; Part II Clinical Basics; 4 Patient Preparation; 5 Standardized Uptake Value; 6 Quantitative Whole-Body PET/CT Imaging; 7 Normal Variants and Benign Findings; 8 Interpretation of FDG PET Studies; 9 PET/CT; 10 PET/MRI: Introduction to Clinical Applications Part III Oncologic Applications11 Oncological PET by Anatomic Region; 12 Therapy Response; 13 Brain Neoplasms; 14 Head and Neck Cancer; 15 Thyroid Cancer; 16 Thoracic Neoplasms; 17 Breast Cancer; 18 Gastric, Esophageal, and Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumors; 19 Lymphoma; 20 Melanoma; 21 Hepatobiliary Tumors; 22 Pancreatic Cancer; 23 Gynecological Tumors; 24 Urological Tumors; 25 Colorectal Cancer; 26 Musculoskeletal Tumors; 27 18F Sodium Fluoride PET/CT in Bone; 28 68Ga-Based Imaging Techniques; Part IV Nononcologic Applications; 29 Pediatric PET/CT; 30 PET/CT in Radiation Therapy Planning 31 FDG-PET/CT in the Evaluation of Infection and Inflammation32 Neurological Applications of Fluorodeoxyglucose PET; 33 Neurological Applications of Nonfluorodeoxyglucose Tracers; 34 Cardiac PET and PET/CT; Index
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    Thieme MedOne Radiology
    Thieme-Connect
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. Vries, Aren Waarde, editors ; Klaus L. Leenders, guest editor.
    Summary: PET and SPECT in Neurology highlights the combined expertise of renowned authors whose dedication to the investigation of neurological disorders through nuclear medicine technology has achieved international recognition. Classical neurodegenerative disorders are discussed as well as cerebrovascular disorders, brain tumors, epilepsy, head trauma, coma, sleeping disorders, and inflammatory and infectious diseases of the CNS. The latest results in nuclear brain imaging are detailed. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical neurologist and a nuclear medicine specialist to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state-of-the-art compendium will be valuable to anybody in the field of neuroscience, from the neurologist and the radiologist/nuclear medicine specialist to the interested general practitioner and geriatrician. It is the second volume of a trilogy on PET and SPECT imaging in the neurosciences, the other volumes covering PET and SPECT in psychiatry and in neurobiological systems.

    Contents:
    Nuclear Medicine Imaging Tracers for Neurology
    ¹⁸F-Fluorodeoxyglucose PET Procedures: Health Economic Aspects in Neurology
    Tracer Kinetic Modelling
    Quantification in Brain SPECT: Noninvasive Cerebral Blood Flow Measurements Using ⁹⁹mTc-Labeled Tracers
    MRI/PET Brain Imaging
    An Investigation of Statistical Power of [¹⁵O]-H₂O PET Perfusion Imaging: The Influence of Delay and Time Interval
    Molecular Imaging Using Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy in Neurology: The Past, the Present, and the Future
    The Default Network of the Brain
    Dementia Due to Neurodegenerative Disease: Molecular Imaging Findings
    Ass Imaging in Aging, Alzheimer's Disease and Other Neurodegenerative Conditions
    PET Imaging of the a4ss2* Nicotinic Acetylcholine Receptors in Alzheimer's Disease
    Neuroimaging Findings in Mild Cognitive Impairment
    Impact of the IWG/Dubois Criteria for Alzheimer's Disease in Imaging Studies
    Perfusion SPECT: Its Role in the Diagnosis and Differential Diagnosis of Alzheimer's Disease, with Particular Emphasis on Guidelines
    Nuclear Imaging in Frontotemporal Dementia
    Parkinson Dementia: PET Findings
    SPECT/PET Findings in Lewy Body Dementia
    Vascular Dementia
    Value of MIBG in the Differential Diagnosis of Neurodegenerative Disorders
    Linking Molecular Neurobiology to Therapeutic Approaches for Alzheimer's Disease with PET
    PET and SPECT Studies of Ageing and Cardiovascular Risk Factors for Alzheimer's Disease
    Carotid Plaque Imaging with SPECT/CT and PET/CT
    PET in Brain Arteriovenous Malformations and Cerebral Proliferative Angiopathy
    Transient Ischaemic Attack (Neuroimaging Findings)
    PET Reveals Pathophysiology in Ischemic Stroke
    Parkinson's Disease
    SPECT Imaging for Idiopatic M. Parkinson and Parkinsonian Syndromes: Guidelines and Comparison with PET and Recent Developments
    PET and SPECT Imaging in Parkinsonian Syndromes
    Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    PET in Huntington's Disease
    PET and SPECT Imaging in Dystonia
    PET and SPECT Imaging in Hyperkinetic Movement Disorders
    Clinical Applications of [¹²³I]FP-CIT SPECT Imaging
    PET Imaging of Microglia Activation in Neuropsychiatric Disorders with Potential Infectious Origin
    PET Imaging in Multiple Sclerosis: Focus on the Translocator Protein
    PET and SPECT Imaging of Neurotoxicity
    PET and SPECT in Hepatic and Uraemic Encephalopathy
    PET in Epilepsy
    SISCOM (Subtraction Ictal SPECT Coregistered to MRI)
    Nuclear Medicine Neuroimaging and Electromagnetic Source Localization in Nonlesional Drug-Resistant Focal Epilepsy
    Gliomas
    Single-Photon Emission Computed Tomography [Neuro-SPECT] Imaging of Brain Tumors
    The Value of ¹¹C-Methionine PET in the Differential Diagnosis Between Brain Tumor Recurrence and Radionecrosis
    Imaging Brain Metastases of Neuroendocrine Tumors
    Traumatic Brain Injury: Nuclear Medicine Neuroimaging
    Whiplash, Real or Not Real? A Review and New Concept
    PET Imaging in Altered States of Consciousness: Coma, Sleep, and Hypnosis
    Anaesthesia and PET of the Brain
    Modulation of Brain Functioning by Deep Brain Stimulation: Contributions from PET Functional Imaging
    Radionuclide Imaging Studies in Pediatric Neurology.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Klaus L. Leenders, guest editor.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the use of PET and SPECT in not only classic neurodegenerative disorders but also cerebrovascular disorders, brain tumors, epilepsy, head trauma, coma, sleeping disorders, and inflammatory and infectious diseases of the CNS. The new edition has been revised and updated to reflect recent advances and includes additional chapters, for example on the use of artificial intelligence and machine learning in imaging data analysis, the study of brain connectivity using PET and SPECT images, and the role of PET imaging in modulation of brain functioning by deep brain stimulation. The authors are renowned experts whose dedication to the investigation of neurological disorders through nuclear medicine technology has achieved international recognition. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical neurologist and a nuclear medicine specialist to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be invaluable for neurologists and radiologists/nuclear medicine specialists and will also be informative for interested general practitioners and geriatricians. Companion volumes on PET and SPECT in psychiatry and in neurobiological systems complete a trilogy.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Basics
    1: Nuclear Medicine Imaging Tracers for Neurology
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Glucose Consumption
    1.3 Translocator Protein TSPO
    1.4 GABA Receptor
    1.5 Dopaminergic System
    1.5.1 Dopamine Transporter (DAT)
    1.5.2 D1 Receptor
    1.5.3 D2 Receptor
    1.5.4 D2/D3 Agonists
    1.6 Beta-Amyloid Deposition
    1.7 NMDA Receptor, Glycine Transport
    1.8 P-Glycoprotein
    1.9 Cholinergic System
    1.10 Metabotropic Glutamate-5 Receptor
    1.11 Vesicular Monoamine Transporter
    1.12 Adenosine Receptors 1.13 Serotonergic System
    1.13.1 Serotonin Transporter
    1.13.2 5-HT Receptor Ligands
    1.14 Nonadrenergic System
    1.15 Opioid Receptors
    1.16 Monoamine Oxidase
    1.17 SV2A Receptors
    1.18 Sigma Receptors
    1.19 Tau Protein Deposition
    1.20 Phosphodiesterase
    1.21 P2X7 Receptor
    1.22 (Re)Myelination
    1.23 Cannabinoid Receptors
    1.24 Conclusions
    References
    2: Tracer Kinetic Modelling
    2.1 Introduction
    2.2 Principles of Modelling
    2.3 Single-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.4 Principles and Practice of Quantification 2.5 An Example: Measurement of CBF Using [15O]H2O
    2.6 Two-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.7 Reference Tissue Models
    2.8 Parametric Methods
    2.9 Conclusions
    References
    3: Quantification in Brain SPECT: Noninvasive Cerebral Blood Flow Measurements Using 99mTc-Labeled Tracers
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Method
    3.2.1 Theory of Graphical Analysis
    3.2.2 Brain Perfusion Index (BPI)
    3.2.3 Comparison of BPI and CBF Values Measured by Other Invasive Methods
    3.2.4 Alternative Approach to Estimation of BPI
    3.2.5 Calculation of Regional CBF from BPI 3.2.6 Consecutive rCBF Measurements at Baseline and Acetazolamide Challenge
    3.3 Clinical Application
    3.3.1 Cerebrovascular Diseases
    3.3.2 Heart Failure
    3.3.3 Idiopathic Normal Pressure Hydrocephalus
    3.3.4 Neurodegenerative Disorders
    3.3.5 Mood Disorders
    3.3.6 Other Neuropsychiatric Diseases
    3.4 Conclusion
    References
    4: From Positron to Pattern: A Conceptual and Practical Overview of 18F-FDG PET Imaging and Spatial Covariance Analysis
    4.1 18F-FDG PET Imaging
    4.1.1 Basic Concepts in PET
    4.1.2 18F-FDG PET Imaging 4.1.3 Studying Brain Function with 18F-FDG PET
    4.2 Analysis of Resting-State 18F-FDG PET Images
    4.2.1 Image Registration
    4.2.2 Normalization
    4.2.3 Analysis of Variance and Covariance
    4.2.4 Principal Component Analysis
    4.3 SSM PCA
    4.3.1 Defining the Data
    4.3.2 Normalization with the Scaled Subprofile Model (SSM)
    4.3.3 Calculating Eigenvectors from a Covariance Matrix
    4.3.4 Calculating Subject Scores and Selecting Disease-Related Components
    4.3.5 Prospective Application of the Pattern
    4.3.6 Validation
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Johan A. den Boer, guest editor.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, Iris E. Sommer.
    Summary: This book provides a comprehensive overview of the use of PET and SPECT in the classic psychiatric disorders such as depression, bipolar disorder, anxiety disorders, and schizophrenia. In addition, it discusses the application of these functional neuroimaging techniques in a variety of other conditions, including sleep disorders, eating disorders, autism, and chronic fatigue syndrome. The new edition has been extensively revised and updated to reflect the latest advances and results in nuclear imaging within the field. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical psychiatrist and a nuclear medicine expert to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be of value for all who have an interest in the field of neuroscience, from psychiatrists and radiologists/nuclear medicine specialists to interested general practitioners and cognitive psychologists. Companion volumes on the use of PET and SPECT in neurology and for the imaging of neurobiological systems complete a trilogy.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Paul G.M. Luiten, guest editor.
    Summary: PET and SPECT of Neurobiological Systems combines the expertise of renowned authors whose dedication to the development of novel probes and techniques for the investigation of neurobiological systems has achieved international recognition. Various aspects of neurotransmission in the brain are discussed, such as visualization and quantification of (more than 20 different) neuroreceptors, neuroinflammatory markers, transporters, and enzymes as well as neurotransmitter synthesis, -amyloid deposition, cerebral blood flow, and the metabolic rate of glucose. The latest results in probe development are also detailed. Most chapters are written jointly by radiochemists and nuclear medicine specialists to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be valuable to anyone in the field of clinical or preclinical neuroscience, from the radiochemist and radiologist/nuclear medicine specialist to the interested neurobiologist and general practitioner. It is the second volume of a trilogy on PET and SPECT imaging in the neurosciences. Other volumes focus on PET and SPECT in psychiatry and PET and SPECT in "neurology".

    Contents:
    BASICS: Animal Models for Brain Research
    Cerebral Glucose Metabolism
    Cerebral Blood Flow Measurements with Oxygen-15 Water PET
    Principles of Brain Perfusion SPECT
    The Impact of Genetic Polymorphisms on Neuroreceptor Imaging
    SYSTEMS: Imaging of Adenosine Receptors
    PET Tracers for Beta-Amyloid and Other Proteinopathies
    Imaging of Central Benzodiazepine Receptors in Chronic Cerebral Ischemia
    PET and SPECT Imaging of the Central Dopamine System in Humans
    PET Imaging of Endocannabinoid System
    Imaging Type 1 Glycine Transporters in the Central Nervous System Using PET
    Imaging Histamine Receptors Using PET and SPECT
    PET and SPECT Imaging of Brain Steroid Hormone Receptors
    Current Radioligands for the PET Imaging of Metabotropic Glutamate Receptors
    PET Imaging of Muscarinic Receptors
    Preclinical Aspects of Nicotinic Acetylcholine Receptor Imaging
    Development of Radioligands for In Vivo Imaging of NMDA Receptors
    Progress in PET Imaging of the Norepinephrine Transporter System
    PET Imaging of Opioid Receptors
    PET Imaging of ABC Transporters in the Blood-Brain Barrier
    PET Imaging of Translocator Protein Expression in Neurological Disorders
    Imaging of the Serotonin System: Radiotracers and Applications in Memory Disorders
    Serotonin Synthesis Studied with PET
    Monoamine Oxidase A and Serotonin Transporter Imaging with PET
    PET Imaging of Sigma-1 Receptors
    Radioligands for Imaging Vesicular Monoamine Transporters.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Rudi A.J.O. Dierckx, Andreas Otte, Erik F.J. de Vries, Aren van Waarde, editors ; Adriaan A. Lammertsma, guest editor.
    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Contents
    Part I: Basics
    1: Animal Models for Brain Research
    1.1 Introduction to Animal Modelling for Human Brain Disease
    1.1.1 Relevance of Animal Models
    1.1.2 Validity of Animal Models
    1.1.2.1 Face Validity
    1.1.2.2 Construct Validity
    1.1.2.3 Aetiological Validity
    1.1.2.4 Predictive Validity
    1.1.3 Homology, Analogy and Isomorphism
    1.1.4 Generalisation and Extrapolation
    1.2 Animal Models of Psychiatric Disorders
    1.2.1 The Endophenotype Concept in Psychiatry
    1.2.2 Approaches to Modelling Psychiatric Disease 1.2.2.1 Behavioural Approach
    1.2.2.2 Pharmacological Models
    1.2.2.3 Genetic Models
    1.2.3 Animal Models of Schizophrenia
    1.2.3.1 Aetiology and Symptomatology of Schizophrenia
    1.2.3.2 Validating Animal Models of Schizophrenia
    Electrophysiological Endophenotypes
    Cognitive Endophenotypes
    Locomotor Activity
    Sensory Discrimination
    Negative Symptoms
    1.2.3.3 Neurodevelopmental Schizophrenia Models
    1.2.3.4 Drug-Induced Schizophrenia Models
    Psychostimulant Models
    Hallucinogen Models
    1.2.3.5 Lesion-Induced Schizophrenia Models 1.2.3.6 Genetic Schizophrenia Models
    Inbred and Selectively Bred Rodent Strains
    Genetically Modified Models
    1.3 Animal Models of Neurological Disorders
    1.3.1 Approaches to Modelling Neurological Disorders
    1.3.2 Animal Models of Alzheimer's Disease
    1.3.2.1 Aetiology and Symptomatology of Alzheimer's Disease
    1.3.2.2 Validating Animal Models of Alzheimer's Disease
    Cognitive Symptoms
    BPSD-Related Symptoms
    Pathological Alterations
    Neurochemical Alterations
    1.3.2.3 Spontaneous and Selectively Bred Alzheimer's Disease Models 2.1.3.1 Volume of Distribution
    2.1.3.2 Input Function
    2.1.3.3 One-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.1.3.4 Two-Tissue Compartment Model
    2.1.3.5 Logan Plot
    2.1.4 Reference Tissue Models
    2.1.4.1 Binding Potential
    2.1.4.2 Simplified Reference Tissue Model
    2.1.5 Receptor Occupancy and Displacement
    2.1.6 Semiquantitative Approach
    2.1.7 Radioligands
    2.2 PET Motion Correction: State of the Art
    2.2.1 The Need for Awake PET: Anesthesia, Stress, and Its Impact on Small Animal PET
    2.2.2 Motion Correction in PET Reconstruction
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Peter S. Conti, Aarti Kaushik, editors.
    Contents:
    Normal Patterns and Variants
    Lung Neoplasms
    Breast Neoplasms
    Esophageal and Gastric Neoplasms
    Hepatobiliary, Pancreas, Adrenal, Melanoma, and GIST
    Colon Neoplasms
    Gynecologic Neoplasms: Cervical, Ovarian, Vulvar, Uterine, and Endometrial Cancer
    Urologic Neoplasms: Prostate, Bladder, and Renal Cell Carcinoma
    Lymphoma
    Musculoskeletal Neoplasms
    F-18 Fluoride Bone Scintigraphy
    Neuroradiology: Neoplasms and Epilepsy
    Dementia
    Pediatric Imaging
    Myocardial Viability
    Granulomatous Diseases
    Newer Tracers. .
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Amir H. Khandani, editor.
    Summary: This is a comprehensive guide for patient preparation, image acquisition, and image interpretation for PET/CT and PET/MR, specifically relevant to melanoma and sarcoma. Imaging specialists and referring physicians are often not as intimately aware of the particulars of PET imaging in management of patients with melanoma and sarcoma and how it could affect their treatment. This book fills that gap by presenting comprehensive information on melanoma, sarcoma, and the role of PET imaging in their diagnosis and management. The book begins by covering the basics of imaging for practicing physicians and trainees. Expert authors then further cover the biological concepts of melanoma and sarcoma and how they relate to imaging, particularly PET, the oncologist's perspective, and the surgeon's perspective on imaging for both the imaging specialist and the referring physician. Chapters review topics such as: PET/CT and PET/MR images in melanoma and sarcoma from a systemic approach, false-positives, false-negatives, pitfalls, and molecular imaging beyond PET. Images are used extensively throughout to enhance understanding for the reader. This is an ideal guide for radiologists, nuclear medicine physicians, oncologists, surgeons, trainees and technologists.

    Contents:
    What is Positron Emission Tomography?
    Patient Preparation for FDG PET with an Emphasis on Soft Tissue Sarcoma and Melanoma: What Matters (and What Doesn't)
    PET/CT and PET/MR in Soft Tissue Sarcoma and Melanoma Patients: What to Image and How to Image It
    Systematic Approach to Evaluation of Melanoma and Sarcoma with PET
    Review of PET/CT Images in Melanoma and Sarcoma: False-Positives, False-Negatives and Pitfalls
    PET beyond pictures
    The Role of PET/CT in Melanoma Patients: A Surgeon's Perspective
    PET in Sarcoma - Surgeons Point of View
    FDG PET in the Diagnosis and Management of Pediatric and Adolescent Sarcomas
    Beyond FDG: Novel Radiotracers for PET Imaging of Melanoma and Sarcoma
    Future Directions of PET and Molecular Imaging and Therapy with an Emphasis on Melanoma and Sarcoma.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Andrea Ciarmiello, Luigi Mansi, editors.
    Contents:
    Preface
    Foreword
    Part 1-Basics
    Physics Of Hybrid Imaging
    Instrumentation
    Quantitation And Data Analysis In Hybrid PET/MRI Systems
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    Contrast Media
    Part 2-Most Frequent Clinical Applications
    FDG-PET in Dementia
    Amyloid imaging in dementia and related disorders
    Movement disorders: focus on Parkinsońs disease and related disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    PET/CT and PET/MRI in Neurology: Infection/Inflammation
    Brain Tumors
    Hybrid Imaging in Pediatric Central Nervous System Disorders
    Part 3-Most Frequent Clinical Applications
    Multimodality Imaging of Huntington's Disease
    Neuroimaging in Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
    Hybrid imaging in vegetative state
    Hybrid imaging in cerebrovascular disease
    Hybrid imaging in Emergency Room
    Part 4-SWOT analysis
    SWOT Analysis and Stakeholder Engagement for Comparative Evaluation of Hybrid Molecular Imaging Modalities
    Worldwide Challenges and Opportunities of Hybrid Imaging: Perspective from the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)
    PET/CT vs PET/MRI.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Hiroshi Toyama, Yaming Li, Jun Hatazawa, Guang Huang, Kazuo Kubota, editors.
    Contents:
    1.2.3 Foam Cell Formation and FDG Uptake
    1.2.4 Polarization of Macrophages and Uptake of FDG
    1.2.5 Monitoring of the Therapeutic Effect
    1.2.6 Comparison with Other PET Tracers
    1.3 PET Imaging in Animal Model of Neuroinflammation 1
    1.3.1 Introduction
    1.3.2 Current Standard of Neuroinflammation Imaging
    1.3.3 Alternative Molecular Targets for Microglia Imaging
    1.4 PET Imaging in Animal Models of Neuroinflammation 2
    1.4.1 Introduction
    1.4.2 Brain Ischemia Model
    1.4.3 Traumatic Brain Injury Model
    1.4.4 Alzheimer's Disease Model 1.4.5 Other Models of Neuroinflammation
    1.4.6 New PET Tracer for Neuroinflammation
    1.4.7 Conclusion
    1.5 PET Imaging of Inflammation in the Peripheral System with [18F]FEDAC, a Radioligand for Translocator Protein (18 kDa)
    1.5.1 Introduction
    1.5.2 PET Imaging and Quantitative Analysis of TSPO in Rat Peripheral Tissues
    1.5.3 TSPO in Lung Inflammation
    1.5.4 TSPO in Nonalcoholic Fatty Liver Disease
    1.5.5 TSPO in Liver Damage
    1.5.6 TSPO in Liver Fibrosis
    1.5.7 TSPO in Multiple Sclerosis
    1.5.8 TSPO in Rheumatic Arthritis
    1.5.9 Conclusion 1.6 Role of Microglia in Neuroinflammation
    1.6.1 Introduction
    1.6.2 Microglia Diversity
    1.6.3 Microglia and Neuroinflammation
    1.6.4 Existence of Nontoxic Activated Form of Microglia in the Brain
    1.6.5 Direct Evidence of Neuroprotection by Microglia in the Brain
    1.6.6 Toxic Transformation of Microglia by Nef Protein Introduction
    1.6.7 CNS Cytokine Network
    1.7 Application of Preclinical PET Imaging for Infectious Diseases
    1.7.1 Introduction
    1.7.2 Imaging Laboratory for Infectious Diseases
    1.7.3 PET Imaging with Infectious Small Animals
    References 2: FDG-PET/CT in Patients with Inflammation or Fever of Unknown Origin (IUO and FUO)
    2.1 Role of FDG-PET/CT in the Diagnosis of Fever or Inflammation of Unknown Origin (FUO/IUO)
    2.1.1 What Is FUO?
    2.1.2 What Is IUO?
    2.1.3 Why FDG-PET/CT for FUO/IUO?
    2.1.4 Results of FDG-PET/CT for FUO/IUO
    2.1.5 Factors Affecting the Results
    2.1.5.1 Disease Prevalence and Positivity
    2.1.5.2 Markers of Inflammation
    2.1.5.3 Structured Evaluation FUO/IUO
    2.1.6 Conclusion
    2.2 Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis in FDG-PET/CT for Inflammatory Diseases
    2.2.1 Introduction
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Kanhaiyalal Agrawal, Annah Skillen, Abdulredha Esmail, Sharjeel Usmani, editors.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to provide concise information and quick reference on the basics and practice of PET/CT for beginners. The chapters are written by Nuclear Medicine experts from different countries with enormous experience in PET/CT practice. Starting with the basics of PET/CT describing physics and the use of radiopharmaceuticals in PET/CT, the book explores the principle of PET/CT in radiotherapy planning. The last five chapters explore normal variation, pitfalls and artefacts commonly seen with various routinely used PET radiotracers. The text is enriched by tables and highlighted clinical cases for better understanding. This book will be of interest mostly to nuclear medicine physicians and radiologists, but it may be appealing also to a wider medical community including oncologists and radiotherapists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Basic Principles of PET-CT imaging
    Chapter 2: Physics of PET and Respiratory Gating
    Chapter 3. The Physics of PET/CT for Radiotherapy Planning
    Chapter 4. 18F-FDG and Non-FDG PET Radiopharmaceuticals
    Chapter 5. PET/CT imaging: Patient instructions and preparation
    Chapter 6.18F-FDG PET/CT Imaging: Normal variants, pitfalls and artefacts.-Chapter 7: 68Ga-DOTA-peptides PET-CT: Physiological biodistribution, variants and pitfalls
    Chapter 8. 18F-methylcholine (FCH) PET-CT imaging: Physiological distribution, pitfalls and imaging pearls
    Chapter 9: 68Ga-PSMA PET/CT: Normal Variants, Pitfalls and Artefacts
    Chapter 10: 18F-NaF PET-CT Imaging.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Francesco Fraioli, editors.
    Summary: This well-illustrated pocket book offers up-to-date guidance on the clinical and research applications of PET/CT in the most common neurological and neuro-oncological disorders. The opening chapters cover the pros and cons of widely used radiological imaging techniques, scanners, and radiopharmaceuticals, with emphasis on the state of the art hybrid modalities, primarily PET/CT but also PET/MRI. Helpful information is provided on the clinical and research tracers used in neurodegenerative diseases, movement disorders, epilepsy and brain tumours. These four killers are then discussed in detail, highlighting the role of PET/CT and targeted tracers in their assessment and in radiotherapy planning. In addition, the clinical applications of PET/MRI are considered. Throughout, many images are included to better explain the diseases and the role of hybrid imaging, and the final chapter presents a large sample of teaching cases and files that will assist in daily clinical practice. The book has been compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society. It will be an excellent asset for nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, radiographers, neurologists and neurosurgeons.

    Contents:
    Intro; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgements; Contents; Contributors;
    1: Introduction to Brain Disorders; References;
    2: Radiological Imaging in Brain Disorders: An Overview; 2.1 Neuroimaging Modalities and Techniques; 2.1.1 Computed Tomography (CT); 2.1.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI); 2.1.2.1 Perfusion MRI; 2.1.2.2 MR Spectroscopy; 2.1.2.3 Diffusion Tensor Imaging; 2.1.2.4 Functional MRI (f-MRI); 2.2 Radiological Imaging in Neurodegenerative Diseases; 2.3 Radiological Imaging in Movement Disorders; 2.4 Radiological Imaging in Epilepsy; 2.5 Radiological Imaging in Neuro-Oncology 5.3 Frontotemporal Degeneration (FTD)5.4 Dementia of Lewy Body (DLB); 5.5 Other Neurodegenerative Diseases; 5.6 Advantages and Limitations; References;
    6: [18F]FDG-PET/CT in Movement Disorders; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Parkinson's Disease; 6.2.1 Clinical Phenotypes; 6.2.2 Neuropathology Findings; 6.2.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.3 Multiple System Atrophy; 6.3.1 Clinical Phenotypes; 6.3.2 Neuropathology Findings; 6.3.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.4 The Spectrum of Progressive Supranuclear Palsy and Corticobasal Degeneration; 6.4.1 Clinical Phenotypes 6.4.2 Neuropathology Findings6.4.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.5 Huntington's Disease; 6.5.1 Clinical Phenotypes; 6.5.2 Neuropathology Findings; 6.5.3 [18F]FDG-PET Typical Patterns; 6.6 Advantages and Limitations; 6.6.1 General Advantages; 6.6.2 General Limitations; References;
    7: 18F-FDG PET in Epilepsy; 7.1 Introduction; 7.2 Clinical Indications; 7.3 Classical Patterns; 7.3.1 Temporal; 7.3.2 Extratemporal; 7.3.3 Syndromes; 7.4 Advantages and Limitations; 7.5 Conclusion; References;
    8: PET in Neuro-Oncology; 8.1 Introduction 8.2 PET in Primary Glioma Diagnosis and Differential Diagnosis8.2.1 18F-FDG; 8.2.2 11C-MET; 8.2.3 18F-FET; 8.2.4 18F-FDOPA; 8.2.5 18F-CHO; 8.2.6 18F-FLT; 8.3 Amino Acid Tracers PET in Glioma Histological Subtyping; 8.4 PET in Glioma Grading; 8.4.1 18F-FET; 8.4.2 11C-MET; 8.4.3 18F-FDOPA; 8.4.4 18F-FLT; 8.5 Glioma Treatment Effect and Recurrence; 8.6 PET Tracers in Differentiating Recurrence from Treatment Effects; 8.7 Conclusion; References;
    9: 18F-FDG PET/CT Indications, Pitfalls and Limitations in Brain Imaging; 9.1 Introduction; 9.2 Indications
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Mohsen Beheshti, Werner Langsteger, Alireza Rezaee.
    Contents:
    Head and neck cancers / Moshen Beheshti, Rathan M. Subramaniam, Alireza Rezaee, Martin Burian, and Werner Langsteger
    Lung cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Ken Hermann, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Michael Beheshti
    Breast cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Andreas Buck, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Moshen Beheshti
    Gastroesophogeal cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Andreas Buck, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Moshen Beheshti
    Gastoenteropancreatic neuroendocrine neoplasms / Moshen Beheshti, Alireza Rezaee, Markus Raderer, and Werner Langsteger
    Colorectal cancer / Moshen Beheshti, Alireza Rezaee, Ken Hermann, Markus Raderer, and Werner Langsteger
    Hepatobiliary cancer / Alireza Rezaee, Rathan M. Subramaniam, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Lymphoma / Alireza Rezaee, Heiko Schöder, Markus Raderer, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Gynecological cancers / Alireza Rezaee, Niklaus Schäfer, Norbert Avril, Lukas Hefler, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Prostate cancer / Mohsen Beheshti, Heiko Schöder, Jochen Walz, Alireza Rezaee, and Werner Langsteger
    Melanoma / Alireza Rezaee, Andreas Buck, Niklaus Schäfer, Werner Langsteger, and Mohsen Beheshti
    Brain tumors / Karl-Josef Langen, Alexander Drzezga, and Norbert Galldiks.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Nagabhushan Seshadri, Chinnamani Eswar, editors.
    Summary: This pocket book offers a rapid and concise overview of the utility of PET/CT in the management of patients with cancer of unknown primary (CUP). Readers will gain an appreciation of the unique information provided by PET/CT on the molecular and metabolic changes associated with CUP, which can occur in the absence of corresponding anatomical alterations. Characteristic imaging appearances are documented with the aid of a series of teaching cases that serve to illustrate the potential improvements in patient management that may be achieved through early use of PET/CT in the diagnostic pathway. In addition, the relation of the clinical and pathological background to imaging is explained. The book is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging (compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society) and will be an excellent asset for all clinicians, nuclear medicine physicians, radiologists, radiographers, and nurses who routinely work in multidisciplinary teams involved in the management of these patients.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Yong, Du, editor.
    Summary: This book is a pocket guide to the science and practice of PET/CT imaging of colorectal malignancies. The role of PET/CT in these patients, the characteristic PET/CT findings, and the advantages and limitations of this hybrid modality are all clearly described. In addition, information is provided on clinical presentation, diagnosis, staging, pathology, management, and radiological imaging. The book is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which is aimed at nuclear medicine/radiology residents and physicians, referring clinicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings. Compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society, the series is the joint work of many colleagues and professionals worldwide who share a common vision and purpose in promoting and supporting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Tara Barwick, Andrea Rockall, editors.
    Contents:
    Causes
    Pathology
    Management
    Radiological Imaging
    Basic Principles of PET/CT Imaging
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    PET/CT in Gynecological Malignancies.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Nilendu Purandare, Sneha Shah, editors.
    Summary: This book is a pocket guide to the role of PET/CT in malignancies of the hepatobiliary system and pancreas. Imaging findings characteristic of malignancies are described and illustrated, and attention drawn to normal variants and artifacts. In addition, information is presented on epidemiology, clinical presentation, pathology, staging, and management in order to provide the clinical insight required by the imaging specialist. The book will be of immense value to practicing nuclear physicians as well as hybrid imaging specialists, particularly during reading sessions and multidisciplinary team meetings. It will also serve as a quick reference for residents and fellows in the PET/CT department. The book is published within the series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which is compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society. The series is the joint work of professionals worldwide who share a common vision in promoting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Irfan Kayani, editor.
    Summary: This book is a pocket guide to the practice of PET/CT imaging of Hodgkin's lymphoma. The role of PET/CT in Hodgkin's lymphoma, the characteristic findings and patterns, and the advantages and limitations of this hybrid modality are all clearly described. In addition, information is provided on clinical presentation, diagnosis, staging, pathology, management, and conventional radiological imaging. A useful pictorial atlas is included at the end of the book. PET/CT in Hodgkin's Lymphoma is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which is aimed at referring clinicians, nuclear medicine/radiology physicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings. Compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society, the series is the joint work of many colleagues and professionals worldwide who share a common vision and purpose in promoting and supporting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Thomas Wagner, Sandip Basu, editors.
    Summary: This pocket book provides clinicians with the necessary information to understand the role of FDG PET/CT in infection and inflammation. It will help both in making appropriate imaging requests with adequate clinical information and in interpreting the report. The coverage encompasses a wide range of topics, including the role of PET/CT in pyrexia of unknown origin, vasculitis, autoimmune diseases, prosthetic joint infections, osteomyelitis and diabetic foot, immunodeficiency disease, and vascular graft surgery. The book will be a very useful guide to a great test that can provide significant assistance in patient management. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, in which leading professionals succinctly explain the importance of nuclear medicine in the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Sikandar Shaikh.
    Summary: This book covers all aspects of PET-CT including newer applications involving infection and inflammation and basic information on PET-CT new tracers. It explains the approach, protocols and miscellaneous applications about various infections and inflammation that helps in its early and better diagnosis in multiorgan and multisystem involvements in routine clinical practice. Chapters provide systematic approach to the diagnosis of various infections such as bacterial, viral, tuberculosis, inflammatory pathologies and overlap in coexisting tumors and superadded/associated infections. This book offers assistance to medical practitioners in understanding various advantages of PET-CT in single scan as compared to different modalities for diagnosis as well as oncologists dealing with concurrent malignant and non-malignant conditions, students, and interns.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    PET-CT Physics, Instrumentation and Techniques
    Physiological Variants in PET-CT
    Dual Time Point PET-CT Imaging
    PET-CT IN Fever of Unknown Origin
    PET-CT in Chest Infective Inflammatory Pathologies
    PET-CT in Myocardium, Epicardium and Pericardium Infective Inflammatory Pathologies
    PET-CT in Cardiovascular Pathologies
    PET-CT in Peripheral Vascular Pathologies
    PET-CT in Vasculitis
    PET-CT in Tuberculosis
    PET-CT IN Immunocompromised Status
    PET-CT in Polymyalgia Rheumatica
    PET-CT in Paediatric Infection and Inflammation
    PET-CT in Musculoskeletal Infections and Inflammations
    PET-CT in Evaluation of Prosthetic Joint Infections
    PET-CT in Urological Infections and Inflammations
    PET-CT in Viral Infections
    PET-CT in the Organ Transplantation
    Molecular Imaging in Infection and Inflammation.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Archi Agrawal, Venkatesh Rangarajan, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Michael S. Hofman, Rodney J. Hicks, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Valentina Ambrosini, Stefano Fanti, editors.
    Contents:
    Neuroendocrine Tumours: Epidemiology
    Pathology
    Management
    Radiological Imaging
    Radionuclide Imaging. PET/ CT in Neuroendocrine Tumors: Basic Principles of PET/ CT imaging
    Radiopharmaceuticals
    PET/ CT in Neuroendocrine Tumours.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Archi Agrawal, Venkatesh Rangarajan, Ameya D. Puranik, editors.
    Summary: This book provides an up-to-date summary of the latest scientific developments on the use of PET-CT imaging in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma (NHL). It encompasses the entire spectrum of NHL from pathology to radiological and PET-CT imaging and to the management of NHL. The highlight of the book is the excellent pictorial depiction of normal variants, pitfalls and artifacts while exploring the different types of NHL and its manifestations. Each chapter, written by well-known and experienced oncologists and physicians, is enriched by a wide range of images to ensure a clear concept of PET-CT imaging in NHL and will definitely keep the readers interested. This book will be a useful tool for nuclear physicians, radiologists, referring clinicians and oncologists, as well as para-medical staff working in this field.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1 - Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 2 - Pathology of Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 3 - Management of Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 4 Radiological imaging in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 5 PET-CT in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 6 PET-CT: Normal variants, artefacts and pitfalls in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma
    Chapter 7 PET-CT in Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma: Teaching cases. .
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Teresa Szyszko, editor.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction and epidemiology
    2. Pathology of oesophageal cancer and gastric cancer
    3. Management of oesophageal and gastric cancers
    4. Radiological imaging in oesophageal and gastric cancers
    5. Basic principles of PET/CT imaging
    6. ¹⁸F-FDG and non-FDG PET radiopharmaceuticals
    7. PET/CT imaging: patient instructions and preparation
    8. ¹⁸F-FDG PET/CT imaging: normal variants, pitfalls and artefacts
    9. FDG-PET/CT in oesophageal and gastric cancer
    10. Oesophageal and gastric malignancy: pictorial atlas
    Appendix 1. Regional lymph node stations for staging esophageal cancer
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Gary Cook, editor.
    Summary: This pocket book explains the significant and well-documented impact that PET/CT can have on the management of prostate cancer through the provision of high-quality evidence regarding function and structure. Up-to-date information is supplied on the relevance of PET/CT to diagnosis, treatment planning, and therapy, including the emerging role of PET/CT with PSMA. Readers will also find clear explanation of the relation of the clinical and pathological background to imaging and the value of PET/CT compared with conventional radiological imaging. The book will be an excellent asset for referring clinicians, nuclear medicine/radiology physicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, which presents contributions from professionals worldwide who share a common purpose in promoting nuclear medicine as an important imaging specialty for the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions.

    Contents:
    Epidemiology and Clinical Features of Prostate cancer
    Pathology of prostate cancer
    Management of Prostate Cancer
    Prostate cancer: Radiological Imaging
    The Role of PET/CT in Prostate Cancer Management
    Role of radiolabelled small molecules binding to PSMA in diagnosis and therapy of prostate cancer
    PET/CT in radiotherapy planning: current evidence in prostate cancer.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sue Chua, editor.
    Summary: This pocket book offers a succinct but comprehensive overview of the role of PET/CT in radiotherapy planning. Individual chapters are devoted to specific application of the technique to particular tumor types, including non-small cell lung, gastrointestinal, head and neck squamous cell, prostate, gynecological, and pediatric tumors. Helpful information is also presented on the practical implementation of PET/CT in routine oncological practice. Technical and logistical issues are discussed, and guidance provided on potential problems and pitfalls and available solutions. The book will be invaluable in assisting readers to exploit PET/CT's ability to significantly improve delineation of tumor tissue through the addition of metabolic information to structural imaging data, thereby avoiding unnecessary radiation injury and associated complications while enhancing therapeutic effects and minimizing the risk of marginal recurrences. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, compiled under the auspices of the British Nuclear Medicine Society.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Sobhan Vinjamuri, editor.
    Summary: "This pocket book provides a comprehensive review of the current use of PET/CT in thyroid cancer, offering a multidisciplinary perspective and explaining the role of PET/CT in relation to other imaging modalities. A key aim is to help readers to choose the correct imaging modality to answer the clinical question at hand, thereby assisting in patient management. Highlights of the book include the exquisite depiction of normal variants, pitfalls, and artifacts and a pictorial atlas of the types of thyroid cancer and their imaging appearances. Readers will also find helpful information on the relation of the clinical and pathological background to imaging. The book will be an excellent asset for practitioners and trainees in Nuclear Medicine and members of endocrine and oncology teams. It is published within the Springer series Clinicians' Guides to Radionuclide Hybrid Imaging, in which leading professionals succinctly explain the importance of nuclear medicine in the diagnosis and management of oncological and non-oncological conditions"--Back cover.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    Dragana Sobic Saranovic, Mariza Vorster, Sanjay Gambhir, Thomas Neil Pascual, editors.
    Summary: This book covers both the science of PET/CT imaging in tuberculosis and the impact that this technique can have on disease management through the provision of high-quality evidence regarding function and structure. The scientific principles of PET/CT, the radiopharmaceuticals used in the context of tuberculosis (FDG and non-FDG tracers), patient preparation, and imaging protocols are fully explained. Imaging findings obtained in different settings, including pulmonary and extrapulmonary tuberculosis, tuberculosis and HIV co-infection, and evaluation of response to antituberculous therapy, are described with the aid of many high-quality illustrations. Attention is drawn to mimics of tuberculosis, pitfalls, and limitations. The book will be an excellent asset for referring clinicians, nuclear medicine/radiology physicians, radiographers/technologists, and nurses who routinely work in nuclear medicine and participate in multidisciplinary meetings.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Foreword
    Preface
    Acknowledgements
    Contents
    1: Tuberculosis: A General Overview
    1.1 Introduction
    1.1.1 Epidemiology
    1.1.2 Geographic Distribution
    1.2 Risk Factors for Active TB (Progression from Latent TB Infection)
    1.3 Clinical Presentation
    1.4 Physical Examination
    1.5 Diagnosis
    1.5.1 Other Investigations
    1.5.2 Diagnosis of Latent Tuberculosis Infection (LTBI)
    1.5.3 Challenges in TB Diagnosis
    1.6 Special Categories
    1.6.1 TB and HIV
    1.6.1.1 Immune Reconstitution TB
    1.6.1.2 Drug-Resistant TB
    1.6.1.3 TB in Children 1.7 Future Developments
    1.8 Conclusion
    References
    2: Diagnosis of Tuberculosis: Microbiological and Imaging Perspective
    2.1 Introduction
    2.1.1 Investigations-Microbiological Tests
    2.1.1.1 Mantoux Tuberculin Skin Test
    2.1.1.2 Interferon-Gamma Release Assays (IGRAs)
    2.1.1.3 Sputum Smear Microscopy
    2.1.1.4 Fluorescent Microscopy
    2.1.1.5 Mycobacterial Culture
    2.1.1.6 Molecular Test
    2.1.1.7 Drug Sensitivity Testing
    2.1.1.8 Biomarker Tests
    2.1.1.9 Challenges for Microbiological Diagnosis
    2.1.2 Imaging in TB
    2.1.2.1 Pulmonary Tuberculosis 2.1.2.2 Postprimary Tuberculosis
    2.1.2.3 Extrapulmonary Tuberculosis
    2.1.3 Tuberculous Lymphadenopathy
    2.1.3.1 Ultrasonography
    2.1.3.2 CT and MRI
    2.1.3.3 18F-FDG PET-CT
    2.1.4 Abdominal Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.1 Abdominal Lymphadenopathy
    2.1.4.2 Peritoneal Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.3 Gastrointestinal Tract Tuberculosis
    Barium Studies
    Computed Tomography
    2.1.4.4 Hepatosplenic Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.5 Adrenal Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.6 Genitourinary Tuberculosis
    2.1.4.7 Renal Tuberculosis
    2.1.5 Female Genital Organs
    2.1.6 Male Genital Organs 2.1.7 Musculoskeletal Tuberculosis
    2.1.7.1 Tubercular Spondylitis
    Bone Scintigraphy
    18F-FDG PET-CT
    2.1.8 CNS Tuberculosis
    2.1.8.1 Tubercular Leptomeningitis
    2.1.8.2 Tubercular Pachymeningitis
    2.1.8.3 Tuberculoma
    Computed Tomography
    MRI
    2.1.8.4 Tubercular Abscess
    2.1.8.5 Rhombencephalitis
    2.1.8.6 Encephalopathy
    2.1.8.7 Spinal and Meningeal Involvement
    2.1.9 Other Tuberculosis
    2.1.9.1 Emerging Role of PET-CT: Challenges and Limitations
    2.1.9.2 TB Associated with HIV Infection
    2.2 Conclusion
    References 3: Radiological Imaging in Tuberculosis
    3.1 Primary Pulmonary Tuberculosis
    3.2 Postprimary Pulmonary Tuberculosis
    3.3 Radiological Patterns Encountered in Both Primary and/or Postprimary TB
    3.3.1 Miliary Tuberculosis
    3.3.2 Pleural Tuberculosis
    3.3.3 Tracheobronchial TB
    3.4 Complications
    3.5 Extrapulmonary Tuberculosis
    3.5.1 Genitourinary Tuberculosis
    3.5.2 Musculoskeletal Tuberculosis
    3.5.3 Central Nervous System Tuberculosis
    3.5.4 Gastrointestinal Tuberculosis
    References
    4: Management of Tuberculosis
    4.1 Introduction
    4.2 Prevention
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Ignasi Carrio, Pablo Ros, editors.
    Summary: PET/MRI is an exciting novel diagnostic imaging modality that combines the precise anatomic and physiologic information provided by magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) with the molecular data obtained with positron emission tomography (PET). PET/MRI offers the promise of a simplified work flow, reduced radiation, whole-body imaging with superior soft tissue contrast, and time of flight physiologic information. It has been described as the pathway to molecular imaging in medicine. In compiling this textbook, the editors have brought together a truly international group of experts in MRI and PET. The book is divided into two parts. The first part covers methodology and equipment and comprises chapters on basic molecular medicine, development of specific contrast agents, MR attenuation and validation, quantitative MRI and PET motion correction, and technical implications for both MRI and PET. The second part of the book focuses on clinical applications in oncology, cardiology, and neurology. Imaging of major neoplasms, including lymphomas and tumors of the breast, prostate, and head and neck, is covered in individual chapters. Further chapters address functional and metabolic cardiovascular examinations and major central nervous system applications such as brain tumors and dementias. Risks, safety aspects, and healthcare costs and impacts are also discussed. This book will be of interest to all radiologists and nuclear medicine physicians who wish to learn more about the latest developments in this important emerging imaging modality and its applications.

    Contents:
    PET/MR system design
    Image distortions in clinical PET/MR imaging
    Workflow and Practical Logistics
    MR-PET in Breast Cancer
    PET/MRI in Evaluating Lymphomas
    PET-MRI of the Liver
    PET/MR IN COLORECTAL CANCER PET/MR in Brain Imaging
    MR-PET in Cardiology
    Risks and safety aspects of MR-PET
    Health care costs and impacts.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Andrei Iagaru, Thomas Hope, Patrick Veit-Haibach, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    James R. Ballinger.
    Summary: This book presents in a consistent format data on ~50 PET radiopharmaceuticals in clinical use. Parameters include basic chemical data, normal biodistribution and excretion, activity administered, radiation dosimetry, patient preparation, and clinical utility, together with a few key references. In some cases a representative image is presented. The organisation is first by clinical specialty (oncology, cardiology, neurology) and within each section by radionuclide (F-18, C-11, etc). This book will be of interest mostly to nuclear medicine physicians and trainees, but also to a wider medical community including radiologists, oncologists and radiotherapists.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1: Oncology 18F-labelled agents
    Chapter 2: Oncology 11C-labelled agents
    Chapter 3: Oncology 68Ga-labelled agents
    Chapter 4: Oncology other agents
    Chapter 5: Cardiology 18F-labelled agents
    Chapter 6: Cardiology other agents
    Chapter 7: Neurology 18F-labelled agents
    Chapter 8: Neurology 11C-labelled agents
    Chapter 9: Neurology 15O-labelled agents.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Paul E. Christian, Nancy M. Swanston.
    Contents:
    PET radiopharmaceutical production
    PET radiopharmaceuticals
    Radiation principles and basic radiation detection devices
    PET instrumentation
    CT instrumentation
    Quality control and instrumentation artifacts
    Radiation safety in PET/CT
    Patient care and emergency procedures
    Oncology : patient preparation and imaging
    PET imaging in oncology
    Incorporation of CT and contrast media into PET practices
    Clinical artifacts
    PET imaging of the brain
    PET imaging of the heart.
    Print Unavailable: Checked out Recall Item
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RC78.7.T62 C47 2015
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Vincenzo Savini.
    Summary: Pet-to-Man Travelling Staphylococci: A World in Progress explores Staphylococci, a dangerous pathogen that affects both humans and animals with a wide range of infection states. This bacteria can spread rapidly as a commensal organism in both humans and pets, and is an agent of disease. Staphylococci are potentially highly virulent pathogens which require urgent medical attention. In addition, Staphylococci remain a threat within hospital environments, where they can quickly spread across a patient population. This book explores the organisms' resistance to many compounds used to treat them, treatment failure and multidrug resistant staphylococci, amongst other related topics.

    Contents:
    1. Staphylococcal taxonomy
    2. Staphylococcal ecology and epidemiology
    3. Coagulase-positive and coagulase-negative staphylococci human diseases
    4. Coagulase-positive and coagulase-negative staphylococci animal diseases
    5. Transfer of staphylococci and related genetic elements
    6. Food-borne transmission of staphylococci
    7. The staphylococcal coagulases
    8. The stafphylococcal hemolysins
    9. The staphylococcal panton-valentine leukocidin (PVL)
    10. The staphylococcal exfoliative toxins
    11. Extracellular proteases of Staphylococcus spp.
    12. Staphylococcal lipases
    13. Staphylococcal bacteriocins
    14. Phage-associated virulence determinants of Staphylococcus aureus
    15. Diagnostics: routine identification on standard and chromogenic media, and advanced automated methods
    16. Molecular identification and genotyping of Staphylococci: genus, species, strains, clones, lineages, and interspecies exchanges
    17. Methicillin resistance in Staphylococcus aureus
    18. In vivo resistance mechanisms: Staphylococcal biofilms
    19. Autovaccines in individual therapy of Staphylococcal infections
    20. Experimental animal models in evaluation of Staphylococcal pathogenicity
    21. Application of staphylococci in the food industry and biotechnology
    Index.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2018
  • Print
    Bohan, Peter T.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    L39 .P47
    2
  • Digital
    Laura Nabarro, Stephen Morris-Jones, David A.J. Moore.
    Contents:
    Arthropod-borne diseases
    Infections acquired through the gastrointestinal tract
    Infections acquired by airborne transmission
    Ectoparasites
    Bites, stings, venoms, toxins
    Nutrition
    Non-communicable disease
    Disease of unusual or uncertian aetiology.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    Michael Miloro, G.E. Ghali, Peter E. Larsen, Peter Waite, editors.
    Summary: The new edition of this outstanding reference textbook, in two volumes, offers comprehensive and authoritative coverage of the contemporary specialty of oral and maxillofacial surgery. The aim is to provide an all-encompassing, user-friendly source of information that will meet the needs of residents and experienced surgeons in clinical practice and will also serve as an ideal companion during preparation for board certification or recertification examinations. All of the authors, numbering some 100, are distinguished experts in the areas that they address. The new edition takes full account of the significant changes in clinical practice and guidelines that have occurred during recent years. Readers will find clear explanations of the practical application of surgical principles, with a wealth of supporting illustrative material, including atlas-type illustrations to complement the descriptions of specific procedures. The fourth edition of Petersons Principles of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery is a truly exceptional resource for clinicians and students alike. .

    Contents:
    Wound Healing
    Medical Management and Preoperative Patient Assessment
    Pharmacology of Outpatient Anesthesia Medications
    Outpatient Anesthesia
    Impacted Teeth
    Pre-Prosthetic Surgery
    Pediatric Dentoalveolar Surgery
    Utilization of Three-dimensional Imaging Technology to Enhance Maxillofacial Surgical Applications
    Dynamic Navigation for Dental Implants
    Implant Prosthodontics
    The Science of Osseointegrated Implant Reconstruction
    Comprehensive Implant Site Preparation: Mandible
    A Graft-less Approach for Treatment of the Edentulous Maxilla: Contemporary considerations for Treatment planning, Biomechanical principles and surgical protocol
    Soft Tissue Management in Implant Therapy
    Craniofacial Implant Surgery
    Initial Management of the Trauma Patient
    Soft Tissue Injuries
    Rigid versus Nonrigid Fixation
    Dentoalveolar and Intraoral Soft Tissue Trauma
    Contemporary Management of Mandibular Fractures
    Fractures of the Mandibular Condyle
    Management of Maxillary Fractures
    Management of Zygomatic Complex Fractures
    Orbital and Ocular Trauma
    Management of Frontal Sinus and Naso-orbitoethmoid Complex Fractures
    Nasal Fractures
    Maxillofacial Firearm Injuries
    Paediatric Facial Trauma
    Management of Panfacial Fractures
    Differential Diagnosis of Oral Disease
    Odontogenic Cysts and Tumors
    Benign Nonodontogenic Lesions of the Jaws
    Oral Cancer: Classification, Diagnosis, and Staging
    Oral Cancer Management
    Lip Cancer
    Head and Neck Skin Cancer
    Salivary Gland Disease
    Mucosal and Related Dermatologic Diseases
    Pediatric Maxillofacial Pathology
    Odontogenic Infections
    Osteomyelitis, Osteoradionecrosis(ORN) and Medication Related Osteonecrosis of the Jaws(MRONJ)
    Local and Regional Flaps
    Nonvascularized Reconstruction
    Vascularized Reconstruction
    Microneurosurgery
    Comprehensive Management of Facial Clefts
    Alveolar Cleft Reconstruction
    Nonsyndromic Craniosynostosis
    Craniofacial Dysostosis Syndromes: Evaluation and Treatment of the Skeletal Deformities
    Technology in Oral and Maxillofacial Reconstruction
    Anatomy and Pathophysiology of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Nonsurgical Management of Temporomandibular Disorders
    Arthroscopy and Arthrocentesis of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Internal Derangement of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Hypomobility and Hypermobility Disorders of the Temporomandibular Joint
    Pediatric temporomandibular disorders: Juvenile Idiopathic Arthritis
    Vascularized Reconstruction
    Craniofacial Growth and Development
    Digital Data Acquisition and Treatment Planning in Orthognathic Surgery
    Orthodontics for Orthognathic Surgery
    Model Surgery and Computer-aided Surgical Simulation for Orthognathic Surgery
    Mandibular Orthognathic Surgery
    Maxillary Orthognathic Surgery
    Sequencing in Orthognathic Surgery
    Concomitant Orthognathic and Temporomandibular Joint Surgery
    Facial Asymmetry
    Soft Tissue Changes and Prediction with Orthognathic Surgery
    Complications in Orthognathic Surgery
    Cleft Orthognathic Surgery
    Distraction Osteogenesis of the Craniomaxillofacial Skeleton
    Surgical and Non-surgical Management of Obstructive Sleep Apnea
    Blepharoplasty
    Basic Principles of Rhinoplasty
    Rhytidectomy
    Forehead and Brow Procedures
    Otoplastic Surgery for the Protruding Ear
    Adjunctive Facial Cosmetic Procedures.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Print
    Roux, Georges.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Stored offsite. Please request print.
    M111 .R87 1938
    1
  • Digital
    Giorgio Cavallini, Gianni Paulis, editors.
    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Anatomy of the penis, with special attention to the tunica albuginea and to the corpora cavernosa
    3. Epidemiology
    4. Aetiology and risk factors
    5. Nosology
    6. Natural history of Peyronie's disease
    7. Experimental models and laboratory research for Peyronie's disease
    8. Symptoms, their physiopathology, and outpatient clinical practice and diagnosis
    9. Congenital and acquired penile curvature: relationships and differences
    10. Psychological aspects of Peyronie's diseaese
    11. Imaging in Peyronie's disease
    12. Therapy: a general approach
    13. Medical therapy
    14. Combination therapy (in the treatment of Peyronie's disease)
    15. Surgical therapy for Peyronie's disease: why and when (an overview) --16. Advanced techniques of plication surgery with basal approach: when and why
    17. Corporoplasty: why and when
    18. Surgical treatment of Peyronie's disease of inflatable penile prosthesis
    19. Surgical techniques for difficult and complicated cases of Peyronie's disease
    20. Future perspectives in Peyronie's Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editor in chief: Grant C. Fowler ; section editors, Beth A. Choby [and six others].
    Contents:
    Anesthesia
    Dermatology
    Aesthetic medicine
    Eyes, ears, nose, and throat
    Cardiovascular and respiratory system procedures
    Gastrointestinal system procedures
    Urinary system procedures
    Male reproductive system
    Gynecology and female reproductive system
    Obstetrics
    Pediatrics
    Orthopedics and sports medicine
    Urgent care
    Hospitalist
    Appendices. Commonly used instruments/equipment
    Informed consent
    Latex allergy guidelines
    Supplier information
    Resources for learning and teaching procedures
    Universal precautions
    Neoplasms of the skin: ICD-9 codes
    Pearls of practice
    The Society of Teachers of Family Medicine Procedural Skills Task Force
    Outline of a comprehensive operative note
    Management guidelines for abnormal cervical cancer screening tests and histologic findings
    Buying major office equipment
    Special considerations in geriatric patients.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2020
  • Digital
    editors, Christian Surber, Christoph Abels, Howard Maibach.
    Contents:
    The acid mantle : a myth or an essential part of skin health? / Surber, C., Humbert, P., Abels C. (Bielefeld), Maibach, H. (San Francisco, CA)
    Buffering capacity / Proksch, E. (Kiel)
    Measurement of skin surface pH / du Plessis, J.L. (Potchefstroom), Stefaniak, A.B. (Morgantown, WV), Wilhelm, K.-P. (Schenefeld)
    Skin surface pH in newborns : origin and consequences / Fluhr, J.W. (Berlin), Darlenski, R. (Stara Zagora/Sofia)
    Intrinsic and extrinsic factors affecting skin surface pH / Farage, W.A., Hood, W. (Cincinnati, OH), Berardesca, E. (San Francisco, CA), Maibach, H. (Rome)
    Gender, age, and ethnicity as factors that can influence skin pH / Choi, E.H. (Wonju)
    Endogenous factors that can influence skin pH / Bíró, T., Oláh, A., Tóth, B.I., Szollosi, A.G. (Debrecen)
    Lipids in the skin and pH / Wohlrab, J., Gebert, A., Neubert, R.H.H. (Halle (Saale))
    Influence of pH on skin stem cells and their differentiation / Charruyer, A., Ghadially, R. (San Francisco, CA)
    The influence of calcium on the skin pH and epidermal barrier during aging / Rinnerthaler, M., Richter, K. (Salzburg)
    pH and microbial infections / Rippke, F. (Hamburg), Berardesca, E. (Rome), Weber, T.M. (Wilton, CT)
    pH in atopic dermatitis / Danby, S.G., Cork, M.J. (Sheffield)
    Role of skin pH in psoriasis / Bigliardi, P.L. (Minneapolis, MN)
    pH and acne / Schürer, N. (Osnabrück)
    pH and buffer capacity of topical formulations / Wohlrab, J., Gebert, A. (Halle (Saale))
    The relation of pH and skin cleansing / Blaak, J., Staib, P. (Würzburg)
    pH and drug delivery / Ostergaard Knudsen, N., Pommergaard Pedersen, G. (Ballerup)
    Metamorphosis of vehicles : mechanisms and opportunities / Surber, C. (Basel/Zürich), Knie, U. (Bielefeld)
    Influence of topical formulations : lipid lamella organization and lipid composition of stratum corneum as a surrogate marker for barrier integrity / Dahnhardt, D. (Flintbek), Surber, C. (Basel/Zürich), Dahnhardt-Pfeiffer, S. (Flintbek)
    Skin care products : age-appropriate cosmetics / Abels, C. (Bielefeld), Angelova-Fischer, I. (Lübeck)
    Skin care products for healthy and diseased skin / Surber, C. (Basel/Zürich), Dragicevic, N. (Belgrade), Kottner, J. (Berlin).
    Digital Access Karger 2018
  • Digital
    Rajen Gupta ; with the editorial assistance of Dr. Martin Beed.
    Summary: This book provides ophthalmic surgeons with a concise, clinical guide to performing the fundamentals steps in phacoemulsification cataract surgery. Clear diagrams and images are used throughout and the information can be adapted to a particular consultant's own technique once the surgical principles are understood. The chapters serve as a modular framework that allows for safe, effective learning of skills and use as a clinical training resource. Phacoemulsification Cataract Surgery serves as a helpful teaching aid for consultants, especially newly appointed, who have little experience in teaching. Basic fundamental rules are provided as a guide for training others to improve surgical techniques in clinical practice. Recently qualified and experienced consultants will find this book to be an indispensable resource for learning and teaching in the area of phacoemulsification cataract surgery. -- Publisher

    Contents:
    Understanding the Phacoemulsification Surgical Learning Process
    Irrigation/Aspiration
    Intraocular Lens Insertion
    Soft Lens Material Removal
    Manual Capsulorhexis
    Hydrodissection
    How to Palm an Instrument
    Phacoemulsification: Small Fragments
    Debulking of Lens Fragments
    Make-a-Space Technique
    Phacoemulsification: Grooving and Cracking
    Phacoemulsification: An Easy Stop, Chop and Crack Technique
    The Paracentesis Incision
    The Main Corneal Incision
    Essential Preparation: Draping, Safety and Surgeon Comfort
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    Andrzej Górski, Ryszard Miȩdzybrodzki, Jan Borysowski, editors.
    Summary: This book gives a detailed yet clear insight into the current state of the art of the therapeutic application of bacteriophages in different conditions. The authors bring in their practical expertise within their respective fields of expertise and provide an excellent overview of the potential and actual use of phage therapy. Topics like economic feasibility compared to traditional antibiotics and also regulatory issues are discussed in far detail. This new volume is therefore a valuable resource for individuals engaged in the medical application of novel phage therapies.

    Contents:
    Part I: Bacteriophages as antibacterialagents
    Chapter 1:Production of PhageTherapeutics and Formulations
    InnovativeApproaches
    Chapter 2:Phagepharmacokinetics: relationship with administrationroute
    Chapter 3:BacterialResistance to Phage and itsImpact on Clinical Therapy
    Part II: Bacteriophages and the immune system
    Chapter 4:Phageinteraction with the mammalianimmune system
    Chapter 5:Humoralimmuneresponse to phage-basedtherapeutics
    Part III:Use of bacteriophages to combat bacterial infections
    Chapter 6:How to achieve a goodphage therapy clinical trial?
    Chapter 7: Perspectives on the RenewedInterest in the United States
    Chapter 8:Phage Therapy in Orthopaedic Implant-associated Infections
    Chapter 9:The use of bacteriophages in animalhealth and food protection
    Chapter 10:Combiningbacteriophages with otherantibacterialagents to combatbacteria
    Chapter 11: Phage therapy of infectious biofilms: Challenges and strategies
    Part IV:Phage therapy
    regulatory and ethical aspects
    Chapter 12:Regulatory Considerations for Bacteriophage Therapy Products
    Chapter 13:Developing phagesintomedicines for Europe
    Chapter 14: Phagetherapy in Europe: Regulatory and intellectualpropertyprotectionissues
    Chapter 15:Ethics of phagetherapy
    Part V: Bacteriophage-derived antibacterial agents
    Chapter 16: NovelAlternative to Antibiotics.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Gert Folkerts, Johan Garssen, editors.
    Summary: This volume examines the effects of natural products and functional/medical foods (nutritional programming) on disease management. It specifically focuses on diseases related to inflammation and immunity, cancer and cachexia, allergies, and brain and neuro/immune. As both pharmacologists and nutritionists are recognizing that the one disease/one target/one drug (or nutrient) concept will be less successful than in the past, this book aims to stress the importance of a multi-target approach versus a single-target approach. It also presents aspects of molecular characteristics of food ingredients toward clinical effectiveness and relevance. The interest in food in health and disease has exploded in the past few years, and publications on the microbiome can be found in all major scientific journals and newspapers. A new concept uses functional foods hand in hand with standard pharmacological therapies, which can be conceptualized in the term 'pharma-nutrition.' With the complementary values of pharma and nutrition, scientists might be able to overcome the increased incidence worldwide of complex multi-factorial disorders, chronic and degenerative diseases in particular.

    Contents:
    1 Introductory Chapter
    2 New Developments in Food Safety Assessment: Innovations in Food Allergy and Toxicological Safety Assessment
    3 Bridging a Pharma-Like Innovation Gap in Medical Nutrition
    4 Modulation of the Gut Ecosystem in Irritable Bowel Syndrome
    5 The Role of Omega-6 and Omega-3 Fatty Acids in Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    6 N-3 Polyunsaturated Fatty Acid and Neuroinflammation in Aging: Role in Cognition
    7 Nutritional Programming of Immune Defense Against Infections in Early Life?
    8 Impact on Non-Digestible Oligosaccharides on Gut Associated Lymphoid Tissue and Oral Tolerance Induction
    9 The Endocannabinoid System: Molecular Connection between Nutrition and Pharmacology
    10 Effects of Natural products on Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics of Drugs
    11 Nutrition and Gastrointestinal Health as Modulators of Parkinson's Disease
    12 Eat to Heal: Natural Inducers of the Hem Oxygenase-1 System
    13 Recent Developments in the Treatment of Cachexia
    14 Individualized Tumor Therapy: Biomarkers and Possibilities for Targeted Therapy with Natural Products
    15 Nutrition in Oncology: from Treating Cachexia to Targeting the Tumor
    16 Nutraceuticals in Preventive Oncology: Chemical Biology and Translational Pharmaceutical Science
    17 The Onset Of Eczema: Underlying Mechanisms
    18 Cow's Milk Allergy: Protein Hydrolysates or Amino Acid Formula
    19 Allergen Avoidance Versus Tolerance Induction
    20 Nutrition and Cognitive Decline in Older Persons: Bridging the Gap between Epidemiology and Intervention Studies
    21 Nutraceutical Regulation of the Neuroimmunoendocrine Super System
    22 Targeting (Gut)-Immune-Brain Axis with Pharmaceutical and Nutritional Concepts: Relevance for Mental and Neurological Disorders
    23 Nutritional Approaches for Healthy Aging of the Brain and the Prevention of Neurodegenerative Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Kamal Biswas.
    Summary: The pharmaceutical industry needs a shot in the arm - and not a moment too soon. The executive suite is mired in a bygone era, a time when extensive, well-funded pharmaceutical R & D produced blockbuster drugs, kept everything in-house and reaped the financial rewards. But that way of working needs to change. Executives now need to know what the technologists in their companies are doing in order to survive the next decade. Written for those new to industry, as well as for experienced professionals or specialists looking to expand their knowledge, this book is a must-read for business executive.

    Contents:
    1.Pharma Health
    Critical Parts Need Redesigning
    2.The Pharmaceutical Value Chain
    An Introduction
    Drug Discovery
    Development
    Manufacturing
    Supply Chain Management
    Marketing
    Sales
    Regulatory Compliance
    Finance and Accounts
    Human Resources
    3.Technology Basics
    An Introduction
    Packaged and Custom Developed Technology Solutions
    Computer System Validation
    21 CFR Part 11 Compliance
    4.Courageous New World: Strategies to Improve Business Outcomes
    Staggering Genius in the Crowd: Nextgen R&D
    Feed Your Workhorse: Smarter Manufacturing
    Product Fast-Track: Remodel the Supply Chain
    In Digital We Trust: Industrialize Customer Centricity
    Scream With Mouth Shut: Global Compliance Strategy
    Why Patients Continue With Medicine: Patient Adherence
    The Perks in Emerging Markets: Go Global
    5.Measuring Business Values and Success
    The Pharma Value Cycle: How to Redefine Stakeholder Values
    The Unbearable Financials: Models to Realize Financial Value.
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2014
  • Digital
    edited by Peter Grunwald.
    Summary: This volume of Pharmaceutical Biocatalysis starts with a discussion on the importance of biocatalytic synthesis approaches for a sustainable and environmentally friendly production of pharmaceuticals and active pharmaceutical ingredients. Among the enzymes discussed in detail with respect to their pharmaceutical relevance are cyclic nucleotide phosphodiesterases playing an important role in modulating signal transduction in various cell types; human DOPA decarboxylase, related to Parkinson's disease and aromatic amino acid decarboxylase deficiency; and phospholipase D enzymes as drug targets. Isocitrate dehydrogenase 1 and 2 mutations are novel therapeutic targets in acute myeloid leukemia. An additional chapter is devoted to the use of enzymes for prodrug activation in cancer therapy. The other topics include small-molecule inhibitors targeting receptor tyrosine kinases in cancer, -Lactams and related compounds as antibacterials, non-vitamin K oral anticoagulants for the treatment of thromboembolic diseases, and the molecular mechanisms for statin pleiotropy and its clinical relevance in cardiovascular diseases. The last chapter is a review of lysosomal storage disorders with an overview of approved drugs for treating these disorders by enzyme replacement therapy.
    Digital Access TandFonline 2020
  • Digital
    Daan J.A. Crommelin, Robert D. Sindelar, Bernd Meibohm, editors.
    Summary: This introductory text explains both the basic science and the applications of biotechnology derived pharmaceuticals, with special emphasis on their clinical use. It serves as a complete one-stop source for undergraduate/graduate pharmacists, pharmaceutical science students, and for those who did not receive formal training in this field. Pharmaceutical Biotechnology: Fundamentals and Applications, Fifth Edition completely updates the previous edition, and includes additional coverage on newer approaches such as oligonucleotides, mi/siRNA, gene therapy and advanced therapeutics.

    Contents:
    Molecular Biotechnology
    Biophysical and biochemical analysis of recombinant proteins
    Production and downstream processing of biotech products
    Formulation of biotech products, including biopharmaceutical considerations
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of peptide and protein drugs
    Immunogenicity of pharmaceutical proteins
    General considerations of monoclonal antibodies from structure to therapeutic application
    Genomics, Other "Omics" Technologies, Personalized Medicine and Additional Biotechnology-Related Techniques
    Dispensing biotechnology products: handling, professional education and product information
    Economic considerations in medical biotechnology
    Regulatory framework for biosimilars
    Vaccines
    Oligonucleotides and siRNA
    Gene therapy
    Stem cell technology
    Therapeutic Applications.-Endocrinology
    Insulin
    Follicle-stimulating hormone
    Growth hormone
    Cardiovascular and Respiratory Applications
    Recombinant coagulation factors and thrombolytics
    Recombinant human deoxyribonuclease
    Oncology
    Monoclonal antibodies in oncology
    Hematopoetic growth factors
    Inflammation and Immunemodulation
    Monoclonal antibodies in transplantation
    Monoclonal antibodies and antibody-based therapeutics in anti-inflammatory therapy
    Interferons and interleukins
    Anti-infectious diseases
    Monoclonal antibodies
    Enzyme replacement therapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    Michalakis Savva.
    Summary: Pharmaceutical Calculations: A Conceptual Approach, is a book that combines conceptual and procedural understanding for students and will guide you to master prerequisite skills to carry out accurate compounding and dosage regimen calculations. It is a book that makes the connection between basic sciences and pharmacy. It describes the most important concepts in pharmaceutical sciences thoroughly, accurately and consistently through various commentaries and activities to make you a scientific thinker, and to help you succeed in college and licensure exams. Calculation of the error associated with a dose measurement can only be carried out after understanding the concept of accuracy versus precision in a measurement. Similarly, full appreciation of drug absorption and distribution to tissues can only come about after understanding the process of transmembrane passive diffusion. Early understanding of these concepts will allow reinforcement and deeper comprehension of other related concepts taught in other courses. More weight is placed on the qualitative understanding of fundamental concepts, like tonicity vs osmotic pressure, diffusion vs osmosis, crystalloids vs colloids, osmotic diuretics vs plasma expanders, rate of change vs rate constants, drug accumulation vs drug fluctuation, loading dose vs maintenance dose, body surface area (BSA) vs body weight (BW) as methods to adjust dosages, and much more, before considering other quantitative problems. In one more significant innovation, the origin and physical significance of all final forms of critical equations is always described in detail, thus, allowing recognition of the real application and limitations of an equation. Specific strategies are explained step-by-step in more than 100 practice examples taken from the fields of compounding pharmacy, pharmaceutics, pharmacokinetics, pharmacology and medicine.

    Contents:
    Measurement
    Error Assessment if the Drug Concentration In Pharmaceutical Mixtures
    Density And Specific Gravity
    Units Of Concentration And The Salt Factor
    Dilution And Concentration Of Pharmaceutical Solutions And Other Physical Mixtures
    Mixture Problems In Pharmaceutical Sciences.-Isotonicsolutions
    Diffusion.-Use Of Prefabricated Dosage Forms In Extemporaneous Compounding
    Fluids And Electrolytes
    Essential Mathematics For Pharmacokinetics
    Rates And Orders Of Reactions
    Fundamental Concepts of Dosage Calculation
    Dosage Calculations Based On Body Surface Area.-Intravenous Infusion And Flow Rate
    Appendix I- Interpretation Of Prescriptions And Medication Orders.-Appendix II-Miscellaneous Abbreviations Commonly Used in Pharmacy
    Appendix III- Units Of Measurement And Equivalent Conversions
    Appendix IV- Selected Roman Numerals
    Appendix V -Specific Gravity Of Miscellaneous Liquids
    Appendix IV- Table Of Atomic Masses.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Print
    edited by Herbert A. Lieberman, Martin M. Rieger, Gilbert S. Banker.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RS200 .P42 1988
    1
  • Digital
    edited by Jean Cornier, Andrew Own, Arno Kwade, and Marcel Van de Voorde.
    Contents:
    Entry to the Nanopharmacy Revolution. History: Potential, Challenges, and Future Development in Nanopharmaceutical Research and Industry / Albertina Ariën, Paul Stoffels
    Nanoscale Drugs: A Key to Revolutionary Progress in Pharmacy and Healthcare / Simon Sebastian Raesch, Marina Poettler, Christoph Alexiou, Claus-Michael Lehr
    The Emergence of Nanopharmacy: From Biology to Nanotechnology and Drug Molecules to Nanodrugs / Marilena Hadjidemetriou, Zahraa Al-Ahmady, Mariarosa Mazza, Kostas Kostarelos
    Understanding and Characterizing Functional Properties of Nanoparticles / Ester Polo, Valentina Castagnola, Kenneth A Dawson
    Omics-Based Nanopharmacy: Powerful Tools Toward Precision Medicine / Daniel Rosenblum, Dan Peer
    Fundamentals of Nanotechnology in Pharmacy. Nanostructures in Drug Delivery / Salma Nabil Tammam, Alf Lamprecht
    Characterization Methods: Physical and Chemical Characterization Techniques / Sven Even F Borgos
    Nanoparticle Characterization Methods: Applications of Synchrotron and Neutron Radiation / Martha Brennich, Marité Cardenas, Hiram Castillo-Michel, Marine Cotte, V Trevor Forsyth, Michael Haertlein, Simon A J Kimber, Geraldine Le Duc, Edward P Mitchell, Adam Round, Murielle Salome, Michael Sztucki
    Overview of Techniques and Description of Established Processes / Jan Henrik Finke, Michael Juhnke, Arno Kwade, Heike Bunjes
    Nanopharmacy: Exploratory Methods for Polymeric Materials / Kuldeep Bansal, Luana Sasso, Hiteshri Makwana, Sahar Awwad, Steve Brocchini, Cameron Alexander
    Overview and Presentation of Exploratory Methods for Manufacturing Nanoparticles/"Inorganic Materials" / Xavier Le Guevel
    Scale-Up and cGMP Manufacturing of Nanodrug Delivery Systems for Clinical Investigations / Mostafa Nakach, Jean-René Authelin
    Occupational Safety and Health / Thomas H Brock
    Development of Nanopharmaceuticals. Micro- and Nano-Tools in Drug Discovery / Andreas Dietzel, Monika Leester-Schädel, Stephan Reichl
    Computational Predictive Models for Nanomedicine / Marco Siccardi, Alessandro Schipani, Andrew Owen
    Drug Targeting in Nanomedicine and Nanopharmacy: A Systems Approach / Jingwei Shao, Lisa McConnachie, Rodney JY Ho
    Nanoparticle Toxicity: General Overview and Insights Into Immunological Compatibility / Marina A Dobrovolskaia
    An Overview of Nanoparticle Biocompatibility for Their Use in Nanomedicine / Matthew SP Boyles, Leagh G Powell, Ali Kermanizadeh, Helinor J Johnston, Barbara Rothen-Rutishauser, Vicki Stone, Martin JD Clift
    Translation to the Clinic: Preclinical and Clinical Pharmacology Studies of Nanoparticles
    The Translational Challenge / Rachel Tyson, Leah Osae, Andrew J Madden, Andrew T Lucas, William C Zamboni
    Regulatory Issues in Nanomedicines / Marisa Papaluca, Falk Ehmann, Ruben Pita, Dolores Hernan
    Social Studies of Nanopharmaceutical Research / Michael Schillmeier
    Pharmaceutical Applications of Nanomaterials. Nanoparticles for Imaging and Imaging Nanoparticles: State of the Art and Current Prospects / Thomas Maldiney, Nathalie Mignet
    Nanoparticle-Based Physical Methods for Medical Treatments / Christine Ménager
    Nanodrugs in Medicine and Healthcare: Oral Delivery / Alejandro Sosnik
    Steroidal Nanodrugs Based on Pegylated Nanoliposomes Remote Loaded with Amphipathic Weak Acids Steroid Prodrugs as Anti-Inflammatory Agents / Keren Turjeman, Yechezkel Barenholz
    Nanodrugs in Medicine and Healthcare: Pulmonary, Nasal and Ophthalmic Routes, and Vaccination / Christel C Müller-Goymann, Mukta Paranjpe
    Neurodegenerative Diseases
    Alzheimer's Disease / Maria Gregori, Francesca Re
    The Nanopharmaceutical Market. A Practical Guide to Translating Nanomedical Products / Raj Bawa
    Development and Commercialization of Nanocarrier-Based Drug Products / Marianne Ashford
    Future Outlook of Nanopharmacy: Challenges and Opportunities / Dan Peer, Jean Cornier, Marcel Van de Voorde.
    Digital Access Wiley 2017
  • Digital
    Zaheer-Ud-Din Babar, editor.
    Summary: A comprehensive and granular insight into the challenges of promoting rational medicine, this book serves as an essential resource for health policy makers and researchers interested in national medicines policies. Country-specific chapters have a common format, beginning with an overview of the health system and regulatory and policy environments, before discussing the difficulties in maintaining a medicines supply system, challenges in ensuring access to affordable medicines and issues impacting on rational medicine use. Numerous case studies are also used to highlight key issues and each chapter concludes with country-specific solutions to the issues raised. Written by highly regarded academics, the book includes countries in Africa, Asia, Europe, the Middle East and South America.

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Part I Low and Middle Income Countries
    Part II Upper Middle Income Countries
    Part III High Income Countries
    Part IV Further Perspectives.
    Digital Access Springer 2017
  • Digital
    edited by Walkiria S. Schlindwein, Mark Gibson.
    Contents:
    Front Matter
    Introduction to Quality by Design (QbD) / Bruce Davis, Walkiria S Schlindwein
    Quality Risk Management (QRM) / Noel Baker
    Quality Systems and Knowledge Management / Siegfried Schmitt
    Quality by Design (QbD) and the Development and Manufacture of Drug Substance / Gerry Steele
    The Role of Excipients in Quality by Design (QbD) / Brian Carlin
    Development and Manufacture of Drug Product / Mark Gibson, Alan Carmody, Roger Weaver
    Design of Experiments / Martin Owen, Ian Cox
    Multivariate Data Analysis (MVDA) / Claire Beckett, Lennart Eriksson, Erik Johansson, Conny Wikström
    Process Analytical Technology (PAT) / Line Lundsberg-Nielsen, Walkiria S Schlindwein, Andreas Berghaus
    Analytical Method Design, Development, and Lifecycle Management / Joe Sousa, David Holt, Paul A Butterworth
    Manufacturing and Process Controls / Mark Gibson
    Regulatory Guidance / Siegfried Schmitt, Mustafa A Zaman
    Index
    Supplemental Images.
    Digital Access Wiley 2018
  • Digital
    Reem K. Al-Essa, Mohammed Al-Rubaie, Stuart Walker, Sam Salek.
    Contents:
    1. Overview of Medicines Regulatory Systems in the Gulf Region
    2. The Regulatory Review Process in the Gulf Region
    3. Regulatory Review Times in the Gulf Region
    4. Quality Measures in the Gulf Regulatory Practices
    5. The Current Status of the Common Technical Document
    6. The Current Status of Drug Safety and Pharmacovigilance
    7. The Centralized Regulatory Review in the Gulf Region
    8. The Gulf States Assessment and Experience With the Centralised Procedure
    9. The Pharmaceutical Companies Assessment and Experience With the Centralised Procedure
    10. Proposal For an Improved Centralized Regulatory System
    11. The Strategic Planning Process of the GCC Regulatory Authorities: Barriers And Solutions
    12. The Regulatory Dilemma in the Gulf Region: The Way Forward.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Anthony J. Hickey, Hugh D.C. Smyth.
    Summary: Non-linear phenomena pervade the pharmaceutical sciences. Understanding the interface between each of these phenomena and the way in which they contribute to overarching processes such as pharmaceutical product development may ultimately result in more efficient, less costly and rapid implementation. The benefit to Society is self-evident in that affordable treatments would be rapidly forthcoming. We have aggregated these phenomena into one topic "Pharmaco-complexity: Non-linear Phenomena and Drug Product Development".

    Contents:
    Introduction
    Chemistry and Thermodynamics
    Solid State
    Dynamics
    Quality by Design
    Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics
    Poputaltion Biology
    Machine Learning.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Brian R. Moyer, Narayan P.S. Cheruvu, Tom C.-C. Hu, editors.
    Summary: Advances in drugs and biologics to mitigate or cure some of nature's most complex medical problems have been incredible to behold. These accomplishments are due to the actions of a wide theatre of participants from biologists, pharmacologists, geneticists, chemists and manufacturers, molecular biologists, toxicologists, clinicians, nurses, program managers, quality assurance personnel, regulatory professionals and a new group of innovators the Imaging Scientists. Imaging has grown from the microscopy sections put on slides with special stains to now in vivo slices created with innovative physics, imaging tracers and contrast agents, and incredibly fast and accurate computational systems. The world of biology has become one of witnessing the actions of drugs and biologics through the window of mechanical and electrical engineering creating instruments and reporter molecules that can help us see into our bodies and paint them with medical information needed to resolve disease. This book will inspire imagination and elicit even more innovations in the development of new and novel drugs and biologics through imaging.

    Contents:
    Imaging Platforms and Drug Development: An Introduction / Brian R. Moyer
    Imaging in Drug Development: Animal Models, Handling and Physiological Constraints / David B. Stout
    Considerations for Preclinical Laboratory Animal Imaging Center Design, Setup, and Management Suitable for Biomedical Investigation for Drug Discovery / Brenda A. Klaunberg and H. Douglas Morris
    Pharmaco-Imaging in Translational Science and Research / Immanuel Freedman
    The Role of Pharmacokinetics and Allometrics in Imaging: Practical Issues and Considerations / Brian R. Moyer
    Quantitative Imaging Using Autoradiographic Techniques / Eric G. Solon and Brian R. Moyer
    Preclinical Imaging in Oncology: Considerations and Recommendations for the Imaging Scientist / Daniel P. Bradley and Tim Wyant
    Use of Radiolabelled Leukocytes for Drug Evaluation in Man / Chrystalla Loutsios, Neda Farahi, Charlotte Summers, Prina Ruparelia, Jessica White [and 9 others]
    Application of Bioluminescence Imaging (BLI) to the Study of the Animal Models of Human Infectious Diseases / Hana Golding and Marina Zaitseva
    Preclinical Imaging in BSL-3 and BSL-4 Environments: Imaging Pathophysiology of Highly Pathogenic Infectious Diseases / Lauren Keith, Svetlana Chefer, Laura Bollinger, Jeffrey Solomon [and 4 others]
    Magnetic Resonance as a Tool for Pharmaco-Imaging / Brian R. Moyer, Tom C.-C. Hu, Simon Williams and H. Douglas Morris
    Technologies and Principles of Mass Spectral Imaging / Kevin A. Douglass, Demian R. Ifa and Andre R. Venter
    Regulatory Considerations Involved in Imaging / Brian R. Moyer, Narayan P. S. Cheruvu and Tom C.-C. Hu.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    [editors], Jerika T. Lam, Mary A. Gutierrez, Samit Shah.
    Summary: " ... this textbook is created for clinicians who are interested in practicing precision medicine by using the science of pharmacogenomics and making actionable, genotype-guided recommendations to optimize treatments for their patients. Furthermore, this textbook contains updated information about pharmacogenomics resources and the ethical and legal considerations to assist clinicians who are interested in implementing pharmacogenomics in practice settings"--Introduction

    Contents:
    Introduction and Fundamentals of Pharmacogenomics
    Implementation: A Guide to Implementing Pharmacogenomics Services
    Ethical, Legal, and Social Issues in Pharmacogenomics
    Pharmacogenomics Resources
    Cardiology Pharmacogenomics
    Infectious Diseases Pharmacogenomics
    Oncology Pharmacogenomics
    Psychiatry and Neurology Pharmacogenomics
    Transplant Pharmacogenomics.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2021
  • Digital
    edited by Qing Yan, PharmTao, Santa Clara, CA, USA.
    Contents:
    From pharmacogenomics and systems biology to personalized care : a framework of systems and dynamical medicine / Qing Yan
    Translational bioinformatics approaches for systems and dynamical medicine / Qing Yan
    Whole blood transcriptomic analysis to identify clinical biomarkers of drug response / Grant P. Parnell and David R. Booth
    Diagnostic procedures for paraffin-embedded tissues analysis in pharmacogenomic studies / Raffaele Palmirotta [and six others]
    Approach to clinical and genetic characterization of statin-induced myopathy / QiPing Feng
    Pharmacogenomics of membrane transporters : a review of current approaches / Tristan M. Sissung [and four others]
    G protein-coupled receptor accessory proteins and signaling : pharmacogenomic insights / Miles D. Thompson [and three others]
    G protein-coupled receptor mutations and human genetic disease / Miles D. Thompson [and four others]
    Pharmacogenetics of the G protein-coupled receptors / Miles D. Thompson [and six others]
    Pharmacogenomics of heart failure / Anastasios Lymperopoulos and Faren French
    Pharmacogenomics in the development and characterization of atheroprotective drugs / Efi Valanti, Alexandros Tsompanidis, and Despina Sanoudou
    Management of side effects in the personalized medicine era : chemotherapy-induced peripheral neuropathy / Paolo Alberti and G. Cavaletti
    Pharmacogenomics of Alzheimer's disease : novel therapeutic strategies for drug development / Ramón Cacabelos [and four others]
    Pharmacogenetics of antipsychotic treatment in schizophrenia / Jennie G. Pouget and Daniel J. Müller / Pharmacogenetics of addiction therapy / David A. Nielsen [and three others]
    Pharmacogenetics in rheumatoid arthritis / Deepali Sen, Jisna R. Paul, and Prabha Ranganathan
    Pharmacogenetics of osteoporotic fractures / José A. Riancho and Flor M. Pérez-Campo
    Pharmacogenomics and pharmacoepigenomics in pediatric medicine / Barkur S. Shastry
    Pharmacogenomics in children / Michael Rieder.
    Digital Access Springer 2014
  • Digital
    Weimin Cai, Zhaoqian Liu, Liyan Miao, Xiaoqiang Xiang , editors.
    Summary: This book provides an introduction to the principles of pharmacogenomics and precision medicine, followed by the pharmacogenomics aspects of major therapeutic areas such as cardiovascular disease, cancer, organ transplantation, psychiatry, infection, antithrombotic drugs. It also includes genotyping technology and therapeutic drug monitoring in Pharmacogenomics; ethical, Legal and Regulatory Issues; cost-effectiveness of pharmacogenetics-guided treatment; application of pharmacogenomics in drug discovery and development and clinical Implementation of Pharmacogenomics for Personalized Precision Medicine. The contributors of Pharmacogenomics in Precision Medicine come from a team of experts, including professors from academic institutions and practitioner from hospital. It will give an in-depth overview of the current state of pharmacogenomics in drug therapy for all health care professionals and graduate students in the era of precision medicine.

    Contents:
    Chapter 1. Introduction and Principles of Pharmacogenomics and Precision medicine
    Chapter 2. Pharmacogenomics in Cardiovascular Diseases
    Chapter 3. Pharmacogenomics of Antitumor Chemotherapeutic Agents
    Chapter 4. Pharmacogenomics of Antitumor Targeted Agent and Immunotherapy
    Chapter 5. Pharmacogenomics of Immunosuppressant
    Chapter 6. Pharmacogenomics of Psychiatric drugs
    Chapter 7. Pharmacogenomics of Anti-Infective Agents
    Chapter 8. Pharmacogenomics of Antithrombotic drugs
    Chapter 9. Pharmacogenomics in Therapeutic Drug Monitoring
    Chapter 10. Pharmacomicrobiomics
    Chapter 11. Genotyping technology in Pharmacogenomics
    Chapter 12. The Ethical, Legal and Regulatory Issues Associated with Pharmacogenomics
    Chapter 13. Cost-effectiveness of pharmacogenetic-guided treatment
    Chapter 14. Application of pharmacogenomics in drug discovery and development
    Chapter 15. Barriers and Solutions in Clinical Implementation of Pharmacogenomics for Personalized Precision Medicine.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Hector O. Ventura, editor.
    Contents:
    The Established Therapies: HF-PEF and HF-REF
    Novel Therapies for the Prevention and Management of Acute Decompensated Heart Failure
    A Comprehensive Transition of Care Plan For a Patient Admitted with Acute Decompensated Heart Failure
    Volume Assessment and Management: Medical and Device Therapies.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Parimelazhagan Thangaraj.
    Contents:
    1. Ethnobotanical study
    2. Pharmacognostical studies
    3. Extraction of bioactive compounds
    4. Preliminary phytochemical studies
    5. Proximate composition analysis
    6. Mineral quantification
    7. Anti-nutritional factors
    8. Quantification of secondary metabolites
    9. In vitro antioxidant assays
    10. In vitro antihaemolytic activity
    11. Antimicrobial activity
    12. In vitro anthelmintic assay
    13. Toxicity studies
    14. In vivo antioxidant assays
    15. Analgesic activity
    16. Anti-inflammatory activity
    17. Antipyretic activity
    18. Inflammatory bowel disease
    19. In vitro anti-arthritic activity
    20. Anti-diarrhoeal activity
    21. Anti-ulcer activity
    22. Hepatoprotective activity
    23. Anti-diabetic activity
    24. Evaluation of anti-diabetic property on streptozotocin-induced diabetic rats
    25. In vivo wound healing studies
    26. Determination of cytotoxicity
    27. Induction of apoptosis
    28. Anti-tumour activity
    29. Protein bioavailability in animal model
    30. Detection of phenolic and flavonoid compounds using high performance thin layer chromatography (HPTLC)
    31. Isolation of compounds
    32. Molecular docking of bioactive compounds against BRCA and COX proteins
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    Yoo Keun Chan, Kwee Peng Ng, Debra Si Mui Sim, editors.
    Summary: This book is the 4th in a series of Acute Care books written with the aim to address the NEEDS of health care providers when handling the acutely ill patients. Globally it has become apparent that the study of pharmacology and subsequent clinical training has not always adequately equipped young doctors with the ability to administer drugs to their patients safely and confidently, particularly in the critically ill patient. Compounding this issue is the lack of resource material related to these pharmacological concepts contained in one book that can help health care providers to understand and manage drug therapy in the acute situation. In spite of progressively newer and more developed protocols, guidelines, algorithms and many other books addressing the technical aspects of what needs to be done, most health care providers still find it difficult to grasp the basic pharmacological knowledge and rationally deliver the CARE that is required in the acute phase of patient management. The editors/authors have therefore aimed for a book that highlights topics and pharmacological issues pertinent to management of patients in their hour of need. This is a multi-author book but the style has been guided by 3 editors. The editors have used a different perspective? that of normalizing abnormal physiological processes with pharmacological agents? to address the GAPS in a bedside to bench approach. The details are pared down but important principles/concepts are emphasized.

    Contents:
    Preface
    I General Principles of Pharmacology and Pharmaceutics.- Why drugs are administered.- Drug administration.- Drug absorption and bioavailability
    Drug distribution.- Drug elimination.- Steady-state principles.- Dose-response relationship.- Pharmaceutical aspects of drugs.
    Dosage forms, dose calculations and prescriptions.- Drug interactions. II Pharmacology of the various body systems.- Drugs and the cardiovascular system.- Drugs and the respiratory system.- Drugs and the central nervous system.- Drugs and the liver/ gastrointestinal system.- Drugs and the renal system.- Drugs and the endocrine system.- Drugs and the neuromuscular system.- Drugs for the management of pain.- III Pharmacology in special circumstances.- The patient in pain.- The pediatric patient.- The elderly patient.- The obstetric patient.- The obese patient.- The bleeding patient.- The septic patient.- The allergic patient.- The poisoned patient.- IV Pharmacology of special drugs.- Oxygen as a drug.- Fluids as drugs
    V Safety issues in pharmacology
    Medication Errors. Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Abimbola Farinde, PhD, PharmD, Megan Hebdon, PhD, DNP, RN, NP-C.
    Summary: "An evidence-based, quick-access reference for adult gerontology nurse practitioners and related healthcare providers, this text describes a holistic, patient-centered approach to prescribing drugs to older adults. Comprehensive yet concise writing distills timely guidance on the complexities of safely prescribing to this unique population"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
  • Digital
    Dimos D. Mitsikostas, Koen Paemeleire editors.
    Contents:
    1. Headache classification
    2. Epidemiology of headache disorders
    3. General principles of pharmacotherapy for headache disorders.- 4. Placebo and nocebo effects
    5. Review of existing guidelines
    6. Acute migraine treatment
    7. Preventive (episodic) migraine treatment
    8. Drug treatment for chronic migraine
    9. Drug treatment for episodic and chronic tension-type headache (TTH)
    10. Cluster headache: acute and transitional treatment
    11. Cluster headache: preventive treatment
    12. Pharmacotherapy for other primary headache disorders
    13. Pharmacotherapy for primary headache disorders in children
    14. Pharmacological strategies in the prevention of migraine in children
    15. Pharmacotherapy for primary headache disorders during pregnancy and lactation
    16. Pharmacotherapy for primary headache disorders in the elderly
    17. Acute and chronic posttraumatic headache
    18. Headache attributed to low and increased CSF pressure
    19. Medication-overuse headache
    20. Painful cranial neuropathies
    21. Dental and Musculoskeletal Pain
    22. Post-traumatic neuropathies and Burning mouth syndrome.
    Digital Access Springer 2016
  • Digital
    María Alejandra Alvarez.
    Summary: The aim of this book is to offer information about the Pharmacological Properties of Native Plants from Argentina to students, researchers and graduates interested in the fields of Ethnobotany, Pharmacognosy, Phytochemistry, Pharmacy, and Medicine. The book includes summary information about the native plants from Argentina with medical activity comprising their botanical characteristics, distribution, characteristics of the regions where they grow, ethnobotanical information, chemical data, biological activity, establishment of in vitro cultures, toxicity, and legal status.

    Contents:
    Preface
    Medicinal Plants in Argentina
    Ethnobotany in Argentina
    Cuyo
    The Pampa: an infinite plain
    Mesopotamia-Paranaense Forest
    Puna- a surrealistic landscape in the Argentinean Highlands
    Yungas
    Chaco and Espinal
    Patagonia
    Index.
    Digital Access Springer 2019
  • Digital
    George E. Barreto, Amirhossein Sahebkar, editors.
    Summary: Medicinal plants and their derived products remain as an indispensable source of bioactive molecules that serve as either drug candidates or lead compounds for drug design and discovery. There are several advantages for plant-derived therapeutics including wide availability, diverse pharmacological actions and a generally good profile of safety and tolerability. Over the recent years, there have been numerous reports from clinical studies testifying to the efficacy and safety of medicinal plants and phytochemicals in ameliorating several human diseases. A plethora of basic studies has also unravelled molecular mechanisms underlying the health benefits of herbal medicines. Nevertheless, issues such as identification of bioactive ingredients, standardization of the products and drug interactions remain to be further studied. In this book, we aim to put together several chapters on the medicinal properties and pharmacological action of medicinal plants, plant species and phytochemicals. The goal of this contributed volume is to present a comprehensive collection on most important therapeutic aspects of plant-derived natural products and their molecular mechanisms of action.
    Digital Access Springer 2021
  • Digital
    Gustavo Alves Andrade dos Santos, editor.
    Summary: Alzheimers disease is the most prevalent form of dementia. Although it was discovered about a century ago, the first drugs applied in treatment were only introduced in therapy in the last 30 years. This book focuses on the clinical pharmacology of drugs that aim to delay the progression of Alzheimers disease, such as anticholinesterases and glutamate receptor antagonists, as well as treatment for the behavioral changes caused by the progression of the disease: antidepressants, antipsychotics, anxiolytics, and mood stabilizers. In addition, it describes important information about the pathophysiology and diagnostic methods of Alzheimers disease, emergency situations conditioned by the dementia process, and presents new perspectives for the treatment of Alzheimers disease. The ten chapters cover topics such as mechanism of action, dosage regimen, adverse reactions, drug interactions, toxicity profiles, among other information of clinical relevance. The work comprises evidence-based studies, providing a valuable resource for analyzing, prescribing and monitoring patients being treated for Alzheimers disease. Written by experts with solid professional experience, this book will appeal to pharmacologists, geriatricians, neurologists, psychiatrists, biomedical clinicians, and other healthcare professionals.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction
    2. Principles of Pharmacology in Dementia
    3. The Viability of Treatment Conditioned to the Pathophysiology of Alzheimer's Disease
    4. The Use of Esterase Inhibitors
    5. Pharmacology of NMDA (N-methyl-D-aspartate) receptor antagonists in Alzheimers Disease
    6. Supportive Pharmacological Treatment
    7. Herbal Medicines and Supplements
    8. Emergency Situations
    9. Relationships between Treatment and Clinical Evaluations
    10. New Perspectives for Treatment in Alzheimer's Disease.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    Pablo Avanzas, Juan Carlos Kaski, editors.
    Summary: This book describes the clinical challenge currently posed by stable angina pectoris and provides guidance for those making clinical decisions regarding its pharmacological treatment. The importance of providing effective treatment is beyond dispute and this book deals with the most relevant aspects related to its pharmacological treatment. The pathogenesis of myocardial ischemia as the basis for rational treatment of angina is discussed thoroughly together with all major management goals including optimal symptom control and the secondary prevention of serious cardiovascular events. Pharmacological Treatment of Chronic Stable Angina Pectoris provides a clear description of the mechanisms of action and clinical indications of available anti-angina drugs and strategies for the use of novel pharmacological agents. It also includes a critical appraisal of the major management guidelines, which will assist the reader to interpret current evidence and provide the most appropriate forms of treatment. The ongoing controversy regarding medical therapy versus myocardial revascularization for the management of stable angina pectoris is also addressed. This eminently practical book will help guiding the reader through the complexities of the field and will be highly appreciated by clinicians, clinical cardiologists and cardiology trainees alike.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    Andrea E. Cavanna.
    Summary: "Seignot's 1961 scientific report of a case of Tourette syndrome effectively treated with Haloperidol promoted a further 'paradigm shift' from the psychoanalytic theories to the current genetic and neurochemical theories on the aetiology and pathogenesis of Tourette syndrome. Seignot's observation was replicated throughout the world, starting with Caprini and Melotti's case report, which was published in the same year. The introduction of a pharmacological agent to control tics led to the speculation about a neurochemical substrate upon which medications work. Specifically, the unprecedented success of Haloperidol in controlling tics by blocking dopamine receptors in the brain suggested that might therefore be an excess of dopaminergic neurotransmission. American psychiatrists Arthur and Elaine Shapiro promoted the description of Tourette syndrome as a neurological disorder that by definition stood in opposition to psychoanalytic claims. The psychoanalytic perspective was successfully challenged in a book on Tourette syndrome published by the Shapiros in 1978. This paradigm shift in turn kindled interest in tracing the genetic basis of Tourette syndrome, a line of research which has flourished since the 1970s. Throughout the 1980s, studies on other first generation antidopaminergic medications, as well as alpha-2 adrenergic medications, were published, whereas in the 1990s the second generation of antidopaminergic medications were developed. During the first decade of the new millennium, Aripiprazole (sometimes referred to as 'third generation antidopaminergic medication') was first shown to be characterized by good efficacy and tolerability in the treatment of tics. More recently, a range of other medications belonging to different pharmaceutical classes have been investigated in patients with Tourette syndrome. The vast majority of these medications are pharmacological agents initially developed to treat other neuropsychiatric conditions"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2020
  • Digital
    Catherine E. Pelletier-Dattu.
    Summary: Composed entirely of tables and diagrams, this innovative text delivers a complete review of pharmacology in a way that simulates the way students think and learn.

    Contents:
    Pharmacology basics
    Antimicrobial medications
    Autonomic nervous system structure and medications
    Psychiatric medications
    Drugs affecting neurologic function
    Medications affecting cardiac and renal function
    Respiratory drugs
    Gastrointestinal drugs
    Drugs affecting the endocrine system
    Oncologic drugs
    Immunomodulators
    Drugs used to treat inflammation
    Toxicology
    Alternative medications.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
  • Digital
    Mark A. Simmons, PhD.
    Summary: "Pharmacology: An Essential Textbook covers the facts of pharmacology--the study of the effects of drugs on the body--and integrates the concepts to master for success in the classroom, in the laboratory and for board examinations. It provides a focused text for pharmacology courses. It can also be used as a source of key knowledge for daily clinical practice"-- Provided by publisher.
  • Digital
    [edited by] Hugh C. Hemmings, Talmage D. Egan.
    Summary: "Pharmacology and Physiology for Anesthesia: Foundations and Clinical Application, 2nd Edition, delivers the information you need in pharmacology, physiology, and molecular-cellular biology, keeping you current with contemporary training and practice. This thoroughly updated edition is your one-stop, comprehensive overview of physiology, and rational anesthetic drug selection and administration, perfect for study, review, and successful practice"--Publisher's description.

    Contents:
    Section 1: Basic principles of pharmacology. Mechanisms of drug action
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics for intravenous anesthetics
    Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of inhaled anesthetics
    Drug metabolism and pharmacogenetics
    Physiology and pharmacology of obesity, prematurity, and aging
    Pharmacodynamic drug interactions
    Adverse drug reactions
    Section 2: Nervous system. Central nervous system physiology: neurophysiology
    Central nervous system physiology: cerebrovascular
    Pharmacology of intravenous anesthetics
    Pharmacology of inhaled anesthetics
    Neuropharmacology
    Autonomic nervous system: physiology
    Autonomic nervous system: pharmacology
    Thermoregulation
    Physiology of pain
    Intravenous opioid agonists and antagonists
    Oral and non-intravenous opioids
    Non-opioid analgesics and anti-inflammatory drugs
    Local anesthetics
    Neuromuscular physiology and pharmacology
    Neuromuscular blockers and reversal drugs
    Section 3: Cardiovascular system. Cardiovascular physiology: cellular and molecular regulation
    Cardiovascular physiology: integrative function
    Vasopressors and inotropes
    Antihypertensive drugs and vasodilators
    Anti-arrhythmic drugs
    Cardiopulmonary resuscitation
    Section 4: Pulmonary system. Pulmonary physiology
    Pulmonary pharmacology
    Section 5: Gastrointestinal and endocrine systems. Liver and gastrointestinal physiology
    Liver and gastrointestinal pharmacology
    Nutritional and metabolic therapy
    Pharmacology of postoperative nausea and vomiting
    Endocrine physiology
    Endocrine pharmacology
    Physiology and pharmacology of obstetric anesthesia
    Section 6: Immunity and Infection. Chemotherapy, Immunosuppression, and Anesthesia
    Infection, Antimicrobial Drugs and Anesthesia
    Section 7: Fluid, electrolyte and hematologic homeostasis. Renal physiology
    Intravascular volume: regulation and replacement therapy
    Electrolytes and diuretics
    Section 8: Blood and hemostasis. Blood and coagulation
    Transfusion and coagulation therapy
    Antiplatelet and anticoagulant therapy.
    Digital Access ClinicalKey 2019
  • Digital
    [edited by] Frank J. Dowd, DDS, PhD (Professor Emeritus, Pharmacology, Cheighton University, School of Medicine and School of Dentistry, Omaha, Nebraska), Barton S. Johnson, DDS, MS (Director, General Practice Residency Program, Swedish Medical Center, Private Practice, Seattle Special Care Dentistry, Seattle, Washington), Angelo J. Mariotti, DDS, PhD (Professor and Chair, Periodontology, the Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio).
    Digital Access ScienceDirect 2017
  • Digital
    Tom Peck, Consultant Anaesthetist, Royal Hampshire County Hospital, Winchester; Honorary Consultant, University Hospital Southampton, Benjamin Harris, Consultant Anaesthetist, Hampshire Hospitals NHS Trust.
    Summary: "The art of anaesthesia includes many different facets deeply rooted in medical behaviour: listening and talking to the patient, evaluating, diagnosing and taking the right decisions. Drugs are central to patient care in many areas of medical practice and the anaesthetist as well as all healthcare practitioners need to have a clear understanding of therapeutics. However, competence in anaesthetic management during the whole perioperative management of our patients implies good knowledge of pharmacology; it is the bread and butter of our profession. The dynamic nature of drug development in this field compels a continuous updating of the characteristics of drugs that form such an essential part of our armamentarium"-- Provided by publisher.
    Digital Access Cambridge 2021
  • Digital
    [edited by] Blaine Templar Smith.
    Summary: "The Second Edition teaches undergraduate nursing students the basic concepts of pharmacology. The text draws on the experience of contributing authors in the field of nursing. It takes a new approach to teaching the complex topic of pharmacology through its concise, digestible coverage of material, reader friendly design, and use of images and tables to reinforce content"--Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Introduction to pharmacology
    Introduction to drug action : the interplay of pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics
    Medication administration
    Central nervous system drugs
    Autonomic nervous system drugs
    Cardiovascular medications
    Respiratory medications
    Pharmacology of the gastrointestinal tract
    Endocrine system drugs
    Medications for eye and ear disorders
    Pharmacology of the genitourinary system
    Drugs associated with pregnancy, labor and delivery, and lactation
    Pharmacology in dermatologic conditions
    Pharmacology of psychotropic medications
    Pharmacology of anesthetic drugs
    Pharmacology of antimicrobial drugs.
    Digital Access R2Library 2020
    Limited to 1 simultaneous user
  • Digital
    Erin E. Jobst, Peter C. Panus, Marieke Kruidering-Hall.
    Summary: "The goal of this book is to provide a comprehensive - yet focused - foundation in pharmacology to help rehabilitation professionals understand how medication use may alter the clinical presentation of our patients as well as their responses to therapeutic interventions. In this second edition, two licensed physical therapists (Drs. Jobst and Panus) with extensive training in pharmacology worked closely with Dr. Marieke Kruidering-Hall, a pharmacologist previously involved in medical pharmacology texts. The information follows the sequence of traditional pharmacology textbooks and integrated organ systems-based curricula. The initial section is a synopsis of the nature of drugs, basic principles of pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetics, and an overview of the drug development and approval process in the United States. Subsequent chapters include drugs that affect the autonomic and central nervous systems, cardiovascular and pulmonary systems, and the endocrine, gastrointestinal, and musculoskeletal systems. A chemotherapeutic section includes chapters covering anti-microbial drugs, cancer chemotherapy agents, and drugs that modify the immune system"-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    PART I: BASIC PRINCIPLES
    Chapter 1: Introduction
    Chapter 2: Pharmacodynamics
    Chapter 3: Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacogenomics
    PART II: DRUGS AFFECTING THE CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
    Chapter 4: Introduction to Autonomic Pharmacology
    Chapter 5: Drugs Affecting the Cholinergic System
    Chapter 6: Sympathomimetics and Sympatholytics
    Chapter 7: Antihypertensive Drugs
    Chapter 8: Drugs Used in the Treatment of Angina Pectoris
    Chapter 9: Drugs Used in Heart Failure
    Chapter 10: Antiarrhythmic Drugs
    Chapter 11: Drugs Affecting the Blood
    PART III: DRUGS AFFECTING THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM
    Chapter 12: Introduction to the Pharmacology of Central Nervous System Drugs
    Chapter 13: Sedative-Hypnotic Drugs
    Chapter 14: Antiseizure Drugs
    Chapter 15: General Anesthetics
    Chapter 16: Local Anesthetics
    Chapter 17: Pharmacologic Management of Parkinson's Disease and Other Movement Disorders
    ^Chapter 18: Antipsychotic Agents and Lithium
    Chapter 19: Antidepressant Agents
    Chapter 20: Opioid Analgesics and Antagonists
    Chapter 21: Drugs of Abuse
    PART IV: SELECTED TOPICS IN ENDOCRINE FUNCTION
    Chapter 22: Growth, Thyroid, and Gonadal Pharmacology
    Chapter 23: Corticosteroids and Corticosteroid Antagonists
    Chapter 24: Pancreatic Hormones and Antidiabetic Drugs
    Chapter 25: Drugs that Affect Bone Mineral Homeostasis
    Chapter 26: Antihyperlipidemic Drugs
    PART V: CHEMOTHERAPEUTICS
    Chapter 27: Antibacterial Agents
    Chapter 28: Antiviral Agents
    Chapter 29: Antifungal and Antiparasitic Agents
    Chapter 30: Miscellaneous Antimicrobial Agents: Disinfectants, Antiseptics, Sterilants, and Preservatives
    Chapter 31: Cancer Chemotherapy
    Chapter 32: Immunopharmacology
    PART VI: DRUGS AFFECTING THE MUSCULOSKELETAL SYSTEM
    Chapter 33: Skeletal Muscle Relaxants
    ^Chapter 34: Drugs Affecting Eicosanoid Metabolism, Disease-Modifying Antirheumatic Drugs, and Drugs Used in Gout
    PART VII: SPECIAL TOPICS
    Chapter 35: Drugs Affecting the Respiratory System
    Chapter 36: Drugs Used in Gastrointestinal Disorders.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
    AccessPhysiotherapy
  • Digital
    clinical editors, Carolyn Gersch, PhD (candidate), MSN, RN, CNE, Nicole M. Heimgartner, MSN, RN, COI, Cherie R. Rebar, PhD, MBA, RN, COI, Laura M. Willis, DNP, APRN, FNP-C.
    Summary: "The fully updated Pharmacology Made Incredibly Easy, Fourth Edition, clarifies all the major drug therapy concepts with expert direction on administering all classes of drugs."--Back cover.

    Contents:
    Fundamentals of nursing pharmacology / Victoria Wilson
    Autonomic nervous system drugs / Sharon Wing
    Neurologic and neuromuscular drugs / Sarah Clark
    Pain medications / Adair Lattimer
    Cardiovascular drugs / Katrin Moskowitz
    Respiratory drugs / Katrin Moskowitz
    Gastrointestinal drugs / Margaret M. Gingrich
    Genitourinary drugs / Amy Beckmann
    Hematologic drugs / Emily Sheff
    Endocrine drugs / Tracy Taylor
    Psychotropic drugs / Sarah Clark
    Anti-infective drugs / Charity L. Hacker
    Anti-inflammatory, antiallergy, and immunosuppressant drugs / Tracy Taylor
    Antineoplastic drugs / Sarah Clark
    Drugs for fluid and electrolyte balance / Emily Sheff.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    clinical editors, Cherie R. Rebar, Nicole M. Heimgartner, Carolyn J. Gersch.
    Digital Access Ovid 2022
  • Digital
    Clinton B. Mathias, Jeremy P. McAleer, Doreen E. Szollosi, editors.
    Summary: Medicine has entered a golden age in which therapeutic agents are becoming widely available due to advances in basic science and technology. As such, many drugs have been developed that target inflammatory processes and/or the immune system. This book is intended for health professionals examining the modulation of inflammation by immunotherapeutic drugs. The immune system fills the primordial role of host defense and resistance to infections with pathogenic microorganisms. Several hematopoietic-derived cells constituting the innate and adaptive immune systems cooperate to provide barriers for microbial colonization and/or promote pathogen destruction within the host. Conversely, many immune cells are also involved in the pathogenesis and propagation of chronic inflammatory diseases. The beginning of this book details various components of the immune system including the cell types, lymphoid tissues, soluble cytokines and surface molecules that are essential for host defense. Breakdowns in immune tolerance, or dysregulated immune responses to antigens derived from self tissues or innocuous sources, can lead to the development of autoimmunity or chronic inflammatory diseases. Pathophysiologic roles for the immune system are detailed in corresponding chapters on autoimmunity, epithelial surfaces (lungs, skin, intestine), and transplantation, with special emphasis placed on immunotherapeutic drug targets. The last section of the book focuses on treatments that stimulate our immune system to specifically target and fight infectious diseases and cancer. In each chapter, the medications used to treat various diseases/conditions in terms of their mechanism of action and other pharmacologic properties are discussed in detail. Chapters begin with a table showing drug names and classifications. The importance of basic science and clinical trials cannot be understated in the context of drug development. As such, the discovery of certain medications that had a lasting impact in medicine and pharmacy are highlighted in chapter subsections named "Bench to Bedside." Several clinical applications of immunotherapeutic drugs are described within end-of -chapter case studies including practice questions. The Pharmacology of Immunotherapeutic Drugs is a reference for immunologists and clinicians (medical doctors, pharmacists, nurses) examining the modulation of inflammatory processes by a variety of medications targeting the cells and mediators of our immune system.

    Contents:
    Preface Chapter 1: Overview of the Immune System and its Pharmacological Targets
    Chapter 2: Modulation of the Innate Immune System
    Chapter 3: Modulation of the Adaptive Immune System
    Chapter 4: Respiratory Disorders of the Immune System and their Pharmacological Treatment
    Chapter 5: Inflammation of the Skin and its therapeutic topics
    Chapter 6: Inflammatory Diseases of the Gastrointestinal Tract and Pharmacological Treatments
    Chapter 7: Mechanisms of Autoimmunity and Pharmacologic Treatments
    Chapter 8: Transplantation: Immunologic Principles and Pharmacologic Agents
    Chapter 9: Immunopathogenesis, Immunization, and Treatment of Infectious Diseases
    Chapter 10: Cancer Immunotherapy.
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Alan Cowan, Gil Yosipovitch, editors.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Print
    editor, Anand Ramachandran.
    Summary: "Pharmacology Recall uses a 2-column Q&A format to provide quick and accessible review of pharmacology for medical students. Though the basic science volumes in this series have generally not fared well, this text has performed consistently and receives strong reviews from students. While subjects like Anatomy proved to be too complex for the Recall style, Pharmacology seems to be particularly effective due to the nature of the subject--there is lots to memorize, or "recall.""--Provided by publisher.
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Exam Review Books (shelved at Information Desk)
    RM301.12 .P44 2020
    1
  • Digital
    Mario Babbini, Mary Thomas.
    Contents:
    General principles of pharmacology
    Autonomic nervous system
    Central nervous system
    Cardiovascular and renal systems
    Endocrine system
    Respiratory, gastrointestinal, and hematopoietic systems
    Inflammation and immunomodulation
    Chemotherapeutic drugs.
  • Digital
    editors: Manish Kumar, Ashita Sharma, Praveen Kumar.
    Summary: The book presents a comprehensive and up-to-date overview of phytochemicals as efficient cancer therapeutics. Over the last few decades there has been a paradigm shift from conventional cancer therapeutic approaches to alternative and complementary medicinal approaches especially using phytoconstituents from natural products. As such, the book provides an in-depth understanding of phytochemicals targeting diverse signaling pathways involved in cancer along with the evaluation of the cancer modulatory effects of phytochemicals. It also highlights the potential modulatory effect of single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) on the cancer-associated cellular pathways and their interactions with the phytochemicals. Further, it analyzes the drug delivery methods, bioavailability of active components of botanicals, and toxicity of phytochemicals. Lastly, the book elucidates the 3D cell culture and animal models systems to analyze the beneficial effects of phytochemicals in cancer.

    Contents:
    Intro
    Preface
    Contents
    Editors and Contributors
    List of Contributors
    1: Phytochemicals in Cancer Chemoprevention: A Brief Perspective
    1.1 Introduction
    1.2 Phytochemicals in Cancer Therapy
    1.3 Potential of Phytochemicals for Cancer Chemoprevention
    1.3.1 Phytochemicals as ROS Scavengers and Redox Modulators
    1.3.2 Phytochemicals in DNA Damage and Repair
    1.3.3 Phytochemicals Control Gene Expression
    1.3.4 Phytochemicals Modulate Phase 1 and Phase 2 Enzymes
    1.3.5 Phytochemicals Inhibit Cell Proliferation
    1.3.6 Phytochemicals Promote Autophagy 1.3.7 Phytochemicals Exhibit Anti-inflammatory Effects
    1.3.8 Phytochemicals Modulate Tumor Metabolism
    1.3.9 Phytochemicals Modulate Gut Microbiota to Prevent Cancer
    1.4 Limitations of Phytochemicals as Therapeutics for Chemoprevention
    1.4.1 Complex Mixture of Metabolites
    1.4.2 Bioavailability of Phytochemicals
    1.4.3 Biphasic Effects
    1.5 Phytochemicals in Clinical Trials and the Therapies
    1.6 Future Directions: Filling in the Gaps
    1.7 Conclusions
    References
    2: Role of Phytochemicals in Modulating Signaling Cascades in Cancer Cells 2.4.5.1 Plant Products in the Modulation of PI3K-AKT Signaling
    2.4.6 Wnt Cell Signaling
    2.4.6.1 Plant Products in the Modulation of Wnt Signaling
    2.4.7 mTOR Pathway
    2.4.7.1 Plant Products in the Modulation of mTOR Signaling
    2.4.8 Phytochemicals as Modulators of Antioxidant and Anti-Inflammatory Stress
    2.4.9 Cell Cycle Modulators
    2.4.10 Tumor Suppressor Genes Activation and DNA Repair Mechanism
    2.4.11 Inducing Programmed Cell Death/Apoptosis
    2.4.11.1 Induction of Apoptosis by Phytochemicals
    2.5 Conclusion
    References 3: Diverse Cancer Therapeutic Interactions: Complexities in Cancer Management
    3.1 Introduction
    3.2 Complex Interaction of Anticancer Drugs with Signal Transduction Pathways in Cells
    3.3 Therapeutic Limitations of Anticancer Drugs
    3.3.1 Doxorubicin
    3.3.2 Abiraterone
    3.3.3 Asparaginase (Erwinia chrysanthemi)
    3.3.4 Axitinib
    3.3.5 Tamoxifen
    3.3.6 Crizotinib
    3.4 Competing the Complex Cellular Networks Towards a Rational Cancer Therapy
    3.5 Therapeutic Limitations Due to Personalized Cancer Treatment
    3.5.1 Applications of Personalized Therapy
    Digital Access Springer 2020
  • Digital
    Amritpal Singh Saroya, Jaswinder Singh.
    Summary: "Natural Products have always played a pivotal role as sources for drug lead compounds. This book is aimed at providing inside purview of the scope of natural products (including herbal and marine) in the possible treatment of neurological disorders. The book explains pre-clinical neuropharmacological investigations done on herbs including Bacopa monnieri, Hypericum perforatum, Passiflora incarnata, Scutellaria baicalensis and Piper methysticum. It provides a comprehensive overview of the role of phytoconstituents like huperzine, curcumin, Salvinorin A, bioflavonoids, sulforaphane, tanshinone IIA, tetramethylpyrazine, tetrahydrocannabinol, and cannabidiol in the treatment of neurological disorders. The book provides a modern concept of herbal medications, neuropharmacology of marine bioactive products and Ayurvedic formulations, herbal drugs with abuse potential and neurotoxic mycotoxins."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    1. Introduction to Herbal Medicine
    2. Medicinal Herbs Used in Herbal Medicine for Neurological Disorders
    3. Neuropharmacology of Genus Hypericum. Hypericin and Hyperforin
    4. Neuropharmacology of Lavender, Rosemary and Salvia
    5. Neuropharmacology of Passiflora Genus
    6. Neuropharmacology of Scutellaria baicalensis Georgi
    7. Piper methysticum G. Forst: a Potent Antianxiety Agent
    8. Neuropharmacology of Melissa officinalis L.
    9. Neuropharmacology of Chamomiles
    10. Neuropharmacology of Bacopa monnieri with Reference to Bacosides
    11. Neuropharmacology of Acorus calamus L.
    12. Neuropharmacology of Celastrus paniculatus Willd.
    13. Phytopharmacology of Indian Nootropic Convolvulus pluricaulis
    14. Neuropharmacology of Rhodiola rosea L.
    15. Neuropharmacology of Salvia miltiorrhiza Bunge (Danshen)
    16. Neuropharmacology of Withania somnifera Dunal.
    17. Neuropharmacology of Nardostachys jatamansi DC.
    18. Neuropharmacology of Nutritional Supplements
    19. Neuropharmacology of Valeriana Genus
    20. Neuropharmacology of Curcumin. Intro; Contents; About the Authors; 1: Introduction toHerbal Medicine; 1.1 Some Basic Definitions; 1.2 History ofHerbal Medicine; 1.3 Renaissance ofHerbal Medicine; 1.4 Herbal Glossary; 2: Medicinal Herbs Used inHerbal Medicine forNeurological Disorders; 2.1 Albizia julibrissin Baker (Fabaceae); 2.2 Acorus gramineus Sol. Aiton (Acoraceae); 2.3 Acorus tatarinowii Schott (Acoraceae); 2.4 Amphilophium crucigerum (L.) L.G. Lohmann (Bignoniaceae); 2.5 Galphimia glauca Cav. (Malpighiaceae); 2.6 Hypoxis hemerocallidea Fisch. & C.A. Mey. (Hypoxidaceae) 2.7 Litsea glaucescens Kunth (Lauraceae)2.8 Leonurus sibiricus L. (Lamiaceae); 2.9 Melissa officinalis L. (Lamiaceae); 2.10 Nepeta cataria L. (Lamiaceae); 2.11 Nepeta hindostana (Roth) Haines (Lamiaceae); 2.12 Petiveria alliacea L.; 2.13 Salvia guaranitica St. Hil. (Lamiaceae); 2.14 Sceletium tortuosum (L.) N.E. Brown (Aizoaceae); 2.15 Sorbus alnifolia (Sieb. et Zucc.) K. Koch (Rosaceae); 2.16 Stereospermum kunthianum Cham. (Bignoniaceae); 2.17 Tilia tomentosa Moench (Tiliaceae); 2.18 Verbena officinalis L. (Verbenaceae); References 3.13.3 Hypericum andObsessive-Compulsive Disorder (OCD)3.13.4 Comparative Trials withSynthetic Drugs; 3.13.4.1 Hypericum Extract vs Maprotiline; 3.13.4.2 Hypericum Extract Versus Imipramine; 3.13.4.3 Hypericum Extract Versus Amitriptyline; 3.13.4.4 Hypericum Extract Versus Fluoxetine; 3.13.4.5 Hypericum Extract Versus Sertraline; 3.13.4.6 Hypericum Extract Versus Citalopram; 3.13.4.7 Hypericum Extract Versus Paroxetine; 3.14 Neuropharmacology ofOther Hypericum Species; 3.14.1 Hypericum calycinum L.; 3.14.2 Hypericum caprifoliatum Cham. & Schltdl. 3.6.1.5 Neuroprotective Activity3.7 Neuropharmacology ofHypericin; 3.7.1 Non-clinical; 3.7.2 Clinical; 3.8 Neuropharmacology ofPseudohypericin; 3.9 Neuropharmacology ofH. perforatum Xanthones; 3.10 Neuropharmacology ofH. perforatum Flavonoids; 3.11 Neuropharmacology ofHyperforin; 3.11.1 Non-clinical; 3.11.2 Clinical; 3.12 Neuropharmacology ofAdhyperforin; 3.13 Clinical Pharmacology ofH. perforatum Extract; 3.13.1 Clinical Trials inDepression; 3.13.1.1 Mild toModerate Depression; 3.13.1.2 Severe Major Depression; 3.13.2 Hypericum andSeasonal Affective Disorder (SAD) 3: Neuropharmacology ofGenus Hypericum: Hypericin andHyperforin3.1 Hypericum perforatum Linn. (Guttiferae); 3.2 Habitat; 3.3 Botany; 3.4 Traditional Use inTreatment ofDiseases oftheNervous System; 3.5 Chemistry; 3.5.1 Napthodianthrones; 3.5.2 Acylphloroglucinols; 3.5.3 Flavonoids; 3.5.4 Flavanols; 3.5.5 Xanthones andSterols (Mathis andOurisson 1964); 3.5.6 Terpenoids; 3.6 Neuropharmacology ofH. perforatum Extract; 3.6.1 Non-clinical Studies; 3.6.1.1 Antidepressant Activity; 3.6.1.2 Anxiolytic Activity; 3.6.1.3 Anti-dementia Activity; 3.6.1.4 Antistress Activity
    Digital Access Springer 2018
  • Digital
    editors, Virginia P. Arcangelo, PhD, NP, Family Nurse Practitioner, Retired, Berlin, New Jersey, Andrew M. Peterson, PharmD, PhD, FCPP, John Wyeth Dean, Professor of Clinical Pharmacy and Professor of Health Policy, University of the Sciences in Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Veronica F. Wilbur, PhD, APRN-FNP, CNE, FAANP, Assistant Professor of Graduate Nursing, West Chester University, West Chester, Pennsylvania, Jennifer A. Reinhold, BA, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Associate Professor of Clinical Pharmacy, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, University of the Sciences in Philadelphia, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
    Contents:
    Unit 1: Principles of therapeutics. Issues for the practitioner in drug therapy
    Pharmacokinetic basis of therapeutics and pharmacodynamic principles
    Impact of drug interactions and adverse events on therapeutics
    Principles of pharmacotherapy in pediatrics
    Principles of pharmacotherapy in pregnancy and lactation
    Pharmacotherapy principles in older adults
    Principles of pharmacology in pain management
    Principles of antimicrobial therapy
    Complementary and alternative medicine
    Pharmacogenomics
    Unit 2: Pharmacotherapy for skin disorders. Contact dermatitis
    Fungal infections of the skin
    Viral infections of the skin
    Bacterial infections of the skin
    Psoriasis
    Acne vulgaris and rosacea
    Unit 3: Pharmacotherapy for eye and ear disorders. Ophthalmic disorders
    Otitis media and otitis externa
    Unit 4: Pharmacotherapy for cardiovascular disorders. Hypertension
    Hyperlipidemia
    Chronic stable angina
    Heart failure
    Arrhythmias
    Unit 5: Pharmacotherapy for respiratory disorders
    Upper respiratory infections
    Asthma
    Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
    Bronchitis and pneumonia
    Unit 6: pharmacotherapy for gastrointestinal tract disorders
    Nausea and vomiting
    Gastroesophageal reflux disease and peptic ulcer disease
    Constipation, diarrhea, and irritable bowel syndrome
    Inflammatory bowel disease
    Unit 7: pharmacotherapy for genitourinary tract disorders. Urinary tract infection
    Prostatic disorders and erectile dysfunction
    Overactive bladder
    Sexually transmitted infections
    Unit 8: Pharmacotherapy for musculoskeletal disorders. Osteoarthritis and gout
    Rheumatoid arthritis
    Unit 9: Pharmacology for neurological/psychological disorders. Headaches
    Seizure disorders
    Major depressive disorder
    Anxiety disorders
    Insomnia and sleep disorders
    Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder
    Alzheimer disease
    Parkinson disease
    Unit 10: Pharmacotherapy for endocrine disorders. Diabetes mellitus
    Thyroid disorders
    Unit 11: Pharmacotherapy for immune disorders. Allergies and allergic reactions
    Human immunodeficiency virus
    Unit 12: Pharmacotherapy for hematologic disorders. Pharmacotherapy for venous thromboembolism prevention and treatment, stroke prevention in atrial fibrillation, and thromboembolism prevention with mechanical heart valves
    Anemias
    Unit 13: Pharmacotherapy in health promotion. Immunizations
    Smoking cessation
    Weight loss
    Unit 14: Women's health. Contraception
    Menopause
    Osteoporosis
    Vaginitis
    Unit 15: Integrative approach to patient care. The economics of pharmacotherapeutics
    Integrative approaches to pharmacotherapy: a look at complex cases.
    Digital Access Ovid 2017
  • Digital
    editors, Joseph T. DiPiro, Gary C. Yee, L. Michael Posey, Stuart T. Haines, Thomas D. Nolin, Vicki L. Ellingrod.
    Summary: "The 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach offers excellent information to address aspects of all four of these educational outcomes. Recognizing the need for a consistent process in the delivery of patient care across the profession, the Joint Commission of Pharmacy Practitioners (JCPP) in 2014 released the Pharmacists' Patient Care Process (PPCP). The process is applicable to any practice setting where pharmacists provide patient care and for any patient care service provided by pharmacists. ACPE Standards 2016 incorporated the PPCP as a required component of the curriculum. The 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach provides a new chapter fully describing the PPCP's purpose and components. In a unique and very innovative approach the new edition provides a "patient care process box" for the clinical conditions addressed. Each "box" focuses on the collection and assessment of information relevant to the clinical condition, the development of a plan of treatment and its implementation, as well as how to monitor and evaluate the success of the plan. This new feature should make the 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach stand out from any other clinical textbook for pharmacy students. Although I have focused this foreword, primarily as a textbook for faculty and students in the United States, as a site visitor for ACPE's International Services Program, I became aware of how much previous editions of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach have been adopted in other countries and the positive reactions from our international faculty and student colleagues. Likewise, because of the new edition's focus on the PPCP and the detail with which it is applied to various clinical conditions that pharmacists face in practice, I believe the 11th edition of Pharmacotherapy : A Pathophysiologic Approach will prove to be an outstanding source for the continuing professional development of pharmacists in all practice settings."-- Provided by publisher.

    Contents:
    Section 1. Foundation issues
    Section 2. Common health problems
    Section 3. Special populations
    Section 4. Cardiovascular disorders
    Section 5. Respiratory disorders
    Section 6. Gastrointestinal disorders
    Section 7. Renal disorders
    Section 8. Neurologic disorders
    Section 9. Psychiatric disorders
    Section 10. Endocrinologic disorders
    Section 11. Gynecologic and obstetric disorders
    Section 12. Urologic disorders
    Section 13. Immunologic disorders
    Section 14. Rheumatologic disorders
    Section 15. Ophthalmic disorders
    Section 16. Dermatologic disorders
    Section 17. Hematologic disorders
    Section 18. Infectious diseases
    Section 19. Oncologic disorders
    Section 20. Nutritional disorders.
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessAPN
    AccessAPN
    AccessPharmacy
  • Digital/Print
    editors, Joseph T. DiPiro, Robert L. Talbert, Gary C. Yee, Gary R. Matzke, Barbara G. Wells, L. Michael Posey ; associate editors, Vicki L. Ellingrod, Stuart T. Haines, Thomas D. Nolin.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
    Print Access Request
    Location
    Version
    Call Number
    Items
    Books: General Collection (Downstairs)
    RM263 .P56 2017
    1
  • Digital
    editors, Terry L. Schwinghammer, Julia M. Koehler, Jill S. Borchert, Douglas Slain, Sharon K. Park.
    Contents:
    Principles of patient-focused therapy
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Renal disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Women's health (gynecologic disorders)
    Urologic disorders
    Immunologic disorders
    Bone and joint disorders
    Disorders of the eyes, ears, nose, and throat
    Dermatologic disorders
    Hematologic disorders
    Infectious disorders
    Oncologic disorders
    Nutrition and nutritional disorders
    Complementary and alternative therapies (Level III).
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
  • Digital
    Terry L. Schwinghammer, Julia M. Koehler, Jill S. Borchert, Douglas Slain, Sharon K. Park
    Summary: Medicine is an ever-changing science. As new research and clinical experience broaden our knowledge, changes in treatment and drug therapy are required. The authors and the publisher of this work have checked with sources believed to be reliable in their efforts to provide information that is complete and generally in accord with the standards accepted at the time of publication. However, in view of the possibility of human error or changes in medical sciences, neither the authors nor the publisher nor any other party who has been involved in the preparation or publication of this work warrants that the information contained herein is in every respect accurate or complete, and they disclaim all responsibility for any errors or omissions, or for the results obtained from use of the information contained in this work. Readers are encouraged to confirm the information contained herein with other sources. For example and in particular, readers are advised to check the product information sheet included in the package of each drug they plan to administer to be certain that the information contained in this work is accurate and that changes have not been made in the recommended dose or in the contraindications for administration. This recommendation is of particular importance in connection with new or infrequently used drugs

    Contents:
    Principles of patient-focused therapy
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Renal disorders
    Neurologic disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Gynecologic and obstetric disorders
    Urologic disorders
    Immunologic disorders
    Bone and joint disorders
    Eyes, ears, nose and throat disorders
    Dermatologic disorders
    Hematologic disorders
    Infectious diseases
    Oncologic disorders
    Nutrition and nutritional disorders
    Complementary and alternative therapies (level III)
    Digital Access
    Provider
    Version
    AccessPharmacy
    AccessAPN
    AccessAPN
  • Digital
    Xingshun Qi, Yongping Yang, editors.
    Summary: This book aims to provide an updated information on different types of major and emerging drugs for managing liver cirrhosis and its complications, including acute gastroesophageal variceal bleeding, ascites, hepatic encephalopathy, liver failure, acute kidney injury, and portal venous thrombosis. The chapters are organized by drug class, such as anti-HBV drugs, anti-HCV drugs, anticoagulants, and antibiotics, etc. The clinical efficacy, indication, and contra-indication of the various drug therapies are discussed using supportive reference material from authoritative sources and published clinical trials. It will be an invaluable reference for physicians who are treating patients with liver cirrhosis, especially those presenting with acute life-threatening complications.

    Contents:
    Anti-HBV drugs in liver cirrhosis
    Anti-HCV drugs in liver cirrhosis
    Anticoagulants in liver cirrhosis
    Antibiotics in liver cirrhosis
    Silymarin in liver cirrhosis
    Ursodeoxycholic acid in liver cirrhosis
    Emricasan in liver cirrhosis
    Non-selective beta blockers in liver cirrhosis
    Somatostatin and octreotide in liver cirrhosis
    Terlipressin in liver cirrhosis
    Diuretics in liver cirrhosis
    Statins in liver cirrhosis
    L-Ornithine L-Aspartate in liver cirrhosis
    Lactulose in liver cirrhosis.
    Digital Access Springer 2022
  • Digital
    [edited by] Barbara G. Wells, PharmD, FASHP, FCCP, Dean Emeritus and Professor Emeritus, Executive Director Emeritus, Research Institute of Pharmaceutical Sciences, School of Pharmacy, the University of Missippi, Oxford, Missippi, Joseph T. DiPiro, FCCP, Professor and Dean, Archie O. McCalley Chair, School of Pharmacy, Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, Virginia, Terry L. Schwinghammer, PharmD, FCCP, FASHP, FAPHA, BCPS, Professor and Chair, Department of Clinical Pharmacy, School of Pharmacy, West Virginia University, Morgantown, University, Cecily V. DiPiro, PharmD, CDE, Consultant Pharmacist.
    Contents:
    Section 1: Bone And Joint Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 1: Gout And Hyperuricemia
    Chapter 2: Osteoarthritis
    Chapter 3: Osteoporosis
    Chapter 4: Rheumatoid Arthritis
    Section 2: Cardiovascular Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 5: Acute Coronary Syndromes
    Chapter 6: Arrhythmias
    Chapter 7: Cardiac Arrest
    Chapter 8: Dyslipidemia
    Chapter 9: Heart Failure
    Chapter 10: Hypertension
    Chapter 11: Ischemic Heart Disease
    Chapter 12: Shock
    Chapter 13: Stroke
    Chapter 14: Venous Thromboembolism
    Section 3: Dermatologic Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 15: Acne Vulgaris
    Chapter 16: Dermatologic Drug Reactions And Common Skin Conditions
    Chapter 17: Psoriasis
    Section 4: Endocrinologic Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 18: Adrenal Gland Disorders
    Chapter 19: Diabetes Mellitus
    Chapter 20: Thyroid Disorders
    Section 5: Gastrointestinal Disorders Edited By Joseph T. Dipiro And Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 21: Cirrhosis And Portal Hypertension
    Chapter 22: Constipation
    Chapter 23: Diarrhea
    Chapter 24: Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
    Chapter 25: Hepatitis, Viral
    Chapter 26: Inflammatory Bowel Disease
    Chapter 27: Nausea And Vomiting
    Chapter 28: Pancreatitis
    Chapter 29: Peptic Ulcer Disease
    Section 6: Gynecologic And Obstetric Disorders Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Chapter 30: Contraception
    Chapter 31: Menopausal, Perimenopausal, And Postmenopausal Hormone Therapy
    Chapter 32: Pregnancy And Lactation: Therapeutic Considerations
    Section 7: Hematologic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 33: Anemias
    Chapter 34: Sickle Cell Disease
    Section 8: Infectious Diseases Edited By Joseph T. Dipiro
    Chapter 35: Antimicrobial Regimen Selection
    Chapter 36: Central Nervous System Infections
    Chapter 37: Endocarditis
    Chapter 38: Fungal Infections, Invasive
    Chapter 39: Gastrointestinal Infections
    Chapter 40: Human Immunodeficiency Virus Infection
    Chapter 41: Influenza
    Chapter 42: Intra-abdominal Infections
    Chapter 43: Respiratory Tract Infections, Lower
    Chapter 44: Respiratory Tract Infections, Upper
    Chapter 45: Sepsis And Septic Shock
    Chapter 46: Sexually Transmitted Diseases
    Chapter 47: Skin And Soft-tissue Infections
    Chapter 48: Surgical Prophylaxis
    Chapter 49: Tuberculosis
    Chapter 50: Urinary Tract Infections
    Chapter 51: Vaccines, Toxoids, And Other Immunobiologics
    Section 9: Neurologic Disorders Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Chapter 52: Alzheimer Disease
    Chapter 53: Epilepsy
    Chapter 54: Headache: Migraine And Tension-type
    Chapter 55: Pain Management
    Chapter 56: Parkinson Disease
    Chapter 57: Status Epilepticus
    Section 10: Nutrition Support Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 58: Obesity
    Chapter 59: Nutrition Evaluation And Support. Section 11: Oncologic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 60: Breast Cancer
    Chapter 61: Colorectal Cancer
    Chapter 62: Lung Cancer
    Chapter 63: Lymphomas
    Chapter 64: Prostate Cancer
    Section 12: Ophthalmic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 65: Glaucoma
    Section 13: Psychiatric Disorders Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Chapter 66: Generalized Anxiety Disorder, Panic Disorder, And Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
    Chapter 67: Bipolar Disorder
    Chapter 68: Major Depressive Disorder
    Chapter 69: Schizophrenia
    Chapter 70: Sleep-wake Disorders
    Chapter 71: Substance-related Disorders
    Section 14: Renal Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 72: Acid–base Disorders
    Chapter 73: Acute Kidney Injury
    Chapter 74: Chronic Kidney Disease
    Chapter 75: Electrolyte Homeostasis
    Section 15: Respiratory Disorders Edited By Terry L. Schwinghammer
    Chapter 76: Allergic Rhinitis
    Chapter 77: Asthma
    Chapter 78: Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
    Section 16: Urologic Disorders Edited By Cecily V. Dipiro
    Chapter 79: Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia
    Chapter 80: Erectile Dysfunction
    Chapter 81: Urinary Incontinence
    Appendices Edited By Barbara G. Wells
    Appendix 1: Drug Allergy
    Appendix 2: Geriatrics
    Appendix 3: Drug-induced Hematologic Disorders
    Appendix 4: Drug-induced Liver Disease
    Appendix 5: Drug-induced Pulmonary Disease
    Appendix 6: Drug-induced Kidney Disease.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2017
  • Digital
    [edited by] Terry L. Schwinghammer, Joseph T. DiPiro, Vicki L. Ellingrod, Cecily V. DiPiro.
    Summary: Pharmacotherapy Handbook, Eleventh Edition delivers quick-access answers in any clinical setting. Whether you're a student, pharmacist, and hospital administrator, it offers a thorough understanding about what drugs are used in various situations, and why. The text delivers both the key points pharmacists needs to know in practice and the information students studying for the boards needs to pass. With JNC-VI guidelines-- the standard for drug therapy and pharmaceutical care--it facilitates fast and easy access to answers, and all text will appear on AccessPharmacy for the first time.

    Contents:
    Bone and Joint disorders
    Cardiovascular disorders
    Dermatologic disorders
    Endocrinologic disorders
    Gastrointestinal disorders
    Gynecologic and Obstetric disorders
    Hematologic disorders
    Infectious Diseases
    Neurologic disorders
    Nutrition Support
    Oncologic disorders
    Ophthalmic disorders
    Psychiatric disorders
    Renal disorders
    Respiratory disorders
    Urologic disorders.
    Digital Access AccessPharmacy 2021
  • Digital
    Arturo Evangelista, Christoph A. Nienaber, editors.
    Summary: This book is driven by the considerable progress made by novel imaging techniques in understanding the pathophysiology and evolution of aortic disease and its diagnosis. Despite the lack of symptoms in stable conditions, most aortic diseases have a high morbidity and mortality. New therapeutic strategies such as endovascular treatment and surgical techniques have appeared to improve conventional surgery in advanced phases of the disease, but until recently, medical treatment has focused on the control of cardiovascular risk factors using beta-blockers to reduce aortic wall stress by reducing blood pressure and heart rate. Pharmacotherapy in Aortic Disease updates the reader on the new medical treatment that are changing the natural history of these diseases. Leading experts have created a critical in-depth, yet concise, analysis of the available medical treatments for different aortic disease entities. Both basic research studies and clinical trials discussed in this book serve as a base for improving therapeutic management, delaying the need for surgery, and prolonging survival in these patients.

    Contents:
    Aortic atherosclerosis as an embolic source
    Aortitis
    Aortic aneurysm
    Marfan Syndrome
    Acute Aortic Syndrome
    Chronic aortic dissection.
    Digital Access Springer 2015
  • Digital
    editors, Marie A. Chisholm-Burns, Terry L. Schwinghammer, Patrick M. Malone, Jill M. Kolesar, P. Brandon Bookstaver, Kelly C. Lee.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2019
  • Digital
    Marie Chisholm-Burns, Terry Schwinghammer, Patrick Malone, Jill Kolesar, Kelly C Lee, P. Brandon Bookstaver.
    Summary: "Pharmacotherapy Principles & Practice uses a solid evidence-based approach to teach you how to design, implement, monitor, and evaluate medication therapy. Updated with additional content and reflecting the latest findings, this sixth edition provides everything you need to gain an in-depth understanding of the underlying principles of the pharmacotherapy of disease--and their practical application. All chapters were written or reviewed by pharmacists, nurse practitioners, physician assists, and physicians recognized by authorities in their fields. The book opens with an insightful introductory chapter and is followed by five chapters focused on specific populations: pediatrics, geriatrics, palliative care, critical care, and global health and travel medicine. The subsequent 97 disease-based chapters cover epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical presentation and diagnosis, and nonpharmacologic therapy, followed by clear recommendations for medication selection, desired outcomes, dosing, and patient monitoring"--Amazon.

    Contents:
    Part I. Special Populations. Part II. Disorders of Order Systems. Cardiovascular Disorders
    Respiratory Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Renal Disorders
    Neurologic Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders
    Endocrinologic Disorders
    Gynecologic and Obstetric Disorders
    Urologic Disorders
    Immunologic Disorders
    Bone and Joint Disorders
    Disorders of the Eyes, Ears, Nose, and Throat
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Hematologic Disorders
    Diseases of Infectious Origin
    Oncologic Disorders
    Nutrition and Nutritional Disorders.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2022
  • Digital
    Kathryn R. Matthias, Michael D. Katz.
    Contents:
    An Introduction On How To Use Study Guide And Practice Case
    Cardiovascular Disorders
    Respiratory Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Renal Disorders
    Neurologic Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders
    Endocrinologic Disorders
    Gynecologic And Obstetric Disorders
    Urologic Disorders - Immunologic Disorders
    Bone And Joint Disorders
    Disorders Of The Eyes, Ears, Nose, And Throat
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Hematologic Disorders
    Diseases Of Infectious Origin
    Oncologic Disorders
    Nutrition And Nutritional Disorders.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2023
  • Digital
    Michael D. Katz, Kathryn R. Matthias.
    Contents:
    Cardiovascular Disorders
    Respiratory Disorders
    Gastrointestinal Disorders
    Renal Disorders
    Neurologic Disorders
    Psychiatric Disorders
    Endocrinologic Disorders
    Gynecologic And Obstetric Disorders
    Urologic Disorders - Immunologic Disorders
    Bone And Joint Disorders
    Disorders Of The Eyes, Ears, Nose, And Throat
    Dermatologic Disorders
    Hematologic Disorders
    Diseases Of Infectious Origin
    Oncologic Disorders
    Nutrition And Nutritional Disorders.
    Digital Access AccessAPN 2020
  • Digital
    I. Ralph Edwards, Marie Lindquist, editors.
    Contents:
    1. How to learn Pharmacovigilance, now and in the Future
    2. Lost in Regulation
    3. What is the Future of Pharmacovigilance and how can we Make it as Good as Possible?
    4. Some Other Ideas About the Future of Pharmac